System Manual SIMOCODE Pro En

Motor Management and Control DevicesSIMOCODE pro

System Manual • 05/2011

Industrial Controls

Answers for industry.

Safety guidelinesTable of contentsImportant information

System description 1Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter 2

Motor protection 3

Motor control 4

Monitoring functions 5

Outputs 6

Inputs 7

Analog value recording 8

3UF50 compatibility mode 9

Standard functions 10

Logic modules 11

Communication 12

Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13

Commissioning and servicing 14

Alarms, faults and system events 15

Tables A

Data formats and data records B

Dimension drawings C

Technical data D

Example circuits ESafety and commissioning information for EEx areas F

Index

List of abbreviations

Glossary

Feedback form

System manual

Edition 05/2011

Order number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE®pro

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions..

Danger

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice

indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.

Warning

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Siemens AGIndustry SectorPostfach 48 4890026 NÜRNBERGGERMANY

631 6050-22 DS 03 10/2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2011Subject to change

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB631 6050-22 DS 03 i

Table of contents

Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi

1 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91.3 Application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111.4 Check list for selecting a device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131.5 Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.5.1 Protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.5.2 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.5.3 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.5.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.5.5 Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules . . . 1-211.5.7 Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221.6 Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-241.7 Description of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-291.7.1 Basic units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-291.7.2 Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-321.7.3 Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V. . . . . . . . . . . 1-341.7.4 Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and

SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-931.7.5 Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the

SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-941.7.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,

SIMOCODE pro V device series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-961.7.7 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . 1-991.7.8 Configuration information for using an operator panel with display

and/or a decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1061.7.9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1071.7.10 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1091.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1111.8.1 Function blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1111.9 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

2 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction and objective of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . . . 2-32.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP . 2-10

Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro

ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.2 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.3 Unbalance protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133.4 Stalled rotor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143.5 Thermistor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

4 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.3 Releases and enabled control command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74.1.4 Control station settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.2 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.2 General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154.2.3 "Overload relay" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204.2.4 "Direct starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-334.2.9 "Dahlander" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-374.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-404.2.11 "Pole changing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-444.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-474.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-514.2.14 "Positioner" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-544.2.15 "Soft starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-594.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-624.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status

information for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

5 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Earth-fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.2 Internal earth-fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.1.3 External earth-fault monitoring (with summation current transformer) . . . 5-45.2 Current limit monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.2 I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.2.3 I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75.3 Voltage monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.4 Cos phi monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115.5 Active power monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135.6 0/4-20 mA monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155.7 Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185.7.2 Operating hours monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Table of contents

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 iii

5.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205.8 Temperature monitoring (analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Basic unit outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 Operator panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66.4 Digital module outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96.5 Analog module output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116.6 Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166.7 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Basic unit inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.3 Operator panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.4 Digital module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97.5 Temperature module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127.6 Analog module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147.7 Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-167.8 Acyclic Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

8 Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

9 3UF50 compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

10 Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.2 Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-410.3 Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.4 External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1010.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.5.1 Response for positioner control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1410.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1510.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1710.8 Safety-oriented tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1810.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2410.10 Timestamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

11 Logic modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.2 Truth table 3I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.3 Truth table 2I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-611.4 Truth table 5I/2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-711.5 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro

iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.7 Signal conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1511.8 Non-volatile elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1811.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2111.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2211.11 Limit monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2311.12 Calculators (calculation modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

12 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-412.3 Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-512.4 Telegram description and data access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-612.4.1 Cyclic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-612.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-712.4.3 Configuration of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-812.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . . 12-1712.5.1 Slave operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1712.5.2 Preparing the data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1712.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the

configuration software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1812.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave

via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1912.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . 12-2012.6 Evaluating diagnostics data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2112.6.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2112.6.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . 12-2212.7 Data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2412.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2512.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2512.8.2 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2612.8.3 Parameter data during startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2712.9 Timestamping/time synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28

13 Mounting, wiring, interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-213.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-413.2.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . . . . . . . 13-413.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513.2.3 Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-613.2.4 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-713.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-813.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel . . . . . 13-1013.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1213.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . . . . . . . 13-1213.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2513.3.3 Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3013.3.4 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3113.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer

(interposing transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33

Table of contents

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 v

13.4 System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3613.4.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3613.4.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling

module, current measuring modules and current/voltage measuringmodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39

13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local orDM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41

13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel withdisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42

13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4613.6 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

14 Commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 General information about commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214.2 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.2.1 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-514.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel . 14-614.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or

DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-714.3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-814.3.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-814.3.2 Securing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-914.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1114.3.4 Resetting the factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1414.4 Error buffer/reading out error protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1514.5 Event buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

15 Alarms, faults and system events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status informationfor the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.2 Abbreviations and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3A.3 Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5A.4 Socket assignment table - analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12A.5 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

B Data formats and data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Handling data records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.1.1 Writing/reading data records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5B.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6B.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8B.4 Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8B.5 Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9B.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10B.7 Data record 73 - Event memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11B.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro

vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.9 Data record 94 - Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19B.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20B.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21B.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26B.13 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30B.14 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2

(plug ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-37B.15 Data record 139 - Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40B.16 Data Record 160 - Communication parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41B.17 Data record 165 - Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41B.18 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42B.19 Data record 203 - Acyclic send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43B.20 Data record 224 - Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44B.21 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-45B.21.1 Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45B.21.2 Direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46B.21.3 Reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47B.21.4 Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48B.21.5 Star-delta starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49B.21.6 Star-delta reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50B.21.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51B.21.8 Dahlander reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52B.21.9 Pole changing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53B.21.10 Pole-changing reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54B.21.11 Solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55B.21.12 Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56B.21.13 Soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57B.21.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58

C Dimension drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.2 3UF710 current measuring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4C.2.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5C.2.4 Current measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6C.2.5 Current measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7C.3 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.3.1 Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.3.2 Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Table of contents

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 vii

C.3.3 Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

C.3.4 Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C.3.5 Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13C.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13C.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13C.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14C.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15C.7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16C.7.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16C.7.2 Operator panel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

D Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1 Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2D.2 Technical data of the basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4D.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage

measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7D.4 Technical data of the decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9D.5 Technical data of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10D.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10D.5.2 Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules. . D-12D.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14D.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17D.5.5 Technical data of the analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19D.5.6 Technical data of the earth-fault module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20D.5.7 Technical data of the temperature module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21D.6 Technical data of the operator panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22D.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22D.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23D.7 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit

currents up to 100 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24D.8 Typical reaction times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

E Example circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2E.2 "Overload relay" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3E.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4E.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5E.3 "Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6E.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6E.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7E.4 "Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8E.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8E.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro

viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.5 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example circuit . . . . . . . . . E-10E.5.1 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . E-10E.5.2 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram . . . . E-11E.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12E.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) . . . . . . . E-12E.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta). . E-13E.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable). . . E-14E.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply

cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15E.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16E.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16E.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17E.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18E.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18E.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19E.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20E.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20E.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21E.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23E.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24E.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25E.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26E.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26E.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . E-27E.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29E.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30E.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31E.13 "Positioner" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32E.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32E.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33E.13.3 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34E.13.4 "Positioner 2" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35E.13.5 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36E.13.6 "Positioner 3" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37E.13.7 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38E.13.8 "Positioner 4" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39E.13.9 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40E.13.10 "Positioner 5" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41E.14 "Soft starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42E.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . . . E-42E.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43E.14.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . E-44E.14.4 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . E-45E.15 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46E.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,

3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46E.15.2 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"

(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47E.15.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"

(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48

Table of contents

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 ix

E.15.4 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-49

E.16 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50E.16.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50E.16.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example . . . . . . . . . . E-51

F Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas. . . . . . . . . . . F-1

F.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2F.2 Set-up and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3F.2.1 Setting the rated motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5F.2.3 Sensor circuit wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6F.2.4 Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to

IEC 60947-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6F.2.5 Cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6F.2.6 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7F.2.7 Further safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8F.2.8 Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8F.2.9 Safety data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8F.3 Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.4 Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9F.5 Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations-1

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1

Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro

x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 xi

Important information

Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor management system and its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing starter application as an example.In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and fault elimination, this manual also contains information of special importance to service and maintenance personnel.To assist in configuration, this manual also contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings and technical data of system components.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation technology.

Topics

This manual consists of instructional chapters for reference purposes. The following table lists the most relevant topics. Topics with a gray background correspond largely with the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software:

Topic Target group

System description Configurators, plannersShort instructions for commissioning a reversing starter

Configurators, planners, technicians, commissioners

Motor protection Configurators, commissionersMotor control Configurators, PLC programmersMonitoring functions Configurators, programmers,

commissioners, service personnelOutputs Configurators, planners, programmersInputs Configurators, planners, programmersAnalog value recording Configurators, programmers,

commissioners, service personnel3UF50 compatibility mode Configurators, PLC programmersStandard functions Configurators, programmersLogic modules Configurators, programmersCommunication Configurators, PLC programmersMounting, wiring, interfaces Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and

service personnelCommissioning and servicing Commissioners, electricians, maintenance

and service personnelAlarm, faults and system events Commissioners, maintenance and service

personnel, configurators, PLC programmers


SIMOCODE pro

xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Scope of application

This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components. It contains a description of the components applicable at the time of printing the manual. We reserve the right to include updated information about new components or new versions of components in a product information.

Definitions

• When "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the "SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be parameterized for various SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload. These are always displayed in tabular form:• "X" = Applicable• "-" = Not applicable• Preset values are underlined.

Short description of the responses:• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is

generated which is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The fault message and the device-internal signal remain on until the appropriate amount of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault has been eliminated and acknowledged.

• Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is generated that is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.

• Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed as required.

• Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are generated.

A delay time can also be set for specific responses.

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping - X X

Warning X X -

Signaling X X -

Deactivated X X X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s - -


SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 xiii

Further information

• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

• In addition to this system manual, you will need the following manuals:– "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" manual– The appropriate manual for the DP master

You will find further information on the Internet:• Internet:

www.siemens.com/simocode• Information and Download Center:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial• Product Information System (ProdIS):

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support• ATEX:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.• Certificates:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals.

Further support (Service and Support)

Technical assistance:Telephone:+49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8 a.m. - 5 p.m. CET)Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907E-mail:[email protected]: www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.

Correction sheet

A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to enter suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back to us. This will help us to improve the next edition.

Disclaimer of liability

The products described here have been developed to carry out safety-oriented functions as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer is responsible for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to as "Siemens") are not in a position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine not designed by Siemens.

Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are made or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals

http://www.siemens.com/simocode

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance


SIMOCODE pro

xiv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-1

System description 1In this chapter

In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.• Characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V

device series• Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits• Overview of functions• An overview of system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners and configurators• People who are now using SIMOCODE DP but wish to use SIMOCODE pro

as a replacement or additional system in the future• Optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional

information "about SIMOCODE pro"• System integrators/process technology.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Basic knowledge about load feeders• Basic knowledge about motor protection• Basic knowledge of control engineering• Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.

System description

SIMOCODE pro1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

1.1 Introduction

Overview

SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a flexible and modular motor management system for motors with constant speeds in low-voltage applications. It optimizes the link between the control system and the motor feeder, increases plant availability, and also allows considerable savings to be made during installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance.SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low voltage switchgear system and links the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder (via PROFIBUS DP) intelligently. It comprises the following functions:• Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection, independently of the

automation system• Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)• Detailed operating, service and diagnostic data• Open communication via PROFIBUS DP – the standard for fieldbus systems.• Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES software package.

Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.

Benefits

• Wiring effort between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced significantly by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the bus (see Figure 1-1 "SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)").

• Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and monitoring functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources and ensures that the feeder is fully functional and protected even if the control system or bus system fails.

• By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostic data in the feeder and process control system, plant availability is increased, and the feeder is easier to service and maintain.

• The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder thanks to the high degree of modularity.

• SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions for every customer application.

• By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function, the quantity of required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This drives down storage costs and limits potential wiring errors.

• Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more efficiently and ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the tripping response stays the same, even after many years.

System description


Fig. 1-1: SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

Control circuit Automation levelMain circuit

Connecting cable

Current measuring module

Basic unit

Operator panel

Remote

Protection + Monitoring(overload, thermistor, earth-fault …)

Control circuit(including monitoring + interlocks)

Communication(operating, service and diagnostics data

+ control commands)

System description


Features

Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection for nominal motor

currents up to 820 A:SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a combination of delayable multi-level protection and monitoring functions:• Current-dependent electronic overload protection (CLASS 5 to 40)

(see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection")• Thermistor motor protection (see Chapter 3.5 "Thermistor protection")• Phase failure/phase unbalance protection (see Chapter 3.3 "Unbalance

protection")• Stalled rotor protection (see Chapter 3.4 "Stalled rotor protection")• Monitoring of adjustable limits for the motor current

(see Chapter 5.2 "Current limit monitoring")• Voltage monitoring (see Chapter 5.3 "Voltage monitoring")• Power monitoring (see Chapter 5.5 "Active power monitoring")• Monitoring of cos phi (non-load operation/load shedding)

(see Chapter 5.4 "Cos phi monitoring")• Earth-fault monitoring (see Chapter 5.1 "Earth-fault monitoring")• Temperature monitoring e.g. Pt100/Pt1000 (see Chapter 5.8 "Temperature

monitoring (analog)")• Monitoring of operating hours (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Operating hours

monitoring")• Motor stop time monitoring (see Chapter 5.7.3)• Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time (see

Chapter 5.7.4).• Safety-oriented tripping of motor feeders, e.g. failsafe tripping in the process

industry, locally or via PROFIBUS DP (see "Failsafe Digital Module SIMOCODE pro Safety").

Recording of measured curves:SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example, illustrate the flow of the motor current during motor startup. See Chapter 8 "Analog value recording"

Flexible motor control with integrated control functions

(instead of extensive hardware interlocks):SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions, including all necessary connections and interlocks:• Overload relay (see Chapter 4.2.3)• Direct starter (see Chapter 4.2.4)• Reverse starter (see Chapter 4.2.5)• Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.7 and

Chapter 4.2.8)

System description


• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.11 and Chapter 4.2.12)

• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.9 and Chapter 4.2.10)

• Positioner control (see Chapter 4.2.14)• Solenoid valve control (see Chapter 4.2.13)• Circuit breaker control (see Chapter 4.2.6)• Soft starter control, also soft starter with reversing contactor (see

Chapter 4.2.15 and Chapter 4.2.16).

These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be assigned freely to device inputs and outputs (including PROFIBUS DP).These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet customer requirements of the motor feeder, without requiring additional auxiliary relays in the control circuit. This is achieved by means of freely-parameterizable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers, edge evaluation, etc., see Chapter 11 "Logic modules") and standard functions (external power failure monitoring, emergency start, external fault monitoring etc., see Chapter 10 "Standard functions").

Detailed operating service and diagnostic data:SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostic data and helps to detect impending faults in good time and stop these occurring with preventative measures. If a fault occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced and resolved within a short period of time. Plant downtime is thus reduced to a minimum or does not occur at all.See Chapter 1.5.7.

Communication:SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection). This replaces all individual wiring and distribution boxes (normally required to exchange data with a higher-level automation system) with a single two-wire cable.SIMOCODE pro supports:• Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s• Automatic baud rate recognition

• Communication with up to 3 masters• Time synchronization via PROFIBUS (SIMATIC S7)• Time stamping with high temporal precision (SIMATIC S7)• Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)• DPV1 communication downstream from the Y-link.

See Chapter 12 "Communication".

System description


Areas of application

SIMOCODE pro is usually deployed in automated processes that would incur great expense during downtime (e. g. steel or cement industry), where it is essential to prevent plant downtime by utilizing detailed operating, service and diagnostic data and ensure that faults can be detected rapidly if they occur.SIMOCODE pro is modular, compact and specifically designed to be deployed in motor control centers (MCC) in the process industry, and power plant engineering.Protection and control of motors:• In potentially explosive areas for type of protection EEx e/d according to ATEX directive 94/9/EC (see Chapter F "Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas")• Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water management)• In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing industry, power plants)SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including oil and gas), the steel industry, water management, and the paper, pharmaceutical, cement and glass industries. Further applications include power plant engineering and diamond, gold and platinum mines. SIMOCODE pro has been designed to meet the requirements of these industries even more accurately, based on experiences with the previous system (SIMOCODE DP). The availability of motors and thus the entire process plays an important role in these industries. Downtime caused by faults often leads to high costs. This is why it is even more important to detect impending faults and introduce targeted, preventative measures. Today, SIMOCODE pro provides the user with a motor management system based on years of experience and the latest technology.

System description


Device series

SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series:• SIMOCODE pro C – a compact system for direct and reversing starters

and/or for controlling a circuit breaker (MCCB)• SIMOCODE pro V – a variable system, which offers numerous functions in

addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C functions.

For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current measuring module. Both modules are connected to each other electronically via the system interface, by means of a connecting cable, and can be installed together as a unit (behind one another) or separately (side-by-side).An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the second system interface on the basic unit, and installed in the switchgear cabinet door. The current measuring module and the operator panel are connected to the basic unit via connecting cables, which also supply the power.Besides the existing inputs and outputs present, additional inputs, outputs, and functions can be added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of optional expansion modules.All modules can be connected to each other via connecting cables. Connecting cables are available in various lengths. The maximum distance between modules (e.g. between basic unit and current measuring module) is 2.5 m.Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters – each also possible in combination with reversing starter – solenoid valves and positioners. SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly versatile. Its functionality can be extended, if required, for example:– The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages

and adapted.– A current/voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage

measurement and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management).

– A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors.

– An earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current transformer.

– An analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and outputs, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.

– In addition to the standard operator panel (OP), an operator panel with display (OPD) is optionally available (basic unit 2 from version *E03*).

SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V. This means both series can be used simultaneously in your plant, according to requirements.Both systems can be used simultaneously in a low voltage switchgear system according to requirements without additional outlay.The parameterization of SIMICODE pro C can be transferred without problems. Removable terminals and terminal markings are identical for both systems.

System description


Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if required.

Typical configuration

The following schematic shows a typical SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration:

Fig. 1-2: Typical SIMOCODE pro hardware configurations

System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of system components".

UF

-011

29

Current measuringmodule (IM)

Basic unit (BU1)

Operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro C

SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)

Current/voltagemeasuring module (UM)

Operator panel (OPD)

Digital module (DM)Analog module (AM)

Additional optional expansions are possible

System description


1.2 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The following components are to be used and the following wiring is to be carried out:• Insertion and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current

transformers and analog/digital converters• Wiring of the control circuit• Connection of start/stop control devices• The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches• Wiring of the interlocks.

The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

Fig. 1-3: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

PLCStart/stop

Thermistorevaluation

Local start

Local stop

AutoManual-Q11

1-X3

-Q1

-Q1S2

S1

-X2

-X1

-F3

-F2-

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- Q1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

- F21 3 5

2 4 6

M3~ ϑ 1

PE

24 A - 20 mA

1N

2DA

-Q1 -Q1 -F2 -F3

Switchgear

ON OFF

Over

load

Ther

mis

tor

Automation level / I/O module

-F3

WVU

Curre

nt

-Q1

open

-Q1

N

-Q11 -Q12

Feedback Control commands

Man

ual/

ON/O

FF

-F4

1L1

-Q1

-Q12

auto

mat

ic

System description


Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. This has the following advantages:• Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current

transformers and analog/digital convertors are not necessary• The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified• The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit• The contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary

contact for locking is not required.

The following figure illustrates configuration with SIMOCODE pro:

Fig. 1-4: Configuration of a load feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- Q1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

J

PE WVU

2 4 6


L1/L+

F11

Q1N/L–

S0 S1

A2 A1

T1 T2

T1

T2

L+

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Control stationLocal control station [LC]

Basic unit (BU)

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1

System description


1.3 Application example

Description

The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill level indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks below a specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value is re-attained. The pump is then switched off.

Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:• Locally: Local control station [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual

contact)• LC in the switchgear cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for

switching on and off manually• At automation level: Control station PLC/PCS [DP] for remote-controlled

switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP• Via SIMOCODE pro: Via local mode fill-level monitoring and/or limit value

monitoring.

Schematic

Fig. 1-5: Schematic of a typical application example

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- Q1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

PE WVU

2 4 6

Systeminterface


Pump

L1/L+

F11

Q1N/L–

Connecting cable

S0 S1

A2 A1

T1 T2

Analog moduleIn+ In–

Out+ Out–

Fill-level indicator

T1

T2

PLC/PCS

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Liquid container

Control stationPLC/PCS [DP]

Control stationOperator panel

Optional:Laptop withSIMOCODE ES

Display

Basic unit (BU 2)

Motor current

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1

L+

L–

(AM)

ϑ

(Unit: % of Is)

Control stationLocal control station [LC]

System description


Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:• The pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring

module.• The analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog

module.

The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/PCS.

Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the effective motor current on a connected pointer instrument.

Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be connected to the operator panel so that further process data can be locally evaluated.

System description


1.4 Check list for selecting a device series

The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device series for your requirements:

SIMOCODE

Requirements pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Footnote

Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs) with control functions for direct starters, reversing starters, intelligent overload relays

✓ ✓ 1)

Monitoring of stalled rotor, unbalance, phase failure ✓ ✓ 1)

Current measuring, current limit monitoring, overload protection ✓ ✓ 1)

Earth-fault monitoring via the current measuring module (internal) ✓ ✓ 1)

Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)✓ ✓

Motor feeder with control function:Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters – each also possible in combination with reversing starter –, solenoid valves, positioners

— ✓ 1)

Measuring, processing and outputting analog values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc.(if necessary via an analog module)

— ✓ 2)

Current measuring and voltage measurement— ✓ 3)

Voltage monitoring for undervoltage— ✓ 3)

Power management, implementing power considerations (power, cos phi), power monitoring

— ✓ 3)

More than 4 binary inputs required (maximum 12) — ✓ 2)

Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series

1) Via current measuring module2) With expansion modules3) Via current/voltage measuring modules

System description


More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum 7) — ✓ 2)

Earth-fault monitoring with external summation current transformer via the earth-fault module

— ✓ 2)

Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC(max. 8) — ✓ 2)

Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)— ✓ 2)

Analog temperature monitoring with NTC, PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types — ✓ 2)

Safety-oriented tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons (local or decentralized via PROFIBUS DP)

— ✓

SIMOCODE

Requirements pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Footnote

Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series (Cont.)

1) Via current measuring module2) With expansion modules3) Via current/voltage measuring modules

System description


1.5 Overview of functions

1.5.1 Protection functions

Detailed description: See Chapter 3 "Motor protection".

Overload protection

Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with adjustable tripping characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements.

Unbalance protection

Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase unbalance.

Stalled rotor protection

Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.

Thermistor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) enable connection of thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring motor temperature.

1.5.2 Monitoring functions

Detailed description: See Chapter 5 "Monitoring functions" and Chapter 11 "Logic modules"

Earth-fault monitoring

Basic units have• Internal earth-fault monitoring:

For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit calculates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.

• External earth-fault monitoring for SIMOCODE pro V 1) 5):In the case of networks that are grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a summation current transformer, instead of carrying out internal earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation current transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer.

Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. Thus, impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: If a current limit is exceeded but still below the overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor belt.

System description


Voltage monitoring 2)

SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:• Monitoring for undervoltage:

Two-phase monitoring for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized upon reaching a particular pre-warning or trip level.

• Monitoring for further availability:Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or fuses.

Temperature monitoring 1) 3)

The SIMOCODE pro V temperature module allows analog temperature monitoring of, for example, the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits.SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for freely-selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits in use.

Active power monitoring 2)

The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load results in increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-load motor operation.SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase active power monitoring for freely-selectable upper and lower limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.

Cos phi monitoring 2)

The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active power does, particularly in the low-end performance area of a motor. Therefore, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft.SIMOCODE pro V enables two-phase monitoring of cos phi undershooting for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.

Monitoring operating hours, motor stop time and number of starts

In order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors that were either running too long (wear) or stopped for too long, both SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V can monitor operating hours and motor stop times.For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating that the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be reset.In order to avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

System description


Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4)

SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process variables via the analog module.For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter is to be cleaned.SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding process variables for freely-selectable upper and lower limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.

Phase sequence identification 2)

SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined by identification of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong, a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.See "Menu of the operator panel with display" and "Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display".

Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1)

SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by means of unrestricted limit monitors.See Chapter 11.11 "Limit monitor".

1) When using basic unit 22) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module3) Additional temperature module required4) Additional analog module required5) Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.

System description


Safety-oriented tripping

The SIMOCODE pro V motor management system has been extended by 2 modules/safety relays for the safety-oriented tripping of motors:• Failsafe digital module DM-F Local:

For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder via a hardware signal that is detected and analyzed by the module.

• Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder by a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.

These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06/2006).Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety Integrity Level can be achieved:• PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or• SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.

Safety technology and safety-oriented functions:• Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.• Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.

A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below:

System manuals and operating manuals are available at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

Caution

Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!A suitable safety circuit is required for capacitive and inductive loads!

Documentation

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)

Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F Local

Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe


System description


1.5.3 Control functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:

All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.For a detailed description of the individual control functions: SeeChapter 4 "Motor control".

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Overload relay ✓ ✓ 1)

Direct starter ✓ ✓ 1)

Reversing starter ✓ ✓ 1)

Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓ 1)

Star-delta starter, star-delta reversing starter

— ✓

Dahlander,Dahlander reversing starter

— ✓

Pole-changing starter,Pole-changing reversing starter

— ✓

Solenoid valve — ✓

Positioner — ✓

Soft starter, Soft starter with reversing contactor

— ✓

Table 1-2: Control functions

1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary to select the BU2 device version.

System description


1.5.4 Communication

PROFIBUS DP

SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:

Detailed description: See Chapter 12 "Communication".

1.5.5 Standard functions

Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated, e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:

Table 1-4: Standard functions

Detailed description: See Chapter 10 "Standard functions".

SIMOCODE

Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓

Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓

Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)

✓ ✓

Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y link

✓ ✓

Alarms according to DPV1 ✓ ✓

Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓

3UF50 compatibility mode — ✓

Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe" — ✓

Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services

SIMOCODE

Standard function pro C (BU1)

Number

pro V (BU2)

Number

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1

External fault 4 6

Operational Protection OFF (OPO) — 1

Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency Start 1 1

Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1

Timestamping — 1

Safety-oriented Tripping "Local" — 1

System description


1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the freely-programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Furthermore, limit monitors can monitor any value in SIMOCODE pro for undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit.Depending on the device series, the system offers several, freely-parameterizable logic modules:

1) Only for basic unit 2 from version *E03*

Detailed description: See Chapter 11 "Logic modules".

SIMOCODE

Logic module pro C (BU1)

Number

pro V (BU2)

Number

Truth Tables 3 Inputs/1 Output 3 6

Truth Tables 2 Inputs/1 Output — 2

Truth Tables 5 Inputs/2 Outputs — 1

Timer 2 4

Counters 2 4

Signal Conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile Elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit Monitor — 4

Calculation modules (Calculator) 1) — 2

Table 1-5: Freely-programmable logic modules

System description


1.5.7 Operating, service and diagnostic data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and diagnostic data.

Operating data

• Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the current flow in the main circuit; thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and contactors is not necessary

• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)

• Active power in W 2)

• Apparent power in VA 2)

• Power factor in % 2)

• Phase unbalance in %• Phase sequence 2)

• Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3, and maximum temperature in K 1) 4)

• Actual analog signal values 1) 5)

• Time to trip in s• Thermal motor model in %• Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of individual measured values with the help of the logic modules (calculators) provided by SIMOCODE pro V. For example, the temperature recorded by SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either °F or °C and transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS.

Service data

Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data for maintenance:• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable• Motor stop times, also resettable• Number of motor starts, also resettable• Number of permissible starts remaining• Number of overload trips, also resettable• Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable 3)

• Internal feeder comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding maintenance events, etc.

• Safety-oriented tripping monitoring in h, also resettable

1) When using basic unit 22) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module3) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with

current/voltage measuring module4) Additional temperature module required5) Additional analog module required

System description


Diagnostic data

• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further processing in the device or in the control system

• Device-internal error protocolling with time stamp• Value of the last trip current• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on

command), etc.• Diagnostic message "Local" und PROFIsafe

System description


1.6 Overview of system components

Devices

SIMOCODE

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Operator panel (OP) Installation in the switchgear cabinet door. Additional control station and display. With system interface for connecting a PC

Operator panel with display (OPD)—

Installation in the switchgear cabinet door. Additional control station and display. With system interface for PC connection

Current measuring modules (IM) 0.3 A - 3 A2.4 A - 25 A

Current measuring with through-hole technology. Basic unit can be snapped onCurrent measuring module (IM)

10 A - 100 A

Current measuring module (IM)20 A - 200 A

Current measuring with through-hole technology or bus connection system

Current measuring module (IM)63 A - 630 A

Current measuring via bus connection system

Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) 1)

0.3 A - 3 A2.4 A - 25 A

—Can only be mounted next to the basic unit, otherwise like current measuring modules, also:- Voltage measurement- Power measurement- Cos phi measurement- Phase sequence

Table 1-6: System components, devices

System description


Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) 1)

10 A - 100 A—

Can only be mounted next to the basic unit, otherwise like current measuring modules, also:- Voltage measurement- Power measurement- Cos phi measurement- Phase sequence

Current/voltage measuring module (UM) 1)

20 A - 200 A—

Current/voltage measuring module (UM) 1)

63 A - 630 A—

Decoupling module (DCM)—

For connection in series upstream from a current/voltage measuring module at the system interface when used in ungrounded networks.

Digital modules (DM)24 V DC monostable110 V - 240 V AC/DC monostable24 V DC bistable110 V - 240 V AC/DC bistable

— Additional binary inputs and outputs. Max. 2 DM possible

Failsafe digital moduleDM-F Local (DM-F Local) —

For failsafe tripping via hardware signal- 2 relay enabling

circuits, wired in parallel

- 2 relay outputs,common groundfailsafe shutdown

- Inputs:- 2 sensor circuits- Start signal- Cascade input- Feedback circuit

- Safety functionconfigurable viaDIP switch

SIMOCODE

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)

System description


1) Depending on the type of network (main current) in ungrounded networks, combinable with decoupling module (DCM)For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of system components".

Dimension drawings: See Chapter C "Dimension drawings".

Installation instructions: See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".

Failsafe digital moduleDM-F PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe) —

For failsafe shutdown viaPROFIBUS/PROFIsafe- 2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel- 2 relay outputs,

common ground (failsafe shutdown)

- Inputs 24 V DC- Feedback circuit- 3 binary inputs

Analog module (AM) —

Additional analog value inputs and outputs, and analog monitoring.Max. 1 AM possible.

Earth-fault module (EM)—

For connecting a 3UL22 external summation current transformer for earth-fault monitoring.Max. 1 EM possible

Temperature module (TM)—

For temperature monitoring via additional sensors(PT100, PT1000, KTY83/KTY84, NTC).Max. 1 TM possible.

SIMOCODE

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)

System description


Accessories

SIMOCODE basic unit

Connectable

system components

pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application

Connecting cable in various lengths, ranging from 0.025 m up to 2.5 m

For connecting system components via system interfaces

System interface cover For covering unused system interfaces

Memory module Saving device parameters. If a device is replaced, parameter transfer without PC

Addressing plug Configuring the PROFIBUS DP address without a PC

PC cable Connecting SIMOCODE pro to a PC

USB to serial adapter For connecting a RS-232 cable to the USB interface of a PC.

Door adapter Only for leading out the system interface, e.g. from a switchgear cabinet

Operator panel adapter Enables the use of the smaller 3UF720 operator panel in the front panel cut-out of the 3UF52 operator panel or the 3UF721 operator panel with display.

Table 1-7: System components, accessories

System description


Software

For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing

SIMOCODE basic unit

Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application

SIMOCODE ES Access via the system interface ondevice/PROFIBUS DP/SIMATIC S7 routing,depending which software version is deployed

PCS 7 function block librarySIMOCODE pro:AS blocks and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro in the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system

Table 1-8: Software components

System description


1.7 Description of system components

1.7.1 Basic units (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable terminals:

Fig. 1-6: Basic units

Basic units can be installed on a standard mounting rail or fixed to a mounting plate (with additional push-in lugs).Basic units are available in two versions for the following supply voltages:• 24 V DC or• 110 to 240 V AC/DC.

Basic unit 1 (BU1)

Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series and is used in combination with a current measuring module and optional operator panels. The following motor control functions are supported:• Overload relay• Direct starters and reversing starters• Circuit breaker control (MCCB).

LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault diagnostics, and indicate the basic status• Of the device itself via the Device LED• About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED• About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LEDFor more information see Chapter 14.2.3.

Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series

System description


Test/Reset button:Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in, the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset button.For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and Chapter 14.3.2.

System interfaces:2 system interfaces for connecting• A current measuring module• An operator panel.

Basic unit 2 (BU2).

Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series and is used in combination with a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module and optional operator panels.The following motor control functions are supported:• Overload relay• Direct and reversing starters• Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also

with reversing starter• 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing

starter• Positioner control• Solenoid valve control• Circuit breaker control (MCCB)• Soft starter control, also with reversing starter.In contrast to basic unit 1, basic unit 2 offers the following expansion options:• Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to

need• Implementation of a current/voltage measuring module in place of a current

measuring module• Additional inputs and outputs, as required.• Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel.

LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault diagnostics, and indicate the basic status:• Of the device itself via the Device LED• About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED• About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LEDFor more information see Chapter 14.2.3.

System description


Test/Reset button:Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in, the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset button.For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and Chapter 14.3.2.

System interfaces:2 system interfaces for connecting• A current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module• Expansion modules and• An operator panel.

Supplying the inputs

See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".

System description


1.7.2 Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It has an external system interface on the front to allow easier parameterization or diagnostics via a PC/PD. A PC (via PC cable with the SIMOCODE ES software), a memory module or the addressing plug can be connected to the front system interface (with cover for IP54).The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or an expansion module via the rear system interface using a connecting cable. The basic unit supplies power to the operator panel.The operator panel is often installed in the front panels of motor control centers. It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series and the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It also contains all the status LEDs available on the basic unit and the Test/Reset button, and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the switchgear cabinet.The following are available:• 5 buttons, of which 4 are freely-parameterizable• 10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely-parameterizable

The following figure shows an operator panel:

Fig. 1-7: Operator panel

Labeling strips:Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow LEDs 1 to 3:• Buttons 1 to 4:

6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip• LEDs 1 to 3:

1 individually inscribable labeling strip.

System description


Fig. 1-8: Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs

Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:

Fig. 1-9: Storage clips for labeling strips

0

DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT

Button 1 Button 2 Button 3

TEST/RESET

Button 4

LED 1 LED 2 LED 3

0

0

0

I

CLOSE OPEN STOP

CLOSEOPEN

Storage clips

Labeling strips

System description


Memory module "park position":

The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the rear of the operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet.In this case, the storage clips for the labeling strips cannot be used.

Fig. 1-10: Memory module "park position"

1.7.3 Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V

Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with display (OPD) is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can display current measured values, operating data, diagnostic data or status information of the motor feeder on the switchgear cabinet. The operator panel can only be used with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03*. It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the switchgear cabinet. The motor can be controlled via the buttons on the operator panel. Current measured values, status information, fault messages or the device-internal error protocol are simultaneously shown on the display.

Notice:

The operator panel can only be used with a basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03*.

Overall, the following are available:• 4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder• 4 buttons for display menu navigation, 2 of these are softkeys with various

functions (e.g. Test/Reset)• 2 system interfaces (front and rear)• 7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely-parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the

motor control, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, etc.)

Memory module in the "park position"

System description


The following figure shows an operator panel with display:

Fig. 1-11: Operator panel with display

The operator panel with display can be connected directly to basic unit 2 or an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by the basic unit. A PC (via a PC cable with SIMOCODE ES software), the memory module or the addressing plug can be connected to the front system interface (with a cover for IP54).

Caution

The operator panel with display may not be removed or plugged in during operation!

Note

When using an operator panel with display, the type and number of expansion modules that can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See Chapter 1.7.8.

System description


Labeling strips:Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:• 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip

Fig. 1-12: Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display

0

I

0 00

CLOSE

OPEN

STOP

OPEN

CLOSE

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Button 4

System description


Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with display:

Fig. 1-13: Storage clips for labeling strips

"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with display beneath the system interface:

Fig. 1-14: Memory module "park position"

Labeling strips

Storage clips

System description


Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostic data as well as the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or with the aid of symbols.

Fig. 1-15: Displays

1 Shows the set current Is / nominal motor current in A.The corresponding set current Is1 or Is2 is alwaysshown for motors with two speeds, depending whether the current speed is slow or fast, e.g. 8.00 A.For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the motor is stopped to alternate between the display of the two set currents. When running, the set current for the active motor speed is always displayed.

2

Shows the set class time of the overload protection, e.g. 10 = Class 10 (class = trip class)

3

Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the temperature monitoring of the motor via thermistors or analog temperature sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). T = Temperature monitoring is active.

4

The main display enables customized depiction of different measured values when running. This is the standard display at the topmost menu level. Predefined profiles in the display settings can be selected for this purpose. When the "Menu" softkey on the right is pressed, the submenus of the main display can be navigated (see "Read and adapt main display").

1 2 3

IL1

Menu8.00A/5/T

IL2IL3

2.80 A2.16 A2.00 A 4

System description


Operator controls of the operator panel with display

Fig. 1-16: Operator controls of the operator panel with display

1

Four freely-parameterizable control buttons.

These control buttons are used to control the motor with integrated status LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be user-defined. Labeling can be either as desired or via the labeling strips included in the scope of supply (see also Chapter 7.3 "Operator panel buttons" and Chapter 6.3 "Operator panel LEDs").

2

Two softkeys.

These softkeys can have different functions, depending upon the menu depicted (e.g. Open Menu, Leave Menu, Test/Reset). The currently assigned functions are shown on the lower left or right edge of the display.

3

Two arrow keys (up and down).These arrow keys can be used for menu navigation or for changing the display settings, e.g. contrast adjustment or selection of the main display profile.

1 32

System description


Menu of the operator panel with display

Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display

Main menu (OPD)

For details see "Displays of the operator panel with display"

Fig. 1-17: Main menu (OPD)

Main display

Measured values display

Status display

Statistics/maintenance

Communication (PROFIBUS)

Device I/Os

Display settings

Commands

Status information

Warnings

Faults

Error buffer

Event memory

Identification

Motor protection/motor control

About SIMOCODE

1

3

2

4

5

7

6

8

9

11

10

12

13

14

(OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)

System description


1 Main display (OPD)

For details see "Read and adapt main display".

Fig. 1-18: Main display (OPD)

IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]

I_max [A]

IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]

I_max [%]

I_max, Cos

I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S

I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P

In 1[mA] / Out [mA]

In 2[mA] / Out [mA]

In 1[mA] / In 2 [mA]

Max. temp. °C

Temperatures °C

UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N

Max. temp. °F

Temperatures °F

UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1

I_max, UL1-N, Cos

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos

I_max, UL1-N, °C

I_max, UL1-L2, °C

Calculator 1

Calculator 2

Energy consumed [kWh]

I_max, UL1-N, °F

I_max, UL1-L2, °F

(OPD above *E04*)

(OPD above *E04*)

(OPD above *E04*)

(OPD above *E04*)

(OPD above *E04*)

System description


2 Measured values display (OPD)

For details see "Display of measured values in the measured values display".

Fig. 1-19: Measured values display (OPD)

I_max [A]

IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]

Phase unbalance [%]

UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]

UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]

Cos phi, P [kW], S [kVA]

I1, I2, O [mA]

Max. temp. [°C]

T1, T2, T3 [°C]

Thermal motor model [%]

Time to trip [s]

Cooling down period [s]

Max. temp. [°F]

T1, T2, T3 [°F]

Last trip current [A]

(OPD above *E04*)

System description


3 Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)

For details see "Motor protection and motor control status".

Fig. 1-20: Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)

General faultGeneral warning

Current flowingDevice ok

Bus okPLC/PCS in Run

ON <<OFFON >>

ON <ON >Start active

Interlocking time active/Change-over pause act.

OPORemoteTPF

FCTC

FOTO

Positioner...ClosesOpens

Non-maintained

Cooling down period act.Pause time activeEmergency start executed

Device testActive

Phase sequence1-2-3 3-2-1

Enabling circuitSwitch-offSafety o.k.

Safety

123

DIP Safety

Enabling circuitSwitch-offPROFIsafe o.k.

Safety

456

78

DM-F Local

DM-F Local

DM-F PROFIsafe




command mode

System description


4 Statistics/maintenance (OPD)

For details see "Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance display".

Fig. 1-21: Statistics/maintenance (OPD)

Operating hoursMotor >

One more onlyNo start

Number of overload trips

Motor operating hours [h]

Number of starts

Permissible starts -

Motor stop time [h]

Motor stop time >

Energy consumed [kWh]

Number of

Operating hours basic unit [h]

Timer

Timer 2 - Actual value [s]

Timer 1 (2,3,4) - OutputOutput

Counters

Counter 1(2,3,4) -

Calculators

Calculator 1

Counter 1Output

Calculator 2

Safety: Time untilTest required [weeks]


Actual value

Actual value

parameterizations

System description


5 PROFIBUS communication (OPD)

For details:See "Status display for PROFIBUS communication".

Fig. 1-22: PROFIBUS communication (OPD)

Compatibility mode 13UF50 mode

PROFIBUS address

PROFIsafe address

Buso.k.Monitoring

Baud rate

PLC/PCSin RunMonitoring

Bus/PLC fault - ResetManualAuto

Start-up parameter block

TimestampingActive

Compatibility mode

3UF50 - Operating modeDPV0DPV1

3UF50 basic type

DiagnosticsDevice faultEvent

DiagnosticsWarningFault


System description


6 Device I/Os (OPD)

For details see "Displays the current status of all device I/Os".

Fig. 1-23: Device I/Os (OPD)

PTCHigh resistance/not present

IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]

UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]

Output [%]

Max. temp. [°C]

Outputs13

2

Inputs13

24

PTCokShort circuit

UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]

Inputs13

24

DM 1.2

Monostable outputs12

DM 1.2

Bistable outputs12

DM 1.2

INFeedback circuitCascaded

Inputs StartDM1 = DM-F Local

DM-F Local1Enabling circuit

Outputs

Sensor channels12

DM1 = DM-F Local

DM1 = DM-F Local

2

DM1 = DM-F PROFIsafe

3Feedback circuit

Inputs 1 2

DM-F PROFIsafe1Enabling circuit

OutputsDM1 = DM-F PROFIsafe

2

Input 1 (I1) [%]Input 2 (I2) [%]

InputsOpen circuit

T1, T2, T3 [°C]

Pt 100NTCKTY84

Sensor type Pt1000KTY83

SensorFaultOut of range

AM

AM

AM

TM

TM

TM

TM


(OPD above *E04*)





System description


7 Display settings (OPD)

For details see "Adapt display settings".

Fig. 1-24: Display settings (OPD)

Languages

Contrast [%]

Factory settings

Illumination [Off, 3 s,10 s, 1 min, 5 min]

Profiles

Voltage displayPhase voltagesLine-to-line voltages

Warnings1 Do not display2 Display

Voltage displayPhase voltages

Voltage display

Line-to-line voltages

Faults1 Do not display2 Display

Return to maindisplay [Manual, 3 s, 10 s,1 min, 5 min]

Display

Restoredisplay settings

1

(OPD above *E04*)

System description


8 Commands (OPD)

For details see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands".

Fig. 1-25: Commands (OPD)

9 Messages (OPD)

For details see "Display of all pending status information".

Fig. 1-26: Messages (OPD)

10 Warnings (OPD)

For details: See "Display of all pending warnings".

Fig. 1-27: Warnings (OPD)

Execute Test/Reset

Adopt address

Clear

Program

Read

Restart

Factory settings

Thermistor trip

Warning T>

Thermistor trip

Warning T>

System description


11 Faults (OPD)

For details: See "Display of all pending faults".

Fig. 1-28: Faults (OPD)

12 Error buffer (OPD)

For details: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer".

Fig. 1-29: Error buffer (OPD)

13 Event memory, OPD (OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)

For details see "Reading out the device-internal event memory".

Fig. 1-30: Event memory, OPD

Trip T>

Overload + phase failure

Fault - 1

Fault - 21

8Enabling circuit 0 ->1

DM1 = DM-F PROFIsafe

Event memory

DM1 = DM-F Local

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PROFIsafe Address:Enabling circuit 0 -> 1

...DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

Enabling circuit 1 -> 0

DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

System description


14 Identification (OPD)

For details see "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components".

Fig. 1-31: Identification (OPD)

Short codeSIMOCODE pro V

Comment

MLFB

Time stamp

MLFBPlant identifier

Location designation

Date

ManufacturerSIEMENS

Device familyLoad feeder

Device subfamilyMotor management

Device classSIMOCODE pro V

SystemSIMOCODE pro

ID number

HW version

FW version

HW version

FW version

Display

Display

Display

System description


Displays of the operator panel with display

Navigation is possible by means of the arrow buttons and softkeys. Each menu item may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and display are, in part, directly dependent upon device parameterization (e.g. selected control function) and hardware configuration (e.g. type and number of expansion modules used).

Main display The "Main display" is the default SIMOCODE pro display. It displays the current measured values, which can be selected via predefined profiles according to user requirements.For detailed information, see: "Read and adapt main display").

Measured values display The "Measured Values Display" provides an overview of all values measured by SIMOCODE pro.For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related measured values or temperatures. For detailed information, see "Display of measured values in the measured values display".

Status display The "Status Display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information relevant to protecting and controlling the motor.For detailed information, see: "Motor protection and motor control status".

Statistics/Maintenance The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to maintenance.For detailed information, see: "Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance display".

Communication The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning PROFIBUS communication.For detailed information, see: "Status display for PROFIBUS communication".

Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation

System description


Device I/Os The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules.For detailed information, see: "Displays the current status of all device I/Os".

Display settings All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via "Display Settings". In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting the main display.For detailed information, see: "Adapt display settings".

Commands The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or adopting parameters into the memory module or into SIMOCODE pro.For detailed information, see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands".

Status information The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all pending status information.For detailed information, see "Display of all pending status information".

Warnings The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings.For detailed information: See "Display of all pending warnings".

Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)

System description


Faults The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults.For detailed information: See "Display of all pending faults".

Error buffer The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-internal error buffer.For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal error buffer".

Event memory The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal event memory.For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal event memory".

Note This is only displayed for OPD versions above *E04*and BU2 above *E07* with a DM-F present.

Identification In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information/labeling regarding SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic unit, operator panel with display).For detailed information, see: "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components".

About SIMOCODE The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information about SIMOCODE pro.

Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)

System description


Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on their switchgear, various profiles are deposited in the operator panel with display that enable user-specific adaption of the standard measured values displayed in the SIMOCODE pro main display. The profile can be selected in "Display settings" -> "Profile" (see Section "Adapt display settings" on Page 1-81).If available, the effective set current, the set class time for overload protection and the use of temperature monitoring with the help of thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed in the lower left of the main display. The submenus of the main display can be navigated with the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the motor is stopped to alternate between the display of the two set currents.

IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (example) Displays the currents in all three phases in A.

Note

Only possible if a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module is used.

IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] (example) Displays the currents of all three phases in % of set current.

Note


I_max [A] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A.

Note


I_max [%] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in % of set current.

Note


Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display

System description


I_max, Cos (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A and the power factor.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used.

I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used. If an OPD above version *E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used, line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD is above version *E04*.

I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.

Note


I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power in W.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used, line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD used is above version *E04*.

Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display (Cont.)

System description


[mA] In 1/Output (example) Displays the current value at input 1 of the analog module and at the output of the analog module in mA.

Note

Only possible if the analog module is used.

[mA] In 2/Output (example) Displays the current value at input 2 of the analog module and at the output of the analog module in mA.

Note


[mA] Inputs (example) Displays the current value at both inputs of the analog modulein mA.

Note


Max. temp. °C (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C.

Note

Only possible if a temperature module is used.

Temperatures °C (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C.

Note



System description


Max. temp. °F (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F.

Note


Temperatures °F (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F.

Note


UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N Displays phase voltages UL1-N, UL2-N and UL3-N in V.

Note


UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.

Note


I_max, UL1-N, Cos Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V and the power factor.

Note



System description


I_max, UL1-L2, Cos Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V and the power factor.

Note


I_max, UL1-N, °C Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version *E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.

I_max, UL1-N, °F Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F.

Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version *E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.

I_max, UL1-L2, °C Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C.

Note


I_max, UL1-L2, °F Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F.

Note



System description


Note

If measured values are not depicted on the main display for a sustained period of time, a profile has been selected in the display settings that is no longer supported, due, for example, to a changed system expansion or changed hardware configuration. The profile must be reselected.

Calculator 1 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1 provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.

Note

Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a 2-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e. the unitless depiction of all 2-byte values available in SIMOCODE pro.

Calculator 2 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2 provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.

Note

Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a 2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e. the unitless depiction of all 2 or 4-byte values available in SIMOCODE pro.

Energy consumed (example)Note

Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used and the OPD is above version *E04*.


System description


Display of measured values in the measured values display

The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro measured values. Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all or only some of the values listed here will be available.Here are the most important menus:

I max (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable between A and % of Is.

Note


IL1, IL2, IL3 (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable between A and % of Is.

Note


Phase unbalance (example) Displays current phase unbalance in %.

Note

Only available if a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module is used.

UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example) Displays all phase voltages in V.

Note


U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.

Note


Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display

System description


Cos phi, P, S (example) Displays the power factor (0 to 100 %, or absolute, switchable via the right-hand softkey), the active power in kW and the apparent power in kVA.

Note


Analog input 1Analog input 2Analog output (example)

Displays the current values at both inputs and the current value at the output of the analog module, switchable between mA and %.

Note

This is only available if an analog module is being used.

Max. temperature (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C (switchable to °F).

Note

Only possible if a temperature module is being used.

T1, T2, T3 (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C (switchable to °F).

Note


Thermal motor model (example) Displays current internal thermal motor model in %.

Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)

System description


Time to trip Displays the estimated time to trip.

Cooling down period (example) Displays the cooling down period remaining before the motor can be switched on again after an overload trip.

Last trip current (example) Displays the strength of the current that was measured at the moment of the overload trip, switchable between A and % of Is.

Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)

System description


Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type of status information depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon the parameterized control function and the hardware configuration of SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.Here are the most important menus:

General

General fault, general warning

Current flowing, device ok

Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run

Control: The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.

ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>,Start active

Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status

System description


Interlocking time activeChange-over pause active

OPO, Remote, TPF

FC, FO, TC, TO Only for "Positioner" control functions, can vary according to the actual positioner function.

Positioner closesPositioner opens

Only for "Positioner" control functions.

Non-maintained command mode

Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status (Cont.)

System description


Protection

Cooling down period active,Pause time activeEmergency start executed

Other

Device test active

Phase sequence 1-2-3,Phase sequence 3-2-1 Note



System description


Safety

Safety DM-F Local Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", "Safety OK."

Note This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.

DIP switches, DM-F Local Status of DIP switch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Note This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.

Safety DM-F PROFIsafe Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", PROFIsafe active

Note This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.


System description


Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/

maintenance display

The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The statuses of the timer and counter, etc. are displayed, as well as operating hours, motor stop times and the number of starts.Here are the most important menus:

General

Number of overload trips

Motor operating hours

Operating hours > Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours monitoring.

Number of starts - Actual value (example)

Table 1-13: Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on thestatistics/maintenance display

System description


Permissible starts - Actual value (example)

One more only, No start

Motor stop time (example)

Motor stop time > Displays overshooting of the stipulated limit for motor stop time monitoring.

Energy consumed (example)Note


Table 1-13: Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on thestatistics/maintenance display (Cont.)

System description


Number of parameterizations (example)

Operating hours BU (example)

Timer

Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value (example)

Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output


System description


Counters

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value (example)

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output

Calculators

Calculator 1


System description


Calculator 2

Safety: Time until test required Remaining time until next test is required in weeks.

Note This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F present.


System description


Status display for PROFIBUS communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning PROFIBUS communication. In addition to the current PROFIBUS device address, the baud rate or PROFIBUS-relevant settings concerning process alarms and diagnostic alarms for the automation system are also displayed.Here are the most important menus:

PROFIBUS address (example)

PROFIsafe address Displays the PROFIsafe address.

Note This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.

Baud rate

Bus o.k.Bus monitoring

Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication

System description


SPS/PCS in RunPLC/PCS monitoring

Bus/PLC fault - Reset

Start-up parameter block

Timestamping active

Compatibility mode

Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)

System description


Compatibility mode 13UF50 mode

3UF50 modeDPVO, DPV1

3UF50 basic type

Diagnostic device fault/status info Displays which type of diagnostic information "device fault" or "status information" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via PROFIBUS.

Diagnostic warningDiagnostic fault

Displays which type of diagnostic information "warning" or "fault" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via PROFIBUS.

Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)

System description


Displays the current status of all device I/Os

The "Device I/Os" menu item gives a complete overview of the current status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit and any connected expansion modules (except for the earth-fault module) The type of status information displayed is, therefore, directly dependent upon the SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.Here are the most important menus:

Basic unit

Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4

Outputs 1, 2, 3

PTC high resistance/not present

PTC ok, PTC short circuit

System description


Current measuring

I L1, I L2, I L3 Displays the currents in all three phases in A.

Note

Only available if a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module is used.

Voltage measurement

UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example) Displays all phase voltages in V.

Note


U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.

Note


Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os

System description


Digital module 1, digital module 2

Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable".

Note

Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable or bistable.

Monostable outputs Outputs 1, 2 "monostable".

Note

• Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.• For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.

Bistable outputs Bistable outputs 1, 2.

Note

• Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.• For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.

Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)

System description


Digital module 1 as DM-F Local

Inputs DM-F Local Inputs "IN", "Start", "Feedback circuit", "Cascaded".

Note

Only possible if digital module 1 is "Local", an OPD above version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.

Sensor channels DM-F Local Sensor channels 1,2

Note


Outputs DM-F Local Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".

Note


Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe

Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe Inputs 1, 2, 3, "Feedback circuit".

Note

Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.

Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".

Note

Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.


System description


Analog module

Input 1, input 2 (example)Note


Output (example)Note


Open circuitNote



System description


Temperature module

Max. temperature (example)Note


T1, T2, T3 (example)Note


Sensor typePt100Pt1000NTCKTY83KTY85

Note


Sensor faultSensor out of range Note



System description


Adapt display settings

All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via the display settings. In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting the main display. The display settings can be completely reset to the factory settings via the corresponding menu item.Here are the most important menus:

Languages

Example: EnglishGermanFrenchPolishSpanishPortugueseItalianFinnish

Contrast

Example: 10 %15 %20 %25 %30 %35 %40 %45 %50 %55 %60 %65 %70 %75 %80 %85 %90 %

Illumination

Example: Stipulates how long the background illumination remains on after a button has been pushed on the operator panel with display, and it enables the illumination to be switched off permanently:Off3_s10_s1_min5_min

Table 1-16: Adapt display settings

System description


Profiles

See "Menu of the operator panel with display", main display

Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a defined profile is no longer supported by SIMOCODE pro, for example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the start display is shown instead of the default main display.

• IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]• I_max [A]• IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]• I_max [%]• I_max, Cos• I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S• I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S• I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P• I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P• In1/Output [mA]• In2/Output [mA]• Inputs [mA]• Max. temp. °C• Temperatures °C• Max. temp. °F• Temperatures °F• UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N• UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1• I_max, UL1-N, Cos• I_max, UL1-L2, Cos• I_max, UL1-N, °C (max. temp.)• I_max, UL1-L2, °C (max. temp.)• I_max, UL1-N, °F (max. temp.)• I_max, UL1-L2, °F (max. temp.)• Calculator 1• Calculator 2• Energy consumed [kWh]

Table 1-16: Adapt display settings (Cont.)

System description


Voltage display

Switch voltage displayNote

Only available for OPDs above version *E04* and BU2 above version *E06*.From BU2 product version *E07, configuration is carried out in the BU.

Determines whether "phase voltages" or "line-to-line voltages" are displayed.

Phase voltagesLine-to-line voltages

Warnings

Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the display is switched over to the menu item "Warnings" so that details are displayed (not switched on as standard).

Do not displayDisplay

Faults

Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the display is switched over to the menu item "Faults" so that details are displayed (switched on as standard, higher priority than pending warnings).

Do not displayDisplay


System description


Return to main display

Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to the main display.

• Manual• 3 s• 10 s• 1 min• 5 min

Factory settings display

Enables resetting of the the display settings (not to the factory

settings of SIMOCODE pro!)


System description


Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or adopting parameters into the memory module or into SIMOCODE pro. By safeguarding the device-internal parameterization against external access, e.g. via a password stipulated in SIMOCODE pro, individual commands and/or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.

Table 1-17: Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

Test/Reset Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.

Adopt address Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password has not been stipulated.

Program Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.

Clear Always possible.

Read Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password has not been stipulated.

Restart Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.

Factory settings Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.

System description


Display of all pending status information

This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A detailed description of pending status information can be found inChapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".

Fig. 1-32: Display of all pending status information

Display of all pending warnings

This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the case of a newly pending general warning, it is possible to switch to this menu item automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact cause of the general warning can be displayed.A detailed description of pending warnings can be found inChapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".

Fig. 1-33: Display of all pending warnings

Display of all pending faults

This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the case of a newly pending general fault, it is possible to switch to this menu item automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact cause of the general fault can be displayed.A detailed description of pending faults can be found inChapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".

h

Fig. 1-34: Display of all pending faults

System description


Reading out the device-internal error buffer

The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal error buffer. The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed here. See also Chapter 14.3 "Error buffer/reading out error protocol".A detailed description of faults can be found inChapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".

Fig. 1-35: Reading out the device-internal error buffer

System description


Reading out the device-internal event memory

The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal event memory. The two most recent events "DM-F enabling circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling circuit open" are displayed, together with the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and "DM-F PROFIsafe".

Table 1-18: Reading out the device-internal event memory

Switch to event memory display.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed",DM-F Local,

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the time and the related DIP switch configuration.

Note

Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed",DM-F PROFIsafe

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the time and the related PROFIsafe address.

Note

Only possible if digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe.

Last event "Enabling circuit opened" The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and the corresponding time.

Note

Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local orDM-F PROFIsafe.

System description


Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components

In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information about SIMOCODE pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware versions. Furthermore, this dialog enables the identification of the motor feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE pro, as well as a request for the location designation and display of the device-internal comment.Here are the most important menus:

Identification

Plant identifier

Location designation

Date

Comment

Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components

System description


Basic unit

MLFB (order number)(example)

Short code

Manufacturer

Device family (example)

Device subfamily (example)

Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components (Cont.)

System description


Device class

System

Identification number (example)

HW version (example)

FW version (example)


System description


Time stamp

Display

MLFB (order number)

HW version (example)

FW version (example)


System description


1.7.4 Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and

SIMOCODE pro V device series

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. For each feeder, the current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.Current measuring modules are available for the following current ranges (see figure below):• 0.3 ... 3 A with through-hole technology.• 2.4 ... 25 A with through-hole technology.• 10 ... 100 A with through-hole technology• 20 ... 200 A with through-hole or bus connection technology• 63 ... 630 A with bus connection technology.

Fig. 1-36: Current measuring module variants

The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable, which also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. Basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current

0.3 A - 3 A2.4 A - 25 A

10 A - 100 A

20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A

System description


measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.

Note:Current measuring modules with a set current of up to 100 A can be connected to the basic unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind one another). Larger current measuring modules can only be mounted separately.

1.7.5 Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device

series

The SIMOCODE pro V device allows use of a current/voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also enable:• Measuring voltages up to 690 V• Calculation and monitoring power and cos phi• Monitoring of the phase sequence.

The following figure shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:

Fig. 1-37: Current/voltage measuring modules

The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable, which also supplies the power.

0.3 A - 3 A2.4 A - 25 A

10 A - 100 A

20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A

System description


Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current/voltage measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments. Basic units can only be mounted separately next to current/voltage measuring modules.For calculating or monitoring performance variables, current/voltage measuring modules have additional, removable terminals that can be fed with all three phase voltages of the main circuit. An additional 3-core cable can be used, for example, to connect the main circuit directly from the bus connections of the current/voltage measuring module with the connection terminals of the voltage measurement module.

Note

The current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, version *E02* (from 04/2005) or later.

Using a decoupling module

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module.See Chapter 1.7.6.

System description


1.7.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,

SIMOCODE pro V device series.

When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded networks, each current/voltage measuring module must have a decoupling module connected upstream in series at the system interface. When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in networks with additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring each current/voltage measuring module must also have a decoupling module connected upstream in series. If using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these networks, it is imperative that an additional decoupling module is not used.• 1 decoupling module for connection in series upstream from a current/

voltage measuring module at the system interface

Fig. 1-38: Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V device series

Note

When using a decoupling module, the type and number of expansion modules that can be connected to a basic device are limited! See Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module".

Using the decoupling module in different networks

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module, especially for the following networks:• Insulated networks• High-resistance networks• Asymmetrically grounded networks• Single-phase networks.

System description


The table below shows decoupling module requirements for different network forms and configurations (star networks, delta networks and single-phase networks):

Star networks:

Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks

Star network Network configuration Decoupling modulerequired

Note

4-wire, star grounded with low impedance

No TN-S system according to IEC 60364

4-wire, star grounded with high impedance

Yes -

3-wire, star grounded with low impedance

No TN-C system according to IEC 60364

3-wire, star grounded with high impedance

Yes -

3-wire, star insulated

Yes IT system according to IEC 60364

L1L2L3

NPE

L1L2L3

NPE

R

L1L2L3

PE

L1L2L3

PE

R

L1L2L3

PE

System description


Delta networks: 1)

Table 1-21: Decoupling module requirements for delta networks

Single-phase networks:

Table 1-22: Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks

1) Mainly in North America

Delta networks Network configuration Decoupling modulerequired

Note

3-wire, delta single-phase grounded

Yes Parameter"Voltage display-> Line to line voltage" must be activated.

3-wire, delta insulated

Yes Parameter"Voltage display-> Line to line voltage" must be activated.

Center tap grounded Yes Parameter"Voltage display-> Line to line voltage" must be activated.

Single-phase networks Yes Parameter "Voltage display -> phase voltages" must be active.The applied voltage can be calculated as followsU_L1N + U_L2N.

L1L2L3

PE

L1L2L3

PE

L1L2L3

PEN

N

L

System description


1.7.7 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available:• Digital modules (DM)• Failsafe digital module Failsafe Local (DM-F Local)• Failsafe digital module Failsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)• Analog module (AM)• Earth-fault module (EM)• Temperature module (TM).

All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals. The expansion module is connected via a connecting cable to the first system interface of basic unit 2. Further expansion modules or the operator panel can be connected via the second system interface. The expansion modules draw power from basic unit 2 via the connecting cables.All expansion modules are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.

Fig. 1-39: Expansion modules, SIMOCODE pro V device series

Notice:

Expansion modules can only be used in conjunction with basic unit 2!Up to 5 expansion modules can be connected to a basic unit in any order.When using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module, ensure that additional limitations governing the number of expansion modules that can be connected per basic unit are observed!See Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module".

System description


Digital module (DM)

Digital modules allow the type and number of binary inputs and relay outputs on basic unit 2 to be further increased, if required.The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:

Table 1-23: Versions of digital modules

A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2. A further 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are available. All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and7 relay outputs.In the case of the monostable version, the relay outputs openafter switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.If required, you can set a delay time for the digital module inputs (see Chapter 7.4 "Digital module inputs").

Supplying the inputs: See Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".

Note

To implement some motor control functions, a further digital module is required in addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2.

Note

If two digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the closest to the basic unit via the system interface will be identified as digital module 1. The digital module that follows behind will be identified as digital module 2. If one digital module is connected to the front side and another to the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the front system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital module 1.

Inputs Supply Outputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

System description


Failsafe digital module DM-F

The failsafe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor management system with failsafe functions for switching off motors:• Failsafe digital module DM-F Local• Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe.

These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06/2006).Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety Integrity Level can be achieved:• PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or• SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.

Safety technology and safety-oriented functions• Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.• Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.

LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics:

See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules" system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (table below).

Test/Reset button DM-F:See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (table below).

Configuring the DM-F DIP switch:See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping" system manual "Failsafe digital module SIMOCODE pro Safety" (table below).

DM-F system interfaces:See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (table below).

System description


Documentation for safety-oriented functions and failsafe digital

modules

Safety-oriented functions and additional information on failsafe digital modules can be found in the following documentation:

System manuals and operating manuals are available at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

The failsafe digital module DM-F Local provides safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder via a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the module.From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DMF comprises:

Table 1-24: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital moduleFailsafe Local (DM-F Local)

The failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe provides safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder by a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe comprises:

Documentation

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)

System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)

Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F Local"

Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe"

Inputs Supply 1) Outputs

4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented):- Input 1: Sensor circuit- Input 2: Start input- Input 3: Feedback circuit- Input 4: Cascade input

24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs inputs (non-safety-oriented)


System description


Table 1-25: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital moduleFailsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)

1)

Warning

Dangerous voltage

Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!Overvoltage limiters are required for inductive loads.

Inputs Supply 1) Outputs

4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented) 24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs inputs (non-safety-oriented)

System description


Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to measure and monitor any process variable that can be mapped on to a 0/4 mA - 20-mA signal.Typical applications would be, for example, fill-level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer. The automation system has free access to the measured process variables. The analog output can, for example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via PROFIBUS.• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2

• 2 analog inputs (passive) for measuring 0/4mA - 20 mA signals.Both inputs are either set to 0 - 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA

• 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.

Notice

The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied by an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transducer). If the output of the analog module is not being utilized, it can be used as current source for an input.

Note

The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, version *E02* (from 04/2005).

System description


Earth-fault module (EM)

For networks grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22 summation current transformer, instead of carrying out earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, and 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer.In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can thus be expanded by a more precise, additional external earth-fault monitoring system. The earth-fault module adds an additional input for connecting a summation current transformer to basic unit 2.• 1 earth-fault module connectable to BU2.

Note

The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, above at least version *E02* (from 04/2005).

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module allows expansion of the SIMOCODE pro V device series with an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to monitoring thermistors of the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the highest temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The measured temperatures can be fully integrated into the process, and they can be further monitored and also made available for a higher- level automation system via PROFIBUS.This makes it possible, for example, to implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor windings, bearings, the coolant temperature and the gear oil temperature.SIMOCODE pro V supports different sensor types (NTC,KTY83/84, Pt100/Pt1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.

Notice

The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.

• 1 temperature module connectable to BU2• 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems

Note

The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, above at least version *E02* (from 04/2005).

System description


1.7.8 Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or

a decoupling module

If a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display is to be used in the SIMOCODE pro system, the following configuration information regarding the type and number of expansion modules must be observed.The following tables show the maximum expansion with expansion modules for the various combinations(x = possible, – = not possible):

Maximum expansion with expansion modules

1) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 5 of the 7 relay outputs are simultaneously active (> 3 s)

2) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 3 of the 5 relay outputs are simultaneously active (> 3 s)

3) Analog module output is not being used

Table 1-26: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display, a current/voltage measuring module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V basic units with 24 V DC or 110-240 V AC/DC

SIMOCODE pro basic unitUs = 24 V DC

SIMOCODE pro basic unitUs = 110-240 V AC/DC

Ope

rato

r pa

nel

Mea

sure

men

t

Dec

oupl

ing

mod

ule

Dig

ital

mod

ule/

DM

-F

Dig

ital

mod

ule

Ana

log

mod

ule

Tem

pera

ture

mod

ule

Ear

th-f

ault

mod

ule

Dig

ital

mod

ule/

DM

-F

Dig

ital

mod

ule

Ana

log

mod

ule

Tem

pera

ture

mod

ule

Ear

th-f

ault

mod

ule

Non

e/O

pera

tor

pane

l

I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

U/I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

U/I X ✓ 1) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓

✓ 1) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ -

✓ - ✓ ✓ -

✓ - ✓ - ✓

Ope

rato

r pa

nel

with

dis

play

I - Max. 4 modules Max. 4 modules

U/I - Max. 4 modules Max. 3 modules

- - ✓ ✓ -

U/I X ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓2) - ✓ ✓ ✓

✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -

✓ 1) ✓ 1) ✓ 3) - -

✓ - - ✓ ✓

System description


1.7.9 Accessories

The following figure shows accessories that are independent of the device series:

Fig. 1-40: Accessories

PC cable

For device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of a basic unit via the serial interface of the PC.

USB to serial adapter

For connecting a RS-232 cable to the USB interface of a PC.

Memory module

Allows system parameterization to be backed up completely and be transferred to a new system without additional resources or specialist expertise, for example if the device is replaced (see Chapter 14.3.3)

Addressing plug

For the hardware-related allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to SIMOCODE pro without a PC/PD via the system interface.Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:See Chapter 14.2.2.

PC cable

Memory module

Addressing plug

Connecting cable

Door adapter Adapter forSystem interfacecover

USB to serial adapter

Operator panel

System description


Connecting cable

In various designs and lengths. These are required to connect the basic unit to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules or the operator panel.

Notice:

The total length of all cables connecting modules and basic units must not exceed 3 m per system interface of the basic unit!

Door adapter

Facilitates access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for example via the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.

System interface cover

To protect and/or seal the system interfaces against soiling. In normal operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.

Operator panel adapter

Enables the use of the SIMOCODE pro 3UF720 operator panel in a front panel cut-out, in which a SIMOCODE DP 3UF52 operator panel (IP54 degree of protection) was previously used, e.g. after a system change. Can also be used when replacing a 3UF721 operator panel with display with a 3UF720 standard operator panel.

System description


1.7.10 Software

For communication-capable switching devices, device functions, hardware configuration, user-friendliness of parameterization software and suitable system integration (i.e. optimum and fast integration in various plant configurations and process automation systems) play a key role.SIMOCODE pro offers various software tools for thorough, time-saving parameterization and configuration and diagnostics for:• SIMOCODE ES for "totally integrated" commissioning and service• Object manager OM SIMOCODE pro for "totally integrated" in SIMATIC S7• PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block library "totally integrated" in PCS 7

SIMOCODE ES

SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or Windows 7 Ultimate and Professional.SIMOCODE ES is a user-friendly and clear user interface for the SIMOCODE pro motor management system for parameterizing, operating, monitoring and testing SIMOCODE in the field or from a centralized location.SIMOCODE ES provides detailed information for maintenance and service by displaying operating, service and diagnostic data and helps to prevent, localize and resolve faults.Online parameterization during operation avoids unnecessary plant downtime.The integrated print function in SIMOCODE ES makes it possible to document all parameters according to DIN EN ISO 7200.Additionally, the graphics editor allows very ergonomic and user-friendly parameterization per "drag and drop": Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can be described in detail and device parameterization can be documented graphically using comments. This speeds up commissioning and simplifies plant documentation. The optimized user interface and integrated graphic editor are used for parameterization. Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be linked graphically and the parameters set. The device parameterization can be documented graphically. See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, Teleservice via MPI, STEP 7 object manager.You will find a demo and latest updates on the Internet athttp://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads

Note

SIMOCODE ES is subject to continual maintenance and improvement.Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded athttp://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.



System description


Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM is part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE OM pro are installed on a PC/PD, SIMOCODE ES can be called up directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7 configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 Library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library is used to simply and conveniently connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks that correspond to the diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 and the elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for operating and monitoring. Integration is carried out graphically with the CFC editor.Signal processing and technological functions of the SIMOCODE pro PC7 function block library are oriented towards the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (Driver Blocks, Technological Blocks) and are optimized for SIMOCODE pro. Users that have previously configured motor feeders conventionally via Signal Blocks or Motor/Solenoid Valve Blocks can easily switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library.The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on CD-ROM enables the user to use the required engineering software on one engineering station (single license) including the runtime software to run AS blocks in one automation system (single license). If the AS blocks are used in additional automation systems, an appropriate number of runtime licenses is required (these are delivered without CD).

Note

The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and improvement.Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.

Notice

Observe the respective system versions!

GSD File

For integration into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP master system (automation system). The latest version can be found on the internet at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd.Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation system documentation.

Win SIMOCODE DP converter

This is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.


http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd

System description


1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

1.8.1 Function blocks

See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".

Properties

Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for the administration of various control stations, for the set control function, or for motor protection. Every function block has a name and may be equipped with inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs are used for the internal connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the setup of a device-internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.The following table shows the possible input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro:

Table 1-27: Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro

The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro:

Input Symbol Example

Plugs(binary)

Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary plugs. These are connected to binary sockets via software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Plugs (analog)

Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog plugs. These are connected via software to analog sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic send data.

Screwterminals

Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Input" function block. Control devices and auxiliary switches are normally connected there.

Receive data from PROFIBUS DP

From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. "Cyclic Receive" function block.

Output Symbol Example

Sockets (binary)

Function blocks in the basic units may have binary sockets. These are assigned via software to binary plugs. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.


DP

System description


Sockets (analog)

Function blocks in the basic units may have analog sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog plugs. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.

Screwterminals

Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output" function block. The contactors, for example, are connected here.

Send data to PROFIBUS DP

From SIMOCODE pro to the DP-Master, e.g."Cyclic Send" function block.

Binary terminal block

Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not assigned to a function block (fault, status, other), e.g. "Status - Device OK." (in the graphic editor).

Analog terminal block

Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance" (in the graphic editor).


DP

System description


Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and internally stored function blocks:

Fig. 1-41: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro

Connecting plugs with sockets

Note

The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the selected application. 1)

Note

If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized:If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated! 1)

1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.

1

2

3

1

2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4 4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

BU Inputs

CyclicSend

CyclicReceive

BU Outputs

3

DP DP

From DPMaster

To DPMaster

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP

Function Block A

Function Block C

Function Block B

Inputs(terminals) Sockets Plugs Sockets

4

Outputs(terminals)Plugs

SIMOCODE pro (external) SIMOCODE pro (internal)

Standard function

Control Function

Logic Function

Standard function

Function Block D

System description


1.9 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Analog Value Recording (Record)

Fig. 1-42: Analog Value Recording

See Chapter 8.

AM Output

Fig. 1-43: AM Output

See Chapter 6.5.

AM Inputs

Fig. 1-44: AM Inputs

See Chapter 7.6.

System description


Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1)

Fig. 1-45: Acyclic Receive Byte 0

See Chapter 6.7.

Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)

Fig. 1-46: Acyclic Receive

See Chapter 7.8.

OP LED

Fig. 1-47: OP LED

See Chapter 6.3.

System description


OP Buttons

Fig. 1-48: OP Buttons

See Chapter 7.3

Operation Monitoring

Fig. 1-49: Operation Monitoring

See Chapter 5.7.

Flashing 1 (2, 3)

Fig. 1-50: Flashing 1

See Chapter 11.9.

System description


OPO

Fig. 1-51: OPO

See Chapter 10.5.

Calculator 1

Fig. 1-52: Calculator 1

See Chapter 11.12

Calculator 2

Fig. 1-53: Calculator 2

See Chapter 11.12.

System description


DM1(2) Outputs

Fig. 1-54: DM1(2) Outputs

See Chapter 6.4.

DM1(2) Inputs

Fig. 1-55: DM1(2) Inputs

See Chapter 7.4.

DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

Fig. 1-56: DM1(2) Inputs, DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter 7.4.

System description


Extended Protection

Fig. 1-57: Extended protection

See Chapter 3.1.

System description


Extended Control

Fig. 1-58: Extended Control

See Chapter 4.2.1.

External Fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Fig. 1-59: External Fault 1

See Chapter 10.4.

Flickering 1 (2, 3)

Fig. 1-60: Flickering 1

See Chapter 11.10.

System description


BU Outputs

Fig. 1-61: BU Outputs

See Chapter 6.2.

BU Inputs

Fig. 1-62: BU Inputs

See Chapter 7.2.

Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4)

Fig. 1-63: Limit Monitor 1

See Chapter 11.11.

Emergency Start

Fig. 1-64: Emergency Start

See Chapter 10.7.

System description


Non-Volatile Element 1 (2, 3, 4)

Fig. 1-65: Non-Volatile Element 1

See Chapter 11.8.

TPF

Fig. 1-66: TPF

See Chapter 10.3.

Protection/Control

Fig. 1-67: Protection/Control

See Chapter 4.2.1.

System description


Signal Conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4)

Fig. 1-68: Signal Conditioner 1

See Chapter 11.7.

Safe Tripping, DM-F Local

Fig. 1-69: Safe Tripping, DM-F Local

See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping".

Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe

Fig. 1-70: Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe


System description


Control Stations

Fig. 1-71: Control Stations

See Chapter 4.1.

Current Limits

Fig. 1-72: Current Limits

See Chapter 5.2.

System description


Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)

Fig. 1-73: Test 1, Reset 1

See Chapter 10.2.

Thermistor

Fig. 1-74: Thermistor

See Chapter 3.5.

Timer 1 (2, 3, 4)

Fig. 1-75: Timer 1

See Chapter 11.6.

TM Inputs

Fig. 1-76: TM Inputs

See Chapter 7.2.

System description


Monitor 0/4-20 mA

Fig. 1-77: Monitor 0/4-20 mA

See Chapter 5.6.

Monitor Cos Phi

Fig. 1-78: Monitor cos phi

See Chapter 5.4.

System description


Monitor Earth Fault

Fig. 1-79: Monitor Earth Fault

See Chapter 5.1.

Monitor Power

Fig. 1-80: Monitor Power

See Chapter 5.5.

Monitoring interval for testing

Fig. 1-81: Monitoring interval for testing

See Chapter 5.9.

System description


Monitor Voltage

Fig. 1-82: Monitor voltage

See Chapter 5.3.

Monitor Temperature

Fig. 1-83: Monitor temperature

See Chapter 5.8.

UVO

Fig. 1-84: UVO

See Chapter 10.6.

System description


Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O)

Fig. 1-85: Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O

See Chapter 11.2.

Truth Table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)


See Chapter 11.3.

System description


Truth Table TT 9 5I/2O


See Chapter 11.4.

System description


Watchdog

Fig. 1-88: Watchdog

See Chapter 10.9.

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4)

Fig. 1-89: Counter 1

See Chapter 11.5.

Timestamping

Fig. 1-90: Timestamping

See Chapter 10.10.

System description


Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/9)

Fig. 1-91: Cyclic Send

See Chapter 6.6.

Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)

Fig. 1-92: Cyclic Receive

See Chapter 7.7.


Short instructions for configuring

a reversing starter 2In this chapter

In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter, with the aid of a practical example. The majority of the parameters have been appropriately preset at the factory for most applications.You only need to set a few parameters.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners• Configurators• Technicians• Electricians• Commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1 "System description")• Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.

Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter

SIMOCODE pro

2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

2.1 Introduction and objective of the example

Introduction

The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with:• Initially, a local control station - Local Control• Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP.

SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.

Objective of the example

This example is intended to:1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing

starter usingSIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.

2. Help you modify this example for your respective application3. Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps

The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current

switching devices and control and signaling devices)• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function

blocks), with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).

Prerequisites

• Load feeder/motor is present• PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present• The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring

module, has already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the through-hole openings of the current measuring module.

• PC/programming device is present• SIMOCODE ES software is installed• The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to implement

the basic factory settings in Chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the factory settings".



2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control

station

Necessary components

The following table lists the components required for this example:

Item Ordering data Order number

1 Basic unit SIMOCODE pro C(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)

3UF7000-1AU00-0(3UF7010-1AU00-0)

2 Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7100-1AA00-0

3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit to the current measuring module, depending on length

3UF793.-1AA00-0

4 "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic" software for parameterization via the system interface

or"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for parameterization via the system interface

or"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for parameterization via PROFIBUS DP and the system interface with the graphic editor, includes STEP 7 Object Manager

3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5

3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YA5,3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5,3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5,

3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YA5,3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5,3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5

5 PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC/programming device

3UF7940-0AA00-0

Table 2-1: Components required for this example


SIMOCODE pro

2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:

Fig. 2-1: Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

Main circuit Control circuit

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

L1L2L3NPE

Q1

- Q1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

J

PE WVU

2 4 6


L1/L+

F11

Q1N/L–

S0 S1

A2 A1

Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A

Basic unit (BU)

3 through-holeopenings

Systeminterface

Connecting cableSysteminterface

S2

Q2

CLASS 10Optional: Thermistor

1 3 5

2 4 6- Q2

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1



Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control station for the commands:• LEFT• OFF• RIGHT.

Displays, messages, etc. have not been taken into account.

Fig. 2-2: Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit via software.

Standard reversing starter Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro

Necessary interlocks and connections

S0: "LEFT" button S1: "OFF" buttonS2: "RIGHT" button

Q1: Contactor clockwise rotationQ2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation

L1/L+

F11

Q1N/L–

S0 S1

A2 A1

Basic unit (BU)

Q2

S2

L1/L+

N/L–Q2

Q2

Q1

S2

S1

Q1

Q2

S0

Q1

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1


SIMOCODE pro

2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

2.3 Parameterization

The basics of parameterization

After the external wiring has been carried out (contactor coils connected, current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized.For this you need to know the following points:

Point Description

1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations, control functions and motor protection.

2 Function blocks have names.

3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the set current for overload protection.

4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.

5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:• Connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific

sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into the sockets")• If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of

control function.

6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs and labeled accordingly:

7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets and labeled accordingly:

8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors will not be activated.

Table 2-2: Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks



General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:1. Setting values2. Connecting function blocks

Where this example is concerned, this means:• Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the

interlocks and connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.• Determine the set current Is for motor protection. In this case, the set current

corresponds to the motor rated current, i.e. 3 A.• The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the

"Protection/Control" function block via the software, i.e: – "BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)– "BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left).

• The plugs on the "Protection/Control" function block must be connected via software to the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.

– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket.

Fig. 2-3: Schematic of a parameterization example

The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function. See Chapter 4.3 "Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions".

SIMOCODE pro

• Connectrelay outputs

1

21

2

3

BU Inputs

Control station - Local Control [LC] Contactor controls

• Select reversing starter• Set Is

• Connectdigital inputs

BU Outputs

QE1

QE2ON<

OFF

ON>

Protection/Control

Is = 3 A

Right

Left


SIMOCODE pro

2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:

Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.

2 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you select this application, a range of presets will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later.

3 In the "Device Configuration" menu item, select SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if this is not available.

4 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Protection > Overload/

Unbalance/Stalled Rotor. Set the set current Is1 to 3 A.

5 Open the dialog Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Basic Unit and check the following settings:• BU Output 1 > Contactor Control QE1

• BU Output 2 > Contactor Control QE2

6 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control Stations

and check the following settings:• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU Input 1

• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU Input 2

• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU Input 3

Check whether the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2" are set.

7 Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC/programming device using Device > Save.

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls. QE1

QE2

1

2

BU OutputsProtection/

Note

By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.

Control

The control station "Local Control" is now connected with the binary inputs of the basic unit.1

2

3

BU Inputs

ON<

OFF

ON>

Protection/Control



Transferring parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and commission the reversing starter.Proceed as follows:

Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

Notice

Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the preset, 5-second interlocking time has expired.

Configuration with local control station completed

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a functional reversing starter with a local control station.If the wiring and parameterization are correct, the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the corresponding buttons are pushed.

Step Description

1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic unit.

2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system interface of the basic unit using the PC cable.

3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.

4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu, e.g. using Target

System > Download to Device. Select the RS232 interface with which SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.

5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to device successfully accomplished".


SIMOCODE pro

2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station

via PROFIBUS DP

In this section

In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You can switch between the local control station (local) and PLC/PCS (remote). Thus, SIMOCODE pro can be controlled locally via the buttons, as well as via PLC/PCS.The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:• The motor is switched off• The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights

up green• You have connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP

interface is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)• SIMOCODE pro is integrated with your automation system.

Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation system documentation.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address

First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.The following options are available:• Via the addressing plug• Via SIMOCODE ES.



Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:

Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:

Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Step Description

1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2 Start SIMOCODE ES.

3 Open the menu Device > Open Online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.Confirm with OK.

5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Download to Device. The address is set. Confirm the change of address.

Step Description

1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.The switches are numbered.For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.

2 If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.

3 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface.The "Device" LED lights up yellow.

4 Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

5 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.


SIMOCODE pro

2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Additional, internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and the necessary internal connections have been made.The following additional internal components, which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are now required:• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and

"RIGHT"• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC]

and PLC/PCS [DP] (remote)– Bit 0.5 = 0: Local control station [LC] active– Bit 0.5 = 1: PLC/PCS [DP] control station active.

The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been connected as factory default with the bits (sockets) of PROFIBUS DP Cyclic Send Data. The assignment can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control

Stations.

Fig. 2-4: Schematic of basic unit internal components for this example

Not all pre-assigned Cyclic Send Data is shown here.Assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Further Function

Modules > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.

Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.

SIMOCODE pro

1

2

3

1

2

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0.5

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

Status - ON<

OFF

ON>

QE1

QE2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

BU Inputs BU Outputs

Bit 0.0

DP

Cyclic

DP

CyclicSend

Control Stations

RIGHT

LEFT

S1

Receive


Motor protection 3In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about motor protection.Motor protection includes• Overload protection• Unbalance protection• Stalled rotor protection• Thermistor protection.

Motor protection operates alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background". All motor protection parameters are explained here. They can be active or not, according to the control function selected.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES

You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device Parameters > Motor Protection.

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

3.1 Introduction

Description

The motor protection functions "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" "Stalled Rotor Protection" and "Thermistor Protection" are described in Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.

Schematic

The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection") with optional parameter settings and events.

Motor protection


Fig. 3-1: "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and"Stalled Rotor Protection")

1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing current transformers with SIMOCODE pro V for basic unit 2 above version *E03*

Overload Protection

Set current Is2

Class 5,10, ... 40

Response at pre-warning level

Reset (manual, auto)

Type of load (3-ph., 1-ph.)

Pause time

Cooling down period

Unbalance Protection

Stalled Rotor Protection

Extended parameters:

Unbalance protection level

Stalled rotor protection level

Protection/Control

Event/Warning/Fault:

- Cooling down period active

- Pause time active

- Time to trip (analog)

- Thermal motor model (analog)

- Remaining cooling down period

- Last trip current (analog)

- Pre-warning overload

- Overload + phase failure

- Overload

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Tripping

- Unbalance

- Stalled rotor

Current from

Response at trip level

See

Table 3-1

See

Table 3-1

See

Table 3-1

See

Table 3-1

current measuring

Transformation ratio -secondary 1)

Transformation ratio -primary 1)

Transformation ratio -active 1)

Set current Is1

Transformation ratio -secondary 1)

Transformation ratio -primary 1)

Transformation ratio -active 1)

(analog)

module

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Adjustable responses "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled

Rotor Protection"

Table 3-1: Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" inChapter "Important information".

Notice

Deactivate Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-phase!

Response At prewarning

level

At trip level level

"Unbalance"

"Stalled Rotor

Protection" level

Deactivated X X X X

Signaling X X X X

Warning X X X X

Tripping - X X X

Delay 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) - 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) 0-25.5 s (0.5 s)

Motor protection


3.2 Overload protection

Description

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The trip class can be set to 8 different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the motor, improving performance. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model" and time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an overload trip, the remaining cooling down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current is saved in the case of an overload trip.Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or two speeds (Is1 and Is2).The motor rated current is usually set with set current Is1. This value can be found on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the overload trip characteristic curve.Set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds so that adequate overload protection for the higher speed is also ensured. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.

Set current Is1

Range: Depends upon the selected current measuring module orcurrent/voltage measuring module.

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer.Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.

Note

This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version *E03*.

Set current Is1: 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.Range: 0 - 8191,875.

Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.Range: 0 - 15.

Set current Is2

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module.

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer.Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.

Note

This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version *E03*.

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.Range: 0 - 8191,875.

Set current Is2: 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A

Motor protection


Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.Range: 0 - 15.

Note

In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.

Application examples

Example 1:

Rated motor current: 700 A.A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped once through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for ls = 820:1; ls = 700 A

Settings (primary and secondary):• Set current Is1: 700 A• Transformation ratio - primary: 820• Transformation ratio - secondary: 1

Example 2:

Rated motor current: 225 A.A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for ls = 820 : 2, ls = 225 A

Settings (primary and secondary):• Set current Is1: 225 A• Transformation ratio - primary: 820• Transformation ratio - secondary: 2.

Example 3:

The motor cable is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A, for a motor with a rated current of 0.25 A): Transformation ratio for Is = 1: 2; Is = 0.25 A

Settings (primary and secondary)• Set current Is1: 0.25 A• Transformation ratio - primary: 1• Transformation ratio - secondary: 2

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Class

The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor protection according to IEC 60947). With regard to tripping time precision, SIMOCODE pro fulfills the extended requirements of tolerance band E according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. Please take into account that with start-ups > "Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derating), i.e. a larger contactor selected.The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 3-pole symmetrical loads:

Fig. 3-2: Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads

1,15

Motor protection


The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 2-pole loads:

Fig. 3-3: Trip classes for 2-pole loads

0,85

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Response to overload

In the case of overload, the SIMOCODE pro response can be additionally adjusted here.Further information: See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Notice

With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "Tripping!"

Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can be reset. This is usually five minutes. The thermal memory (motor model – see below) is deleted after the cooling down period elapses.SIMOCODE pro supply voltage failures during this time extend the specified time accordingly.

Range:

Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

When the motor rated current (Is) is at 100%, the "Thermal motor model" is 87% (1/1,15 x 100%) in a steady state and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.

Pause time

The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups possible within a short period of time.

Cooling down period:

60 to 6553.5 secondsDefault: 300 s

Motor protection


The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without pause time:

Fig. 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time

Notice

Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

Type of load

You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load.For a single-phase type of load, Monitor Earth Fault and Unbalance Protection must be deactivated.Phase Failure Monitoring is deactivated automatically.

See Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks on Page 1-97.

Pause time: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Type of load: 1-phase, 3-phase

Pause time Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time elapses

With pause time

Trip level

ON

t

t

Overload trip

Without pause time

Motor

OFF

No overload trip

Trip level

100 %

100 %

Thermal memory (motor model)

t

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Pre-alarm delay

The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5s) determines the amount of time that the pre-warning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.In the case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning will already be issued at approx. 0.85 x Is.

Reset

If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + Unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically:• If the cooling down period has expired • If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting

value.

If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:• "Reset" button on the basic unit• "Reset" button on the operator panel.• Standard functions "Reset"

For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via bus.

Warning

The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.

Reset: Manual, Auto

Motor protection


3.3 Unbalance protection

Description

The extent of phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve takes place automatically, as the heat development in motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.

Level

The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react when overshot is set here.

Response

Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase unbalance:See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Delay

The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).

Level: 0 to 100 %Default: 40 %

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

3.4 Stalled rotor protection

Description

After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stalled rotor level (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can quickly be set to trip, independently of the overload protection.Stalled Rotor Protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed (e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds), and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads, as well as premature aging of the motor.

Level

Upon exceeding the stalled rotor level, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the selected response.Range:

Response

Here you can determine the response when the stalled rotor level is exceeded:See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Delay

The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor level must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).

Level: 0 to 1020% of Is

Motor protection


3.5 Thermistor protection

Description

Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2).Thermistor protection is used for:• Motors with high switching frequencies• Converter operation• Motors with heavy starting• Intermittent and/or braking operation• Restricted air supply• Speeds below the rated speed.

In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearings of the motor.

Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (erratically) when the temperature limit is reached.

Fig. 3-5: Thermistor (Thermistor Protection) function block

Response

• Overtemperature:Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response if the temperature exceeds the trip level.

Notice

For motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!


Response to sensor fault

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Event

- Thermistor short circuit

Thermistorinput BU

Tripping

υ

R

See

Table 3-2

See

Table 3-2

- Thermistor trip level

- Thermistor open circuit

Thermistor

T1

T2

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

3-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

• Sensor fault (sensor circuit error):Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short circuit or an open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.

Table 3-2: "Thermistor Protection, Binary" response

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Response Trip level Sensor fault

Deactivated - X

Signaling X X

Warning X X

Tripping X X


Motor control 4In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on:• Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The

following related topics are explained:– How control stations, operating modes and releases work together,– How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through to the

control function.• Control functions you can select according to need. The following related

topics are explained:– How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through from

the control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs– Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• PLC programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Electrical drive engineering• Motor protection.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameter > Motor control.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.1 Control stations

4.1.1 Description

Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different control stations. Dependent on the specified control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.• Local in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.• PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system

(remote).• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via

PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator

panel in the switchgear cabinet door.

Examples of control commands: – Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter– Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing

starter– Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander

circuit.The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station. Up to 5 plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the function block for each control station. The number of active plugs depends on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example, only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.

Motor control


Control stations

• Control station - local controlIn this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs – BU Inputs, DM Inputs) for the control commands to take effect.

Notice

The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. if a wire break occurs in the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.

Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control

• Control station - PLC/PCSThis control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation system (PLC/PCS) via the Cyclic Receive telegram from PROFIBUS DP.The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (Cyclic Receive) for the control commands to take effect.

Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/PCS

Pushbutton BU Inputs

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

1

2

3

4

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Local control station [LC]

ON <<

ON

PLC/PCS [DP]

ON

OFF

Releases

Releases

PLC

Cyclic Receive

DP

ON >>

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PLC/PCS [DP]

ON << PC [DPV1]

ON

OFF

Releases

Releases

Number: 16

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

• Control station - PCThis control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via theAcyclic Receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.

Note

If the SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take effect via the PC [DPV1] control station. In this case connection is not required!

Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC

• Control station - operator panelThis control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons on the 3UF72 operator panel, which can be mounted in a switchgear cabinet door, for example. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally to the function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take effect.

Notice

Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with two rotational speeds and two directions of rotation.For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".

Notice

If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands automatically take effect via the operator panel [OP] control station and must also be enabled here as applicable.

<>/<<>>Op. panel [OP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PC [DPV1]Releases

ON

OFF

R l

PC

Acyclic Receive

DP

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

Number: 16

Motor control


Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel

4.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors

Operating modes

You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different operating modes you can switch between:• Local 1• Local 2• Local 3• Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the communication must be

carried out via PLC.

Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g local and PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every operating mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to be used. The operating modes are so controlled that only one operating mode is active at any one time.Example: There are three operating modes in a system:

Table 4-1: Operating modes

The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other operating modes.

Operating mode Description

Key-operated switch operation,e.g. Local 1

Only local control entries are admissible!All other control stations are locked.

Manual operatione.g. Local 3

Only operator panel control commands and local control commands can be issued.

Remote operation,(e.g. Remote/Automatic)

Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted; locally, only OFF commands are permitted.

<>/<<>>

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Op. panel [OP]Releases

ON

OFF

Operatorpanel

OP buttons

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Mode selector

The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and S2 plugs must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.The following table shows the operating modes, depending on the signal status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:

Table 4-2: Operating modes depending on S1 and S2

The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations• Local control station [LC]• PLC/PCS [DP]• PC [DPV1]• Operator panel (OP)

Only the following are active:• The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations"

function block • The releases selected on "Control Stations".

Example for a dynamic operating mode switching in relationship to time:

Fig. 4-5: Example - operating mode switching

Input

Operating mode

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3Remote/

Automatic

S1 0 0 1 1

S2 0 1 0 1

0

0

Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

Key-operated

Time t

Remote operation Manual operation Remote operation Key-operated

S1

S2

0

switch switch

Motor control


4.1.3 Releases and enabled control command

Releases

Releases for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be activated, are assigned to each operating mode for each control station. This means that depending on the operating mode, it can be specified for each control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on and off. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the "Control stations" dialog in SIMOCODE ES.

Releases and enabled control command schematic

The following schematic shows the "Control Stations" function block and the operating modes:

Fig. 4-6: Function block "Control Stations"

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Local control

<>/<<>>

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Op. panel

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PLC/PCS [DP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PC [DPV1]

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote

S1

S2

Mode selector

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Enabled

ON

OFF

Controlcommand

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

To the control functionON

OFF

Releases

ON

OFF

Releases

ON

OFF

"Protection/Control"

Control stations

Enabled

Disabled

Activation of releases for control commands "ON" and "OFF" in SIMOCODE ES

Releases

Releases

station [LC]

[OP]

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Example:

Enabled commandsThe following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:

Fig. 4-7: Example for enabled commands

In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

Control command "OFF" enabled

Control commands "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)" enabled

To the control function"Protection/Control"

Motor control


4.1.4 Control station settings

Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets ,but usually device inputs).The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

PLC/PCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets ,but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

PC [DPV1] Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets ,but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Operator panel [OP] Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal (arbitrary sockets ,but usually operator panel buttons)

<>/<<>>

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Mode selector For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1, Local 2, Local 3 and remote with arbitrary signals(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

S1

S1

Table 4-3: Control station settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2 Control functions

4.2.1 Description

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders.They have the following important features:• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process• Monitoring the ON/OFF status• Tripping if a fault occurs.

For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON", which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit via the current measuring modules.All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications are already implemented in the control functions.Control functions contain:• Plugs for

– control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.

• Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON• Sockets for

– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.– Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.– Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".– Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) ON",

"Fault - Antivalence".• Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the

control function.• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is

active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions. Detailed description: See Chapter 3 "Motor protection".

Motor control


Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the control function ("Protection/Control", "Extended Control" and "Extended Protection" function blocks):

Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protection/Control" function block)

Pos. closing

Pos. opening

ON <<ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON >>

QE1

QE3

QE5

QE2

QE4

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays (lamp

QLE <<

QLA

QLE >>

QLE <

QLE >

QLS

(ON <<)

(ON <)

(OFF)

(ON >)

(ON >>)

(Fault)

Aux. control inputs *)

Plugs of the control commands are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.

*) Abbreviations

**) See also Chapter 3 "Motor protection"

FB ON Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSED

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSED

TO Torque OPEN

FB ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

Status information,ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Protection/Control

Control function

(Motor protection **)

e.g. PROFIBUS DP

control)

Control stations

Enabled Controlcommand

Settings:

•Control commands•Auxiliary control inputs

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)

Fig. 4-9: General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)

Contactor controls:

The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and taking the specified control function into consideration including all corresponding interlocks, feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital modules and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE contactor controls is directly dependent on the specified control function.

Lamp controls and status information:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The number of usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified control function.Feeder status feedback:• Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via

PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder there.

• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp for status display.

Note

If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE.../QLA lamp outputs show a different response (e.g. flashing).

Trip - Antivalence

Trip - End position

Trip - Double 1

Status - Change-over pause active

Trip - Double 0

Trip - Stalled positioner

Fault - FB OFF

Fault - Execution ON command

Fault - FB ON

Fault - Execution STOP command

TQ OPEN

Status - Start active

FB CLOSED

TQ CLOSED

Status - interlocking time active

FB OPEN

Extended Control

Settings:

•Timings•Operating mode•Star-delta

Motor control


• In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally indicate the following:

– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)– Saving change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.

• Additional status information:– Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present

during the start process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Solenoid valve" control functions.

– Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation, the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed.

– Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing starter" and "Star-delta" control functions the signal is present until the specified time has elapsed.

• Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:

– Feedback CLOSED (FC)– Feedback OPEN (FO)– Torque CLOSED (TC)– Torque OPEN (TO).

These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the selected control function.• Additional fault messages for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control

function: – Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the

corresponding limit switch. The positioner may have stalled.– Double 0: Both torque switches have been activated– Double 1: Both limit switches have been activated– End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a

control command– Antivalence: The change-over contacts of the limit switch do not issue

an antivalent signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function)

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Overload relay ✓ ✓

Direct starter ✓ ✓

Reversing starter ✓ ✓

Circuit breaker ✓ ✓

Star-delta starter — ✓

Star-delta reversing starter — ✓

Dahlander — ✓

Dahlander reversing Starter — ✓

Pole-changing starter — ✓

Pole-changing reversing starter — ✓

Solenoid valve — ✓

Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — ✓

Soft starter — ✓

Soft starter with reversing contactor — ✓

Table 4-4: Control functions

Motor control


4.2.2 General settings and definitions

Application selection

Selection of the control functions to be carried out by SIMOCODE pro:

Fig. 4-10: Application selection

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Parameter

Parameter Description

ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>

Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets of the "Control Station" function block. From there, the control commands come from the different control stations. The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example, with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.Default: Connected

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and the "Status - OFF" signal.Default: Status - Motor current flowing

FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve" control function that are normally connected with the inputs of the basic unit or the digital module are used to query the present status of the torque switch and the limit switches that are wired to the inputs.


• Deactivated:The control command on the corresponding plug of the control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.

• Activated:Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".

Saving change-over command

• Deactivated:Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented with a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.

• Activated:Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed.If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".

Table 4-5: General settings and definitions

Motor control


Safety/PROFIsafe - separate function from control function

• Deactivated:Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is always tripped, too.This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

• Activated:Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is not tripped.This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Load type You can choose between:• Motor• Resistive load (e.g. heating):

Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during switching on, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Tripping" functions.

Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON.If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching command, "Fault - Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.Default: 0.5 s.The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches.When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued, a fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) ON" is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously controls if FB ON = 1. If no current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated.

Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/switching off must be completed within this time period.Default: 1.0 s.After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to detect current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Trip - Execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls.After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault message "Trip - Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.


Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.Default: 0 s.

Change-over pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions, switching from FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time configured.In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause time extends the time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.Default: 0.00 s.

Max. star time For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function:Time-dependent switching from star to delta.Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)

Current measuring module installed

For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function:The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.• Delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/• In supply cable: Set current


Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)

3

Motor control


Fig. 4-11: Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON

Faults

The contactor controls are deactivated.The following is also issued:• A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control• A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED• The "Status - General fault" signal • The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.

1

0OFF

Switch ON ON

OFF

1

0OFF

Tripping

QE

FB ON

ET FT ET FT

Voltage failure,e.g. pulsating current

ET: Execution timeFT: Feedback time

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.3 "Overload relay" control function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. Control stations and inputs of the control function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault message of a protection or monitoring system.The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of overload.

Schematic

Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in: Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions".

Overload relay Description

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as factory default.

Load type You can choose between:• Motor• Resistive load (see Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and

definitions")

Separate failsafe function from control function

• Deactivated:Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages are avoided.This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

• Activated:Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function.This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Table 4-6: Overload relay settings

Auxiliary control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

QE3

FB ON* QLS (Fault)

*Feedback ON

Protection/Control

Load type

Overload relayMotor protection

Separate failsafe

control function function from

Motor control


Note

In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an overload trip (=0).This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.

Note

Monitoring of the number of starts is not possible for this control function.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.4 "Direct starter" control function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.

The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary control stations (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.

Schematic

Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays (lamps)

Status

QE1

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Direct starterMotor protection

ON

Separate failsafe

control function function from

command mode

Motor control


Settings


Direct starter Description

OFF OFF control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > ON control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket)


• Deactivated• Activated





definitions")

Feedback time Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)

Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)

Table 4-7: Direct starter settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)

• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise, i.e. backwards)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.


Every fault message causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND after the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Motor control


Schematic

Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Change-over

Load type

command Saving

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON <)

*Feedback ON

Reversing starter

Motor protection

RIGHT

LEFT

Interlocking time

activeExtended control

Separate failsafe

control function

command mode

function from

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings


Reversing starter Description

ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)


ON > ON > control command, clockwise(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)










definitions")



Interlocking time Range 0 - 255 seconds (0 s)

Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings

Motor control


4.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.• Stop with "OFF" activates the QE3 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms

when the circuit breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).

The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter pulse" is set.


Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the

"ON Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

2) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "OFF Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the auxiliary switch (AS) of the circuit breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".

4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS) of the circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard function.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Schematic

Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Separate failsafe

control function

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE3

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

400 ms

400 ms

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

Circuit breaker

Motor protection

ON

OFF

Auxiliary switch (AS)

command mode

function from

Motor control


Settings


Circuit breaker Description



FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (Connection always with socket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is connected to).







definitions")

Feedback time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control once the set feedback time has elapsed. Therefore, the feedback time should be greater than the motor stop time of the motor drive of the circuit breaker. Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)


Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function

Description

Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the motor with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.

Control commands

• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary control stations (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:

- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is

• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.

Safety guidelines

Notice

It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit.

Notice

If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Motor control


Notice

If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√ 3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.Example: In = 100 A Is = In x 1/√ 3

Is = 100 A x 1/√ 3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Is = 57.7 A

Change-over pause

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause. Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

Schematic

Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

Change-over pause

Max. star time

Transformermounted

*Feedback ON

Star-delta starter

Motor protection

Change-over pause

active

Star contactor

Delta contactor

Network contactor

Extended control

Separate failsafe function from

command mode

control function

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings


1)Notice

If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected to the supply cable!

Star-delta starter Description










definitions")


Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)

Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0.00 s)

Max. star time

Time-dependent switching from star to delta.Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)

Current measuring module installed 1)

The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.• In delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/√3 (default)• In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings

Motor control


4.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function

Description

With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star-delta operation.

Control commands

• Clockwise rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor, clockwise rotation)

• Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.


Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:

- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is

• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND after the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time.Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Start-up is always in star mode.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Safety guidelines

Note

It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.

Notice

If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Notice

If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/ smaller than normal must be set for the star-delta starter control function.Example: In = 100 A Is = In x 1/

Is = 100 A x 1/ = 57.7 A Current to be set Is = 57.7 A

Change-over pause

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause.Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

3

33

Motor control


Schematic

Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings


Star-delta

reversing starter

Description


ON > ON> control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

ON < ON< control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)


Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

ON <

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Change-over pause

Max. star time

Transformermounted

Change-over command Saving

Interlocking time

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

ON <

Star-deltareversing starter

Motor protection

Star contactor

Delta contactor

RIGHT - Network contactor

LEFT - Network contactor

Change-over pause

active

Interlocking time

active

Extended control


command mode

control function

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

1) Notice

If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected to the supply cable!









definitions")


Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)

Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0 s)


Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)

Current measuring module installed 1)

The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the mounting place of the current transformer/current measuring module.• In delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/√ 3• In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Star-delta

reversing starter

Description

Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings (Cont.)

Motor control


4.2.9 "Dahlander" control function

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.

Control commands

• SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).• FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star

contactor, FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (network contactor, FAST)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.


Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "FAST" => "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.

Change-over pause

The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Notice

Two set currents must be set for this control function:• Is1 for the slow speed• Is2 for the fast speed.Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need two external current converters according to the corresponding speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3 - 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information, see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection".

Schematic

Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

*Feedback ON

ON >>

ON >>

QLE>> (ON >>)

Protection/Control

Non-maintained


DahlanderMotor protection

Change-over pause

active

FAST

SLOW

Star contactor FAST

Extended control

Feedback time

Execution time

Load type

Change-over pause


command mode

control function

Motor control


Settings


Dahlander Description


ON > ON control command > (SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

ON >> ON >> control command (FAST)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)










definitions")




Table 4-12: Dahlander settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function

Description

This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• RIGHT - SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)

• RIGHT - FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (RIGHT-FAST)

• LEFT - SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 contactor control (LEFT-SLOW)

• LEFT - FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (LEFT-FAST)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary control stations (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.


The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed


Motor control


Change-over pause


Safety guidelines

Note

You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.

Notice


Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Schematic

Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "Dahlander reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

ON <

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON <<)

QLE>> (ON >>)

OFF

ON >

ON <

ON <<

ON >>

ON >>

ON <<Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Change-over pause


Interlocking time


Dahlanderreversing starter

Motor protection

RIGHT - FAST

RIGHT - SLOW

Star contactor FAST

LEFT - SLOW

LEFT - FAST

Change-over pause

active

Interlocking time

active

Extended control


command mode

control function

Motor control


Settings


Dahlander

reversing starter

Description

ON << ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)

ON < ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)


ON > ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

ON >> ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)










definitions")





Table 4-13: Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.11 "Pole changing starter" control function

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings at two speeds (FAST and SLOW).

Control commands

• SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).• FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE1 contactor control (FAST).• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.


It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.

Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the speed


Change-over pause


Notice


Motor control


Schematic

Fig. 4-20: Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

ON >>

ON >>

QLE>> (ON >>)

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Change-over pause


Pole-changing starter

Motor protection

Change-over pause

active

FAST

SLOW

Extended control


command mode

control function

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in:Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions"

Pole-changing

starter

Description


ON > ON control command > (SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

ON >> ON >> control command (FAST)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)










definitions")




Table 4-14: Pole-changing starter settings

Motor control


4.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function

Description

This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• RIGHT - SLOW: Start with ON > activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)

• RIGHT - FAST: Start with ON >> activates the QE1 contactor control (RIGHT-FAST)

• LEFT - SLOW: Start with ON < activates the QE4 contactor control (LEFT-SLOW)

• LEFT - FAST: Start with ON << activates the QE5 contactor control (LEFT-FAST)

• Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary control stations. Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.


The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time.Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed


Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Change-over pause

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being switched on simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" can be used to delay switching from "FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.

Safety guidelines

Note

At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.

Notice


Motor control


Schematic

Fig. 4-21: Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Interlocking time active

Change-over pause active

Control commands

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

FB ON*QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

ON <

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON <)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON <<)

QLE>> (ON >>)

OFF

ON >

ON <

ON <<

ON >>

ON >>

ON <<Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Change-over pause


Interlocking time

Pole-changingreversing starterMotor protection

RIGHT - FAST

RIGHT - SLOW

LEFT - SLOW

LEFT - FAST

Extended control


command mode

control function

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in:Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions".

Pole-changing

reversing starter

Description

ON << ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)

ON < ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)


ON > ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)

ON >> ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)










definitions")





Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing reversing starters

Motor control


4.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.The solenoid valve is brought into the corresponding end position using the control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE". SIMOCODE pro must be informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSED) when the end position has been reached.

Control commands

• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control.• CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 contactor control.


Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the solenoid valve into the "CLOSED" position.

Safety guidelines

Notice

The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module is not necessary.

Notice

If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip - Double 1" (= "CLOSED")If the end position feedback is different to the control command, the solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip - End position" (= "CLOSED")

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Schematic

Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

FB ON

Control commands

Auxiliary control inputs*

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

(OPEN)

(CLOSE)

(Fault)

OFF

ON >

FC

FO

Protection/Control

Execution time

* Abbreviations

FC Feedback CLOSED

FO Feedback OPEN

Non-maintained

Solenoid valveOPEN

FC

FOExtended control


command mode

control function

Motor control


Settings


Solenoid valve Description

OFF OFF control command (CLOSE)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > ON control command (OPEN)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)






Execution time Time required to reach end position.Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)

Table 4-16: Solenoid valve control function settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.14 "Positioner" control function

Description

SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function. The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the "OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active).The response of the limit/torque switches must be passed to SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.

Control commands

• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End position OPEN" is reached (Feedback OPEN)

• CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End position CLOSED" is reached (Feedback CLOSED)

• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.The drive remains in the present position.


Function schematic

Fig. 4-23: Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners

Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

TOTorque switch

TC

Motor shaft with springsat the beginning and end

FOFCLimit switch

Positioner

Gear

OPEN CLOSED

OPEN CLOSED

Motor control


Notice

The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated limit switch when the torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is connected. In this case, the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Trip - Blocked positioner". If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message "Trip - Double 1".If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Trip - Double 0".If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Trip - End position fault".

Schematic

Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

OPEN

Stop

(Fault)

CLOSED

* Abbreviations

FB ON Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSED

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSED

TO Torque OPEN

Auxiliary control inputs*FB ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

STOP

CLOSED

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Load type

Positioner

Motor protection

Interlocking time active

Positioner closes

Positioner opensFC

FO

TC

TO

Extended control


command mode

control function

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:

Table 4-17: Types of positioner control

Notice

The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to the inputs of the basic unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the limit switches must be 1-active.

Type

Tripping

TCTorque

CLOSED

FCLimit

CLOSED

FOLimit

OPEN

TOTorque OPEN

Positioner 1

After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSED).

— X X —

Positioner 2

After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSED) AND response of the associated torque switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)

X X X X

Positioner 3

After reaching the end position FO (OPEN). After reaching the end position 'CLOSED', the respective torque switch TC must also respond after the limit switch FC has responded.

X X X —

Positioner 4

After reaching the end position FC (CLOSED). After reaching the end position FO (OPEN), the respective torque switch TO must also respond after the limit switch FO has responded.

— X X X

Positioner 5

After reaching the end position or the torque. The actuator is monitored by either the limit switches or by the torque switches. The switches are implemented as change-over contacts and are checked for antivalence. In the case of non-antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a wire break and deactivates the positioner with the fault message "Trip - Antivalence"

Antivalent active Antivalent active

CLOSED OPEN

Motor control


Settings


Positioner Description

ON < ON < control command (CLOSED)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)

OFF Control command STOP(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)

ON > Control command ON > (OPEN)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)


FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSED" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is connected)

FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is connected)

TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSED" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is connected)

TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is connected)







definitions")

Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Execution time Time until the end position is reached.Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)


Positioner Description

Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings (Cont.)

Motor control


4.2.15 "Soft starter" control function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP.

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal

"Feedback ON" has expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.

• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.




You have to make the following assignments:

1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the network contactor.

2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.

3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.

4) Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.

5) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1".

6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Notice

In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time" parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running down time of the soft starter.

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-60 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Schematic

Fig. 4-25: Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings


Soft starter Description



FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"(connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket)






Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings

Control commands


Contactor controls

Status

QE1

FB ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON >

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

QE3

Displays

20 ms

QE4 ON

Soft starter

Motor protection

Network contactor


command mode

control function

Motor control



definitions")


Execution time At least > smooth running down time.Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)

Soft starter Description

Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings (Cont.)

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-62 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

4.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP. With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls (clockwise, i.e. forwards)

• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 and QE4 contactor controls (counter-clockwise, i.e. backwards)

• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the "Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE2 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.

• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.




The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:• Via the OFF control command.• Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Motor control



You have to make the following assignments:

1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the network contactor (right).

2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the network contactor (left).

3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.

4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.

5) Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.

6) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1".

7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note

An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.

Schematic

Fig. 4-26: Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Interlocking time

active

QE4

Control commands

Feedback

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE2

FB ON*

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON <

OFF

ON >

ON <

OFF

ON >

Protection/Control

Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Change-over

Load type

command Saving

(ON >)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON <)

*Feedback ON

QE1

QE3

RIGHT

LEFT

Soft starter with

Motor protection

20 ms

ON

reversing contactor

Extended control


control function

command mode

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-64 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings


Soft starter with

reversing

contactor

Description

ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)


ON > ON > control command, clockwise(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)










definitions")


Execution time Execution time > Smooth running down timeRange 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)


Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings

Motor control


4.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp

controls and status information for the control

functions

Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information forcontrol functions

Spec

ifica

tion/

Cont

rol f

unct

ion

Cont

rol s

tatio

nCo

ntac

tor c

ontr

ol

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<(O

N<<

)Q

LE<

(ON

<)Q

LA(O

FF)

QLE

>(O

N>)

QLE

>>(O

N>>

)

Stat

us in

form

atio

n

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dire

ct s

tarte

r 1),2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

LEFT

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLE

FT-

--

LEFT

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ON puls

e-

OFF

puls

e-

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

tast

arte

r 2)

--

OFF

ON-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

ta re

vers

ing

star

ter2

)LE

FTOF

FRi

ght

-St

arco

ntac

tor

Delta

cont

acto

rRi

ght

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

Left

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

-LE

FTOF

FRi

ght

-

Dahl

ande

r 2)

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Fast

Slow

Fast

star

cont

acto

r

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dahl

ande

rre

vers

ing

star

ter 2

)Le

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

fast

Righ

tsl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

Left

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g st

arte

r 2)

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Fast

Slow

--

--

-OF

FSl

owFa

st

Pole

-cha

ngin

gre

vers

ing

star

ter 2

)Le

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

fast

Righ

tsl

ow-

L eft

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Sole

noid

val

ve 2

)-

-CL

OSED

OPEN

-OP

EN-

--

--

-CL

OSED

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 1 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 2 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 3 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 4 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 5 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

-Re

set

ONco

mm

and

--

-OF

FON

-

Soft

star

ter

with

reve

rsin

g co

ntac

tor 2

)-

LEFT

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tN

etw

ork

cont

acto

r

Left

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

Rese

tON

com

man

d-

-LE

FTOF

FRi

ght

-

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

Motor control

SIMOCODE pro

4-66 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Monitoring functions 5In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions• Earth-fault monitoring• Current limit monitoring• Voltage monitoring• Cos phi monitoring• Active power monitoring• 0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring• Operation monitoring• Temperature monitoring (analog)• Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in the background". All monitoring function parameters are explained.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Programmers• Commissioners• Service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• SIMOCODE pro• Motor protection, motor control• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Monitoring functions.

Monitoring functions

SIMOCODE pro

5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.1 Earth-fault monitoring

5.1.1 Description

SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or earth fault.Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low impedance.Internal earth-fault-monitoring can be activated by means of parameterization. It covers two different operating conditions.• The normal operating condition up to 2 x Is. The effective operating current

must be smaller than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 30% of the set current Is will be detected.

• Start-up or overload operation from 2 x Is. The effective operating current is more than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 15% of the effective motor current will be detected.

Note

If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, false tripping may occur. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and an earth-fault module is normally used for networks that are grounded with high impedance.Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the 3UL22 summation current transformer. The response delay of the summation current transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. This response delay can be further delayed by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.A definable and delayable response can be parameterized when an earth fault is detected.An event is generated if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set additional trippings via parameterization.If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro V reacts by either:• Turning off the contactor controls QE, or• By issuing a warning,

depending upon the configuration you have set.


SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-3

5.1.2 Internal earth-fault monitoring

Response

Here you can set the SIMOCODE pro response to an internal earth fault:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Fig. 5-1: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 5-1: "Internal earth-fault monitoring" response

Activity

Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Response Internal earth fault

Deactivated XSignaling XWarning XTripping XDelay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)


Response/delay

See Table 5-1

Event "Internal

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Internal earth fault

External earth fault

Current fromCurrent measuringmodule orCurrent/voltagemeasuring module

earth fault"

Event "Warningexternal earth fault"


SIMOCODE pro

5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.1.3 External earth-fault monitoring (with summation current transformer)

Response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an external earth fault:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Fig. 5-2: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response

1) Further delay of the summation current transformer delay

If the response is set to "Signaling" the "External earth fault" event will be generated in the case of an earth fault.If the response is set to "Warning", the "Warning external earth fault" event will be generated in the case of an earth fault.

Activity


Response External earth fault

Deactivated -Signaling XWarning XTripping XDelay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5) 1)

Event "External

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5Current from

Summation currenttransformer/Earth-fault module



External earth faultResponse/delay

See Table 5-2

earth fault"

Event "Warningexternal earth fault"



5.2 Current limit monitoring

5.2.1 Description

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring, independent of overload protection. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be freely parameterized and delayed.Motor current measurement is carried out via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules.

Fig. 5-3: "Current Limits" function block

Trip level: I> 1)

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Warning level: I>

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Trip level: I< 2)

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Warning level: I<

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Hysteresis

Event

Event

Event

See

Table 5-3

See

Table 5-4

See

Table 5-5

See

Table 5-6

Current limits

- Trip level I>

Event- Warning level I>

- Trip level I<

- Warning level I<

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Current I_max fromCurrent measuring(Current ormodule orCurrent/voltagemeasuring module)

1) Upper limit2) Lower limit


SIMOCODE pro

5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.2.2 I> (upper limit)

Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), two different response levels I> (upper limit) trip level, I> (upper limit) warning level can be parameterized and monitored.If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring responds.

Trip level and warning level activity

The trip level/warning level is only effective when the motor is running, the start-up procedure has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is overshot.See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-3: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>

Response at warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning level is overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>

Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I> (upper limit):

Trip level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments

Warning level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments

Response Trip level

Deactivated XSignaling XWarning -Tripping XDelay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Response Warning level

Deactivated XSignaling XWarning XTripping -Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% incrementsDefault: 5 %



5.2.3 I< (lower limit)


When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response levels (trip level/warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of the phases (I_max) drops below the response level, current limit monitoring responds.




Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is undershot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-5: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is undershot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<

Hysteresis

Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):

Trip level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments

Warning level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments

Response Trip level




Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% incrementsDefault: 5 %


SIMOCODE pro

5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.3 Voltage monitoring

Description

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules. This is based on the minimal voltage of all voltages Umin.

Note

Please note that only phase voltage is available with SIMOCODE pro V basic units up to version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be calculated from the phase voltage using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage * 1.73.From version *E07* onwards, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can be used.

Fig. 5-4: "Voltage Monitoring" function block

Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.

Event

- Warning level U<

Voltage Umin

Trip level: U<

Trip level activity


Trip delay

Hysteresis 1)

EventSee

Table 5-7

Voltage monitoring

- Trip level U<

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

viaCurrent/voltagemeasuring module

Warning level: U<

Warning level activity


Warning delay

See

Table 5-8

1) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power




You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level).If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or warning level, voltage monitoring responds.


Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:

1) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with a current/voltage measuring module


Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is undershot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring

Trip level: 0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments

Warning level: 0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments

• Always (on) 1) Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position

• If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is ON and not in the test position

Response Trip level



SIMOCODE pro

5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.



Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the threshold valuein 1% increments (5%)



5.4 Cos phi monitoring

Description

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate significantly. The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active power does, particularly in the low-end performance area of a motor. Therefore, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip level or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.

Fig. 5-5: "Cos Phi Monitoring" function block


You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for cos phi monitoring.

0 % = cos phi = 0.0050 % = cos phi = 0.50100 % = cos phi = 1.00

Trip level: 0 - 100 %

Warning level: 0 - 100 %

Trip level

Response

Delay

Warning level

Response

Delay

EventSee

Table 5-9

See

Table 5-10

Cos phi monitoring

- Trip level cos phi <

Event- Warning level cos phi <

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Cos phi fromCurrent/voltagemeasuring module

Hysteresis 1)

1) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power (see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)


SIMOCODE pro

5-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03




Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is undershot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring



Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning -

Tripping X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)


Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning X

Tripping -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)



5.5 Active power monitoring

Description

SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a motor is a precise reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-load motor operation.SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be freely parameterized and delayed.Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules.

Fig. 5-6: "Power Monitoring" function block

Event

Event

Event

- Trip level P>

Event- Warning level P>

- Trip level P<

- Warning level P<

Trip level: P> 1)

Response when P>

Delay when P>

Warning level: P>

Response when P>

Delay when P>

Trip level: P< 2)

Response when P<

Delay when P<

Warning level: P<

Response when P<

Delay when P<

See

Table 5-11

See

Table 5-12

See

Table 5-11

See

Table 5-12

Power monitoring

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Active power fromCurrent/voltagemeasuring module

Hysteresis 3)

1) Upper limit2) Lower limit3) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)


SIMOCODE pro

5-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.



Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is either undershot or overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring

Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning level is either undershot or overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring

Trip level• P> (upper limit)• P< (lower limit)

0.000 - 4294967.295 kW

Warning level• P> (upper limit)• P< (lower limit)

0.000 - 4294967.295 kW

Response Trip level






5.6 0/4-20 mA monitoring

Description

With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring and monitoring further process variables as desired.For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter must be cleaned.

Fig. 5-7: "Monitoring 0/4-20 mA" function block

Trip level 0/4-20 mA >

Trip level activity


Trip delayEventSee

Table 5-13

Monitor 0/4-20 mA

- Trip level

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Analog input 1 of the

Marking trip level

Warning level 0/4-20 mA >



Warning delay

See

Table 5-14

Marking warning level

0/4-20 mA >

Event

- Warning level0/4-20 mA >

Trip level 0/4-20 mA <

Trip level activity


Trip delayEventSee

Table 5-13

- Trip levelMarking trip level

Warning level 0/4-20 mA <



Warning delay See

Table 5-14

Marking warning level

0/4-20 mA <

Event

- Warning level0/4-20 mA <

analog module(AM Input 1)

Hysteresis


SIMOCODE pro

5-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.


With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.


Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:

Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit),

0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is either undershot or overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring

Trip level• 0/4-20> (upper limit)• 0/4-20< (lower limit)

0.0 - 23.6 mA 8 (0.0 mA)

Warning level• 0/4-20> (upper limit)• 0/4-20< (lower limit)

0.0 - 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)

• Always (on) Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position.

• If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is ON and not in the test position

• If motor is running, except TPF,with start-up override (run+)

The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the start-up procedure has been completed, and there is no test position feedback (TPF)

Response Trip level

Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning -

Tripping X

Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)



Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning level is either undershot or overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring

Marking

The marking is stored in the device and allocated and displayed in the Faults/Warnings online dialog. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/4-20>". Range: Up to 10 characters.

Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:

Note

Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for example, by free limit monitors.


Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning X

Tripping -

Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15% in 1% increments (5 %)


SIMOCODE pro

5-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.7 Operation monitoring

5.7.1 Description

To avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by excessive run or stop times, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and limit the number of motor starts in a defined time frame.If an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be generated that indicates maintenance or replacement of the motor in question is required. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be reset. To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor starts in a selectable time frame can be limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing in SIMOCODE pro.A low number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

Note

Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS.

Fig. 5-8: "Operation Monitoring" function block

Operating hours level

Response Event

Controlfunctions

Operating hours

Motor stop time level

Response Event - Motor stop time >

Motor stop time

Number of starts

Permissible starts

Time range for starts

Response at overshoot

Response at pre-warning

Interlocking time

Event

- Operating hours >

- Number of starts >

- Just one start possible

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

See

Table 5-15

- No start possible

Tripping

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Operation monitoring

Permissible starts



Response

Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response

5.7.2 Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as applicable.

Level

If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.

Activity


Response

You can set the response for overshoot here. See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and Table 5-15.

5.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that these are always operated alternately. This prevents long motor stop times and reduces the risk of non-availability. The motor stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.

Level

The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring function responds.

Activity


Response Motor operating

hours

monitoring level

Motor stop time

monitoring level

Number of

starts -

overshoot

Number of

starts -

pre-warning

Deactivated X X X X

Signaling X X X X

Warning X X X X

Tripping - - X -

Level: 0 to 1193046 hours (0 h)

Level: 0 to 65535 hours (0 h)


SIMOCODE pro

5-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Response

Here you can determine the response for when the permissible motor stop time is exceeded:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and Table 5-15.

5.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.The following schematic illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of starts.

Fig. 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts

Permissible starts

The maximum number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has been executed, the "Just one start possible" pre-warning is generated.

Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is only available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number of available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - Actual value".

Activity


Response at overshoot

Here you can set the response for when the number of starts within the time range for starts has been overshot:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and Table 5-15.

Permissible starts: 1 to 255

Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss

Time frame

1. Start within the time frame

t

Example:3 starts allowed

Pre-warning Overshot



Response at pre-warning

Here you can set the response required after the second to last start:See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" and Table 5-15.

Interlocking time

If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible start, this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response at overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Trip - No. of starts >" will be displayed and the set interlocking time activated.

Interlocking time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss


SIMOCODE pro

5-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.8 Temperature monitoring (analog)

Schematic and characteristic curve

Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: Separate levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch-off temperature.Temperature monitoring is based upon the highest temperature in all sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.

Fig. 5-10: "Temperature Monitoring" function block

Settings

Temperature Description

Trip level T> - 273 °C - 65262 °C

Response at trip level T >

Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and Chapter "Important information")

Marking trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "Temperature>". Range: Up to 10 characters.

Warning level T > - 273 °C - 65262 °C

Response warninglevel T >

Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and Chapter "Important information")

Marking warning level T >

No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Temperature>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.

Hysteresis 0 - 255 °C in 1 °C incrementsDefault: 5 °C

Table 5-16: "Temperature monitoring" settings

Temperature monitoring

Trip level

Warning level

Hysteresis

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

- Temperature module

Tripping



See

Table

(Marking)

(Marking)

Event

Trip level T>

- Temperature moduleWarning level T>

Max. temperature of allsensor measuring circuitsof the temperature module

"Response"

See

Table

"Response"




The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").

Response

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".• Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond

when the temperature has overshot the warning level/trip level.

Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response

Notice

With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!

Note

The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block if temperature monitoring is being used.

Note

To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable number of free limit monitors can be linked to the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the "Temperature Monitoring" function block.

Response Warning level T> Trip level T>

Deactivated X -

Signaling X X

Warning X -

Tripping - X


SIMOCODE pro

5-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Description

Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew, every time the enabling circuit closes. This function supports you in complying with test intervals that require verification.In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts carry out safety-oriented tripping. Whether the relay contacts of the enabling circuit really open or not, can only be established via a change in the switching state of the contacts.The "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function supports the system operator in the monitoring of the time that has elapsed since the last connection of the enabling circuit.When the adjustable limit has been reached, the set reaction follows (deactivated, signaling, warning; see response). This is logged in the event memory.This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be safety-oriented.

Note:The function "Time until test" is not safety-oriented.

Fig. 5-11: "Monitoring Interval for Mandatory Testing" function block

Response

You can set the response here.See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information".

Table 5-18: "Safe tripping" response

Test interval

Adjustable limit value for interval for mandatory testing:

Response

Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning X

Tripping -

Test interval: 0 to 255 weeks

Response

Interval for mandatory testing Test required

Time until test

Monitoring interval

for mandatory testing



5.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for monitoring functions:

Fig. 5-12: The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions

TL = Trip level (tripping)WL = Warning level (warning)


SIMOCODE pro

5-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Outputs 6In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the outputs of SIMOCODE pro:• Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules• Analog module output• Operator panel LEDs• Send Data on the PROFIBUS DP.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners and configurators• Programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further Function Blocks > Outputs.

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

6.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the outgoing SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represented as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned to any functions or events via connections.Outputs can be:• Output terminals on the exterior of the basic unit, digital modules and the

analog module• LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different

statuses• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the various output types:

Fig. 6-1: General representation of the various output types

SIMOCODE pro

DP PROFIBUS DP

LED operator panel

Output

Output

Output

Output terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Plugs

Plugs

Plugs

Outputs



Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, status display or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of outputs depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:

Table 6-1: Outputs

SIMOCODE

Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Basic unit outputs (BU Outputs) ✓ ✓

Operator panel LED (OP LED) ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs) — ✓

Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 Outputs) — ✓

Analog module output (AM Output) — ✓

Acyclic Send Data (Acyclic Send) ✓ ✓

Cyclic Send Data (Cyclic Send) ✓ ✓

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

6.2 Basic unit outputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with three relay outputs. You can switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the QE contactor controls of the control function). The "BU Outputs" function block consists of:• Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3• Three relays• Output terminals.

Overall, there is one "BU Outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "BU Outputs" function block:

Fig. 6-2: "BU Outputs" function block


• Control of the main contactor in the motor feeder:You can, e.g., define which relay output is used for controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE." contactor control of the control function.

• Lamp control for displaying operating states:You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, Fast, Slow...). To do this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor control of the control function. The following are specifically intended for controlling lamps and LEDs:In addition to the status displays, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically signal via a 2Hz flash frequency:

– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)– Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults

etc. to the relay outputs

1

2

BU Outputs

3

1

2

3

6

7

Out1

Out2

Out3

Output terminals

Terminal numbers

SIMOCODE pro

Outputs


– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.

In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine which QE outputs are required for which control functions.

Settings

Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter E "Example circuits".

BU Outputs Description

Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-2: Basic unit output settings

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

6.3 Operator panel LEDs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely-assignable LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used to display any status. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for the status information of the control function).

Note

The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

The "OP LED" function block consists of:• Four plugs, "OP LED Green 1" to "OP LED Green 4", corresponding to the

green LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/constructionally allocated to the buttons on the operator panel. They normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.

• Three plugs, "OP LED Yellow 1" to "OP LED Yellow 3", corresponding to the yellow LEDs.

• Four green LEDs• Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).

Overall, there is one "OP LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Operator panel LEDs

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the LEDs:

Fig. 6-3: Operator panel LEDs

TEST/RESET


Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4

Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3

Outputs


LEDs of the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display with LEDs:

Fig. 6-4: LEDs of the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:

Fig. 6-5: Schematic of the "OP LED" function block

Note

The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the operator panel with display. Status information can be read out here directly via the display. The corresponding three plugs can also be connected via the software. Nevertheless, they remain ineffective.

Green 1

Green 2

Green 3

Green 4

Yellow 1

Yellow 2

Yellow 3

Green 1

Green 2

Green 3

Green 4

OP LED LED

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


• Display of operating states:You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating states (Fault, ON, OFF, Fast, Slow...).For this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL." lamp control of the control function.In many cases, the LEDs are connected to the QL outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine which QL outputs are required for which control functions.

• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow LEDs.

Settings

*) No function when using the operator panel with display


OP LED Description

Green 1 to Green 4 Control of the "OP LED" function block with any signal(any sockets , e.g. feedback concerning the "Motor" operating state)

Yellow 1 to Yellow 3* Control of the "OP LED" function block with any signal(any sockets e.g. displays for status, events, faults)

Table 6-3: Operator panel LED settings

Outputs


6.4 Digital module outputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks, which are each equipped with two relay outputs. You can switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM Outputs" function blocks) must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).

Note

"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!

Each function block has• Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2• Two relays• Output terminals.

Overall, there is– one "DM1 Outputs" function block on BU2, and– one "DM2 Outputs" function block on BU2.

Note:In addition to the two jointly-switched failsafe enabling circuits, the failsafe DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two standard relay outputs, the common ground of which is switched off for safety reasons via an enabling circuit.For the logical wiring, the standard relay outputs are always switched. The state of the failsafe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:

Fig. 6-6: Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs"/"DM2 Outputs" function blocks

1

2

DM1 Outputs

Out1

Out2

1

2

DM2 Outputs

Out1

Out2

Output terminals Output terminals

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feederYou can define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder.For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor control of the control function.

• Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, Fast, Slow...).For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the control function.

• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs.

In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the QE outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine which QE outputs are required for which control functions.

Settings


"DM1/DM2

Outputs"

Description

Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks with any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 Outputs" settings

Outputs


6.5 Analog module output

Description

You can expand basic unit 2 with an analog output using the analog module. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for example, on a connected pointer instrument. By activating the function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with any integer value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent to the output terminals of the analog module.

Note

The "AM Output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "AM Output" function block:

Fig. 6-7: Schematic of the "AM Output" function block

Settings

Table 6-5: "Analog module output" settings

Signal/value Range

Assigned analog output value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

Output signal 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA

Start value of value range 0 - 65535

End value of value range 0 - 65535

OUT+

AM Output

OUT-

Assigned Start value of value range

End value of value range

Output signal

analog output value

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Note

The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

Outputs



1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor

current range

The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) corresponds to the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current Is:– 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Is– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is

1% (see measured values data record 94)

Fig. 6-8: Application example: Motor current output - entire range

As a result,– The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0– The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.

Fig. 6-9: Application example: Motor current output - output values to function blockAM Output

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA at the analog module output– 400% motor current corresponds to: 20 mA at the analog module output.


Max. current I_max

OUT+

AM Output

OUT-

Start value of value range


Output signal

0

400

0-20 mA

Assignedanalog output value

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current

range (overload range)

The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be displayed on a pointer instrument via the analog module output.In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) corresponds to the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current Is:– 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Is– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%

(see measured values data record 94).

Fig. 6-10: Application example: Motor current output - Overload range


Fig. 6-11: Application example: Motor current output - Output values to function block AM Output



Max. current I_max

OUT+

AM Output

OUT-



Output signal

100

400

0-20 mA


Outputs


Note (concerning examples 1 and 2):In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the set current Is. When using the analog module output to display the effective motor current on a connected pointer instrument, the effective motor current is always indicated as a percentage of the set current. If the selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer instrument can be in percent (% of Is) as well as absolute (e.g. in A).In the case of motors/control functions with two speeds and, thus, two set currents (e.g. pole-changing starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is only shown on the pointer instrument as a percentage of the effective set current Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the two speeds (slow or fast) is prevalent.

3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically

via PROFIBUS)

One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation system to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to 27648) it must be taken into consideration when parameterizing:

Fig. 6-12: Output of an analog value from the automation system


When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:– 0: 0 mA at the analog module output– 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:– 0: 4 mA at the analog module output– 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.

Cyclic Receive 2/3


(1 word, cycl. from the PLC)

OUT+

AM Output

OUT-



Output signal

0

27648

0-20 mA

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

6.6 Cyclic Send

Description

The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP."Cyclic Send" function blocks consist of:• Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• Four words (= eight bytes, byte 2 to 9 for four analog values, freely

parameterizable)• One output to PROFIBUS DP each.Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:

Fig. 6-13: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function blocks

Cyclic Send 2/9

DPByte 4/5

Byte 6/7

Byte 8/9

Byte 2/3

toPROFIBUS DP

Basic type 1 (for BU 2)

Cyclic Send 2/9 with four words (eight bytes)for up to four analog values

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Send 0

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Send 1

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 1

Cyclic Send 2/9

DPtoPROFIBUS DP

Byte 2/3

Basic type 2 (for BU1 and BU2)

Basic type 1 (for BU 2)Basic type 2 (for BU1 and BU2)

Basic type 1 (for BU 2)Basic type 2 (for BU1 and BU2)

Cyclic Send 0 with eight bits Cyclic Send 1 with eight bitsfor binary informationfor binary information

Cyclic Send 2/3 with one word (two bytes)for one analog value

Outputs


Cyclic services

Cyclic Send Data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP master and the DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Settings

Cyclic Send Data Description

Byte 0 to 1Bit 0 to bit 7Basic types 1*, 2

Control of bits with any signals(any sockets e.g. device inputs, Send Data, etc.)

Byte 2/3Basic types 1*, 2

Control of one word (two bytes) with any analog values(any sockets e.g. maximum current I_max, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)

Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9Basic type 1*

Control of three words (six bytes) with any analog values(any sockets )

Table 6-6: Cyclic Send Data settings

*) For basic unit 2 only

Byte 0 of the Send Data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current I_max!

See also Chapter 12.4 "Telegram description and data access".

Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

6.7 Acyclic Send

Description

In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective sockets.The "Acyclic Send" function blocks consists of:• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• One output to PROFIBUS DP each.Overall, there is one "Acyclic Send" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Send" function blocks:

Fig. 6-14: Schematic of the "Acyclic Send" function blocks

Acyclic services

Acyclic Send Data will only be transferred on request.The information (two bytes) can be found in data record 203.This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.

Settings

Acyclic Send Data Description

Byte 0 to 1Bit 0 to bit 7

Control of bits with any signals(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, Send Data, status information, events, etc.)

Table 6-7: Acyclic Send Data settings

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Send 0

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Send 1

DPto PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0Byte 1


Inputs 7In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.The inputs are:• Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules• Operator panel buttons• Temperature module inputs• Analog module inputs• Receive data from PROFIBUS DP.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners and configurators• Planners.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Inputs.

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital

modules• Buttons on the operator panel (one Test/Reset button, four freely-

parameterizable buttons), and basic units (one Test/Reset button)• Temperature module inputs• Analog module inputs• Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).

Schematic

The following schematic shows a general representation of the input types:

Fig. 7-1: General representation of the input types

SIMOCODE pro

DPPROFIBUS DP

Input

Input

Input

Input terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Buttons- Control commands- Test/Reset

Sockets

Sockets

Sockets

Inputs



Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via appropriate connections. The system has different inputs depending upon the device series:

SIMOCODE

Inputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Basic unit inputs (BU Inputs) ✓ ✓

Operator panel buttons (OP Buttons) ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 inputs (DM1 Inputs) — ✓

Digital module 2 inputs (DM2 Inputs) — ✓

Temperature module inputs (TM Inputs) — ✓

Analog module inputs (AM Inputs) — ✓

Acyclic Receive (Acycl. Receive) ✓ ✓

Cyclic Receive (Cycl. Receive) ✓ ✓

Table 7-1: Inputs

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.2 Basic unit inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs with common ground potential. You can connect the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU Inputs" function block.The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:• Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to

the sockets "BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the

"Control Stations" function block• A socket for the "Test/Reset" button:

The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally dependent upon the operating status of the device:- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults- Test function for carrying out device tests.In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "Test/Reset" button (e.g. operation of the memory module and the addressing plug).For this, see also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".

Overall, there is one "BU Inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:

Fig. 7-2: Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block

Basic unit (BU)

9

10

4

5

BU Inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

BU Test/Reset button

8

ButtonTest/Reset

Inputs



The inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the start and stop buttons of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "Local Control Station" function block.If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate function blocks such as "Reset" or "External Fault".


See Chapter 13.2.1 "Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module".

Settings

Basic unit Description

Delay time Inputs

You can set a delay time for the inputs, if required.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms

Table 7-2: "Basic unit inputs" settings

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.3 Operator panel buttons

Description

The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 and the "Test/Reset" button. Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.

Note

The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Note

The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The allocated functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status signal will then be available at the "OP Test/Reset Button" socket.

• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for the motor feeder. Control commands can be, for example:- Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter

Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter.

- Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.

However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of the respective function block socket in SIMOCODE pro.

• Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button:The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally assigned to fixed functions:- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults- Test function for carrying out device tests.- Operation of the memory module or the addressing plugNevertheless, the status of the "Test/Reset" button can be read from the corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro.See also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address". and Chapter 14.3.2 "Securing and saving parameters"..

Inputs


Operator panel buttons

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and buttons:

Fig. 7-3: Operator panel buttons

Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display and buttons:

Fig. 7-4: Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V


Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button

TEST/RESET

"Test/Reset"

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Button 4

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "OP Buttons" function block:

Fig. 7-5: Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block

1) Operable via the menu on the operator panel with display

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Button 4

ButtonTest/Reset1)

OP Button 1

OP Button 2

OP Button 3

OP Button 4

OP - Test/Reset button

OP Buttons

Inputs


7.4 Digital module inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 grouped binary inputs with common ground potential. You can connect the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "DM Inputs" function blocks.

Note

The "DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the respective digital module (DM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Note

When using the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital modules, the input signals can be used as non-safety-oriented information.

Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:• Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module,

corresponding to the sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the

"Control Stations" function block.

Overall, one function block "DM1 - Inputs" and "DM2 - Inputs" for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks:

Fig. 7-6: Schematic of the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM1 Inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM2 Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

25 25

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F Local:

Fig. 7-7: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F Local:

Table 7-3: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F Local:

The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:

Fig. 7-8: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F Local:

Table 7-4: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe

Input Description

Input 1 - "tripped" stateStart Start: Start input state (Y33)Feedback Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed; 0 - openCascade Cascade input state (1)Sensor 1 Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)Sensor 2 Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22).

Input Description

Input 1 IN1 (83) stateInput 2 IN2 (85) stateInput 3 IN3 (89) stateFeedback FBC feedback circuit state (91): 1 - closed; 0 - openSensor 1 -Sensor 2 -

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM1 Inputs

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Input

Start

Feedback

Cascade

Sensor 1

Sensor 2

Digital module (DM)

23

24

26

27

DM1 Inputs

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Feedback

Sensor 1

Sensor 2

Inputs



Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on basic unit 2 to be increased in increments.SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an external speed monitor, signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has been undershot.


See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series".

Settings

Notice

The delay times of the digital module inputs can only be set and/or are only relevant when "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1. The delay time can not be set if digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe. If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times can be set using the DIP switches on the front of the DM-F Local.

Non-safety functions (failsafe digital modules)

• If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the DM-F Local is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.

• If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the DM-F PROFIsafe is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.

Detailed information on failsafe digital modules:See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series".

Basic unit Description

Delay time inputs

If required, you can set a delay time for the inputs.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 msThese values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the values are approx. 40 ms higher.

Table 7-5: "DM1/DM2 inputs" settings

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.5 Temperature module inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has a "TM Inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.

Note

The "TM Inputs" function block can only be used if the temperature module (TM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:

Fig. 7-9: Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block

Notes on wiring

You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. You will find further information in Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".

TM Inputs

Max. temperature

Temperature 1

Temperature 2

Temperature 3

Event

- Sensor fault

u

R

1 2

PT/KTY

u

R

1 2

NTC

- Out of range

1T3

2T3

3T3

1T2

2T2

3T2

50

51

52

53

54

55

Inputs:

T156

T157

Sensor type

Response at sensor fault/Out of range

Number of active sensors

Terminalnumbers

Range: 0 ... 65535 K

Inputs



Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:• Motor windings• Motor bearings• Motor coolant temperature• Motor gearbox oil temperature.

The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be monitored independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.

Settings

Table 7-6: Temperature module input settings

1)

Table 7-7: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response


Temperature module Description

Sensor type PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC

Response 1) at sensor fault/Out of range

Deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping

Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors

Response Sensor fault/Out of range

Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning X

Tripping X

Delay -

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.6 Analog module inputs

Description

SIMOCODE pro has an "AM Inputs" function block with two analog sockets, corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.

Note

The "AM Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog module (AM) has been connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "AM Inputs" function block:

Fig. 7-10: Schematic of the "AM Inputs" function block

Open circuit

AM Inputs

IN1+30

31

33

34

Inputs:

IN2+

IN1-

IN2-

Input 1

Input 2

Event

Input signal

Response atOpen circuit

Active inputsTerminalnumbers

Range: 0 ... 27648

Inputs



Typical applications are:• Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.

Settings

Table 7-8: Analog module input settings

Note

Note

The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.

Notice

The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

Analog module Description

Input signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Response at open circuit Signaling, warning, tripping

Active inputs 1 input, 2 inputs

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

7.7 Cyclic Receive

Description

With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands. Connection with the "Control Stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP. Direct connection of the analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for example, the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS at the output of the analog module.The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely

programmable) for basic type 1• One input each from PROFIBUS DP.Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:

Fig. 7-11: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks

Cyclic services

The Cyclic Data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave once every DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic Receive) to SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic send data (Cyclic Send) to the DP master.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Receive 0

DP From PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic Receive 1

DP From PROFIBUS DP

Byte 2/3Cyclic Receive 2/3 1)

Analog valueDP

1) BU2 with basic type 1 only

Inputs


7.8 Acyclic Receive

Description

In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.With the "Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information from PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. For this, simply connect the sockets of the "Acyclic Receive" function block to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely

parameterizable)• One input each from PROFIBUS DP.Overall there are three "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:

Fig. 7-12: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks

Acyclic services

Acyclic data is only transferred on request.The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202.This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated every time the data set is received. The content of the data set is deleted after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Receive 0

DP From PROFIBUS DP

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic Receive 1

DP From PROFIBUS DP

Byte 2/3Acyclic Receive 2/3 1)

Analog valueDP

1) BU2 with basic type 1 only

Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Analog value recording 8In this chapter

This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the measured curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when the motor is started, using SIMOCODE pro V.The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the motor current at different points in time and making direct comparisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor and the equipment.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Programmers• Commissioners• Service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• SIMOCODE pro• Motor protection, motor control• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Analog value recording.

Analog value recording

SIMOCODE pro

8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Description

The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record various analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time. For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic curve of the motor current when the motor is started.Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is recorded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:

Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values.

The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, with SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in MS Excel.

Functional principle

Fig. 8-1: Functional principle of analog value recording

The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.



Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:

Fig. 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block

Settings

Table 8-1: "Analog value recording" settings

Application example

Record the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/pre-trigger = 25% (3 s):

Fig. 8-3: Application example of the analog value recording

Signal/value Range

Trigger input Activate the analog value recording with any signal (any sockets , z. B. device inputs, current flowing)

Allocated analog value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

Trigger edge Positive/negative

Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s in 0.1 s increments

Pre-trigger 0 to 100% in 5% increments


Assigned

Trigger input

Trigger edge

Sampling rate

Pre-trigger

analog value

0.2 s

25 %

Motor current flowing


Trigger edge

Sampling rate

Pre-trigger

Max. current I_max

Positive


SIMOCODE pro

8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


3UF50 compatibility mode 9In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.

3UF50 compatibility mode

SIMOCODE pro

9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Description

The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration.In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC (class 1 master).Cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics and the DPV1 data records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133) of SIMOCODE DP are supported.


In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE-DP Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win SIMOCODE-DP into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).

Safety guidelines

Notice

Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win SIMOCODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Notice

In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set, i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using SIMOCODE-DP-GSD or the SIMOCODE-DP object manager cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.

Notice

The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the SIMOCODE-DP object manager (OM).



Diagram of send and receive data

The following table shows the send and receive data in compatibility mode:

Table 9-1: "Receive" configuration

Table 9-2: "Send" configuration

Receive

Basic type 1SIMOCODE-

DP

Basic type 1SIMOCODE

pro V


DP


pro V


DP


pro V

0

Receive data

Cyclic Receive - Bit 0. . 1.7

0

Receive data

Cyclic Receive - Bit 0. . 1.7

0

Receive data

Cyclic Receive - Bit 0. . 1.71 1 1

2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported

3 3 3

Send


DP


pro V


DP


pro V


DP


pro V

0Send Data

Cyclic SendBit 0.0 .. 1.7

0Send Data

Cyclic SendBit 0.0 .. 1.7

0

Send Data

Cyclic SendBit 0.0 .. 1.71 1 1

2Motor current

Specified: Max. current I_max

2Motor current

Specified: Max. current I_max

2 Acyclic SendBit 0.0 .. 1.73 3 3

4 Number ofstarts

Number of starts(Bytes 0 - 3)5

6

7 ValueCounter 1

Counter 1Actual value8

9 ValueCounter 2

Counter 2Actual value10

11 Value sensor TM - Max. temperature


SIMOCODE pro

9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Diagram of diagnostics data

The following table shows the diagnostics data in the 3UF50-compatibility mode:

Byte Bit

Setup 3UF50 - device-specific diagnostics acc. to DP

standard SIMOCODE-DP

Byte Bit

Setup 3UF50 - device-specific diagnostics acc. to

SIMOCODE-DP DPV1 standard

Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V

6 0x0B

Same as 3UF50 diagnostics

7 0x81

8 0x04

6 0x0E 9 0x00

7.0 Free 10.0 Free

7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Start-up parameterblock active

7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency start executed

7.3 Event: HW test OK 10.3 Event: HW test OK • No fault - HW fault basic unit• No fault - Module fault• No fault - Temporary components

7.4 Free 10.4 Free -

7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5

7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6

7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 -

8.0 Warning: Ext. Warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning - Ext. fault 3

8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning - Unbalance

8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/PCS (inverted)

8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - Thermistor short circuit

8.4 Event: Cooling down period active

11.4 Event: Cooling down period active

Status - Cooling down period active

8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - Test position (TPF)



9.0 Warning: Earth fault 12.0 Warning: Earth fault • Warning - Int. earth faultor

• Warning - Ext. earth fault

9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning - Overload

9.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance Warning - Overload + phase failure

9.3 Warning: I1 response level overshot


Warning - Warning level I>

9.4 Warning: I1 response level undershot


Warning - Warning level I<



-



-

Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode



9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - Thermistor overload• Warning - Thermistor open circuit• Warning - TM warning T>• Warning - TM sensor fault• Warning - TM out of range

10.0 Trip: Earth fault 13.0 Trip: Earth fault • Trip - Int. earth faultor

• Trip - Ext. earth fault

10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Trip - Overload

10.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance Trip - Overload + phase failure

10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot Trip - Trip level I>

10.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot Trip - Trip level I<

10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot -

10.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot -

10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Trip - Thermistor overload• Trip - Thermistor short circuit• Trip - Thermistor open circuit• Trip - TM trip T>• Trip - TM sensor fault• Trip - TM out of range

11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Trip - Feedback ON

11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Trip - Feedback OFF

11.2 Trip: Motor blocked 14.2 Trip: Motor blocked Trip - Stalled rotor

11.3 Trip: Positioner blocked 14.3 Trip: Positioner blocked Trip - Stalled positioner

11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Trip - Double 0

11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Trip - Double 1

11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Trip - End position

11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Trip - Antivalence

12.0 Trip: ESB 15.0 Trip: ESB Trip - Ext. fault 4

12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)

12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: OPO Trip - Undervoltage (UVO)

12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Trip - Ext. fault 1

12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Trip - Ext. fault 2

12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault

12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Trip - Execution ON command

12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Trip - Execution STOP command

13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Trip - Parameterization

13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 -



13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Trip - Configuration fault



13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Trip - HW fault basic unit

Byte Bit



Byte Bit




Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14 -15

Number of overload trips Number of overload trips

16 -17

I of the overload trip [%/IE)] Last trip current

18 - 19

Operating hours [10h] Motor operating hours

Byte Bit



Byte Bit




Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)


Standard functions 10In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be activated according to need and, as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Programmers of application programs for reference purposes.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Motor protection• Control functions, control stations.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Standard functions.

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.1 Introduction

Description

So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored in SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required. These function blocks may contain:• Plugs ( )• Sockets ( ) in the form of status information• Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signaling",

"Warning" or "Tripping").

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard function:

Fig. 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function


These function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used as optional supplements. They are ready to be used and only require activating by connecting the plug(s) of the respective function block.Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function blocks for such standard functions:

SIMOCODE

Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1

External Fault 4 6

Operational Protection OFF (OPO) — 1

Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency Start 1 1

Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1

Table 10-1: Function blocks

Socket 1 - n

Plug 1

Plug n

Standard Function

Setting value

Standard functions


Timestamping — 1

Safe Tripping — 1

SIMOCODE

Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)

Table 10-1: Function blocks (Cont.)

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.2 Test/Reset

Test/Reset description

The function of the "Test/Reset" button on the basic unit or on the operator panel is generally dependent upon the operating status of the device:• Reset function: If a fault occurs• Test function: In other operating states.

In addition to the Test/Reset button, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/Reset tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.Overall, the following are available:• Two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2", for BU1 and BU2, whereby each

function block has a slightly different function:– Test 1: Test/trips the output relays– Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).

Schematic

The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test/Reset" function blocks:

Fig. 10-2: "Test/Reset" function blocks

*) The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The respective functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys.

Reset 3

Test 1

Test/Reset buttons blocked

Test 2

Reset 1

Reset 2

BU "TEST/RESET" button

Control functions

"Test/Reset" function blocks

OP "TEST/RESET" button*

Test 1

Test 2

Reset 1

Reset 2

Reset 3

Standard functions


Testing

Testing can be carried out as follows:• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can

be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks• Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu

item).

Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the system can be reset immediately.Tripping only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote".

Reset function

Resetting can be carried out as follows:• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can

be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.• Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of

the internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".• Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu

item).

The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.Overall, three function blocks, "Reset 1" through to "Reset 3" are available for BU1 and BU2.All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).

Test function

A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.The test function comprises the following steps:• Lamp/LED test (test function < 2 s activated)• Testing the device functionality (test function activated for 2 s - 5 s )• For the "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function

activated for > 5 s).

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Test phases

The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:

Test settings

Testphase

Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault 1) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2s"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL

Results of the hardware test/lamp test

2s - 5s"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5s"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED OFF

1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Table 10-2: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing

Test 1 to 2 - Description

Input Control of the "Test" function block from any signal (any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/Resetbuttons blocked

The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying out a device test.The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu function.(Default: Unblocked)

Table 10-3: Test settings

Standard functions


Acknowledgement of faults

Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:• Faults can only be acknowledged

– If the cause of the fault has been eliminated– If there is no "ON" control command pending.

• A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and/or if an "ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault. Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the control panel. The LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:• A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user

has previously acknowledged the fault)• Auto-reset of overload tripping or thermistor tripping if motor protection

reset = auto (acknowledgement is automatic after the cooling down period elapses). The motor cannot start immediately since resetting is not possible if an ON command is pending.

• If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically. However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception: operator panel, if parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.

• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all related faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor cannot start immediately since parameters cannot be entered if an ON command is pending).

• If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to "Signaling" or "Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.

• For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset".

Reset settings

Reset 1 to 3 - Description

Input Control of the "Reset" function block from any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/Reset buttons blocked

The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator panel are intended for acknowledging faults and carrying out device tests.The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via the menu (default: Unblocked).

Table 10-4: Reset settings

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description

You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the respective socket. The activated test position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the control function.The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of:• One plug• One "Status - Test position" socket.

This is set when a signal is pending at the input.• One "Trip - Test position feedback" socket.

This is set when:– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.

Overall, there is one "Test Position Feedback" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Note

When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control function are activated, to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a blinking button LED, for example.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:

Fig. 10-3: "Test Position Feedback" function block

InputTrip -Test position feedback fault

Status - Test positionTPF

Type

Standard functions


Cold starting

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state. Cold starting means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via the socket on the function block.Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage on the main current side can occur, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor feeder that is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the "Test position feedback (TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary. The "TPF" function block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage Monitoring" function block).Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see Chapter 4.1 "Control stations"), enabling the current-free status to be tested.If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off by "Trip - Test position feedback".

"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement

Notice

"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.

Acknowledge with "Reset".

Settings

Test position

feedback (TPF)

Description

Input Activate the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block with any signal (any sockets , e. g. device input)

Type Specification of the input logic• NO contact (1-active) • NC contact (0-active)

Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.4 External fault

Description

The "External Faults 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also be "marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction. Example: Monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.The "External Fault" function block consists of:• Two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)• One "Event - External fault" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the

input.

Overall, the following are available:– Four "External Faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1– Six "External Faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:

Fig. 10-4: "External Fault" function blocks

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External Fault 1

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 1Event -

InputType

Reset

External Fault 2

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 2

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External Fault 3

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 3Event -

InputType

Reset

External Fault 4

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 4

Event -Input

Type

Reset

External Fault 5

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 5Event -

InputType

Reset

External Fault 6

Type

Activity

Response

Reset

(Marking)

Ext. fault 6

Standard functions


Special reset options:

A special reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, Test/Reset button, OFF command-reset). Furthermore, Auto-Reset can also be activated.See below.

Settings

"External fault" response

Table 10-7: "External fault" response

External fault

1 to 6 -

Description

Input Control of the "External Fault" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Specification of the input logic:• NO contact (1-active) • NC contact (0-active)

Activity Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:• Always:

Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.

• Only when the motor is ON:Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.

Response Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the following table and Chapter "Important information").

Reset Acknowledgment of the "External fault" using an arbitrary signal(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional reset types:• Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator panel or,

in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset)

• Remote reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset" command

• Auto-Reset: The fault is reset after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)

• OFF command-reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault.

Marking No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Rotational speed >", e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.Range: Up to 10 characters.

Table 10-6: External fault settings

Response External fault

Fault/tripping X

Warning X

Event X

Deactivated -

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO)

10.5.1 Response for positioner control function

Description

The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block returns the positioner to a safe position. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to the respective socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:• One plug• One "Status - OPO" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the input.• One "Trip - OPO fault" socket. This is set when the respective, safe end

position has been reached.

Overall, there is one Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block available for BU2.

The following table shows the general functionality:

Table 10-8: General functionality of Operational protection OFF(OPO) for the "Positioner" control function

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block:

Fig. 10-5: "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block

OPO Initial position when OPO is pending

Positioner

is open

Positioner

opens

Positioner

stop/OFF

Positioner

closes

Positioner

is closed

Reaction to OPO

Parameterized response "Positioner closes"

FaultReset: With close command

Positioner closes


Positioner closes


Positioner closes

-

Positioner closes

-

Parameterized "Positioner opens" response

- -

Positioner opens

FaultReset: With open command

Positioner opens


Positioner opens


Positioner opens

Input

Trip -Operational protection OFF (OPO)

Status - Operational Protection OFF

Positioner response

Type

Operational protection OFF (OPO)(OPO)

Standard functions


Settings

Safety guidelines

Note

A "Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO" command attempts to run the positioner to the end position in which it is already in, or to which it is heading.

Note

No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" is active.

Note

The "Trip - Operation protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged using the open or closed control command, depending on the present "OPO" end position.

Note

Acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

Note

The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.

Operational

protection OFF

(OPO)

Description

Input Control of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e. g. device inputs etc.)

Positioner response

Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when activated via the input:• CLOSED: Positioner moves to the "Closed"end position. • OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.

Type Specification of the input logic• NO contact (1-active) • NC contact (0-active)

Table 10-9: Operational protection OFF settings

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.5.2 Response to other control functions

Description

For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:• Motor in operation: The motor is switched off with a "Trip - Operational

protection OFF (OPO)" fault.• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Trip - Operational protection OFF

(OPO)" fault only occurs when an "ON command" is issued.

Standard functions


10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description

The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.Process (see process diagram below).1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after response by the

monitoring relay/activation of the input (UVO).

2) The motor will be switched back to its previous status if the voltage returns within the "power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can be additionally delayed (restart time delay).

3) If the "power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault (UVO fault):

Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not interrupted.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

Fig. 10-6: Schematic of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

Fig. 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram

Input*

Trip -Power failure (UVO)

UVO

Type

Power failure time*ActivationExternal power failure monitoringRestart time delay

QE

t

Power failuretime

Power failuretime

UVO

t

Fault

t

Fault

1)

2)

3)

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings

Power failure

monitoring (UVO) -

Description

Input Control of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block using the monitored signal (any socket , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:• Deactivated • Device supply is not interrupted.

The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured, for example, by a separate voltage relay.

Power failure time Start time after power failure.If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time, all the drives that were connected before the power failure are automatically reconnected.If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the drives remain disconnected and the "Trip - Power failure (UVO)" fault message is generated.Once the mains voltage has returned, the fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".Range:0 to 25.5 s in 0.1 s increments26 to 255 s in 1 s increments256 to 2550 s in 10 s increments

Restart time delay (staggered)

The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart simultaneously (the mains voltage would otherwise fail again).Range: 0 to 255 seconds.

Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings

Standard functions


10.7 Emergency start

Description

Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be used to:– Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload trip– Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.

Caution

If emergency starts are carried out too frequently this may lead to thermal overloading of the motor!

Since emergency start isedge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the thermal motor model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:• Via the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) of the function

block must be connected to an arbitrary socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).

The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:• One plug• One "Status - Emergency start executed" socket. This is set when the

emergency start is carried out.

Overall, there is one "Emergency Start" function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:

Fig. 10-8: Function block "Emergency Start"

Settings

Emergency start Description

Input Activate the "Emergency Start" function block from any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 10-11: Emergency start settings

Input

Status -Emergency start Emergency startexecuted 1)

1) The "Emergency start executed" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset when the current flows.

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Description

Note:Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-safety-oriented signals.

Note:Please note that the "Safe Tripping" function block is not a safety-oriented tripping function.The DM-F Local safety function is determined by the DIP switch setting on the module only.The DM-F PROFIsafe safety function is performed by the failsafe program in the F-CPU.

The "DM-F Local Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:• Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F Local is ready for operation.• Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.• Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.

The "DM-F PROFIsafe Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:• Event - PROFIsafe active: Failsafe communication between the F-CPU and the

DM-F PROFIsafe is active.• Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.• Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.

Overall one "Safe Tripping" function block is available for SAFETY (Local) or PROFIsafe.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Safe Tripping" function block:

Fig. 10-9: "Safe Tripping" function block

Safe Tripping

Response DM-F Local o.k.

DIP switch *) PROFIsafe active

Safe tripping

Enabling circuit

Standard functions


Function of the SET/RESET button on DM-F Local

Fig. 10-10: SET/RESET button

See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".

DM-F Local - Automatic starting after power failure

Danger

Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are connected without pressing the Start button.

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Fig. 10-11: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

*) Notice:The set DIP switch position in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (which can be set using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit as part of the download. However, it does not affect the function of the DM-F Local digital module.This way, the desired function is already set during parameterization.The effective parameterization must be set using the DIP switches on the front of the DM-F Local (see table below and/or "Failsafe digital module

SET/RESET button

*)

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual).The basic unit compares the set position (from the download) with the actual position at the DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is output!


DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With/without cross-circuit detection Cross-circuit detection is only possible with potential-free sensors. In this case, the sensors must be connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1 terminal test signal on terminals Y12 and Y33. Likewise, the T2 terminal test signal is anticipated on terminals Y22 and Y34. In the event of the signals on Y12, Y33 or Y22 , Y34 not corresponding to the T1 and T2 test signals, the device detects a sensor fault.When electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners are connected, cross-circuit detection must be disabled. The DM-F Local no longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross circuiting. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are monitored for cross circuiting in the sensor itself.When the device has been parameterized as "without cross-circuit detection", the T1 and T2 test outputs are switched off and must not be reconnected. The DM-F Local anticipates a +24 V DC signal from the same current source from which the device is powered on inputs Y12, Y22, Y33 and Y34 (DM-F Local-*1AB00 only) or from T3 (static +24 V DC).With the DM-F Local-*1AU00 device version, terminal T3 must be connected to the potential-free sensor contacts, due to the galvanic isolation of the input circuit and the sensor supply.

1 NC contact + 1 NO contact evaluation/2 NC contact evaluation

In addition to the 2-channel connection of aligned sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with opposing contacts (NC/NO – often used for magnetically-operated switches) can also be evaluated. In this case, please ensure that the NC contact is connected to Y12 and the NO contact is connected to Y22.

2x 1-channel/1x 2-channel • 2 sensors, each with one contact (2x 1-channel) (NC/NC). Here, the sensors are "AND"-connected with one another. Simultaneity is not monitored.

• 1 sensor with 2 contacts (1x 2-channel) (NC/NC). Here, it is expected that both contacts open simultaneously.

Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Standard functions


Delay time forSensor inputs 50 ms/10 ms

During the delay time, sensor signal changes are not evaluated.• Delay time 50ms: Changes in the switching

position of strongly bouncing contacts are hidden (e.g. position switch on heavy protective doors).

• Delay time 10ms: The shorter delay time allows for a quicker tripping of bounce-free sensors (e.g. light arrays).

Sensor input automatic start/monitored start

• Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as soon as the starting condition on sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.

• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as soon as the starting condition on sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled and the start button on terminal Y33 has subsequently been actuated (start with the falling edge).

Cascade input automatic start/monitored start

• Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as soon as the starting condition on cascade input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).

• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as soon as the starting condition on cascade input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3) and the start button on terminal Y33 has subsequently been actuated (start with the falling edge).

With/without start-up testing After a voltage failure, start-up testing requires that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are actuated once by the system operator.

With automatic starting/without automatic starting after power failure

The DM-F Local can be parameterized, so that the enabling circuits automatically switch to the operative position after a power failure i.e. without pressing the start button Y33.Prerequisites:• Y12, Y22 or cascade input 1 are

parameterized for "monitored start".• The starting condition on the sensor inputs

and on the cascade input has been fulfilled.• Valid actuation of the start button prior to the

power failure i.e. the enabling circuits were in the operative position.

DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local) (Cont.)

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe set the PROFIsafe address as follows:

Table 10-13: DIP switch settings (DM-F PROFIsafe)

When one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective value is active.When more than one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective values must be added up.• Briefly press the SET/RESET button.

LEDs from 1 to 10 show the current PROFIsafe address.• Setting the PROFIsafe address:

– Switch off the supply voltage– Set the DIP switch configuration– Switch on the supply voltage.

Fig. 10-12: SET/RESET button

Switch position Value

1 = 20 1

2 = 21 2

3 = 22 4

4 = 23 8

5 = 24 16

6 = 25 32

7 = 26 64

8 = 27 128

9 = 28 256

10 = 29 512

SET/RESET button

Standard functions


"Safe tripping" response 1)

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to a safety-oriented tripping via DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.

Note:The module response is not affected by this setting. In the event of the conditions for safety-oriented tripping being fulfilled, the enabling circuits are always opened!

Table 10-14: "Safe tripping" response

1) Note:In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - separate function from control function” has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode", "Tripping" can no longer be set as response; "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" are the only remaining options.

"Safe tripping" reset

Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledging of SIMOCODE pro faults caused by safety-oriented tripping (default: manual).

Response Safe tripping

Tripping X

Deactivated X

Signaling X

Warning X

Reset: Manual, Auto

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

Description

The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.

Schematic

Bus monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, the "Trip - Bus" fault is generated if• "Bus monitoring" is active• When, in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), the

Cyclic Data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g. by the PROFIBUS DP connection being interrupted.

• "Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging data with the PLC, "Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1".

PLC/PCS monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, "Trip - PLC/PCS" is generated if• "PLC/PCS monitoring" is activated.• The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"

operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1). • The "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP

is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to "0".

If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.

Fig. 10-13: "Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)" function block

Notice

"Bus monitoring" and "PLC/PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP slave address monitoring is activated in the DP master system.

PLC/PCS monitoring - InputTrip - PLC/PCS

Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring)


Bus monitoringCyclic communication Status - PLC/PCS in Run

(level sensitive)

PLC/PCS monitoring

Status - Bus o.k. (Bus is active)

Trip - Bus

Bus response

Standard functions


Settings

"Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response

Table 10-16: "Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response

Watchdog - Description

PLC/PCSmonitoring - Input

Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Bus monitoring • Activated:If a bus fault occurs, the "Trip - Bus" fault message is generated and must be acknowledged

• Deactivated:No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k." information can be evaluated at anytime.

PLC/PCSmonitoring

• Activated:If an PLC fault occurs, the "Trip - PLC/PCS" fault message is generated and must be acknowledged

• Deactivated:No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" information can be evaluated at anytime.


You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.Range: Manual/Automatic

Table 10-15: Watchdog settings

Response Bus fault PLC/PCS fault

Fault X X

Warning - -

Event - -

Deactivated X X

Standard functions

SIMOCODE pro

10-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

10.10 Timestamping

Description

SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.

Possible areas of application are:• Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system• Analysis of system interrelationships • Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes

Prerequisite:

To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master being used must support time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master connections for SIMATIC S7 400), or a master clock must be used (e.g. SICLOCK).

Process in STEP 7

Activation of the time synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V occurs in STEP 7 HW Config in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".

Notice

The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the clock master.

For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time-stamped information is analogous to transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further processing of time-stamped information in the CPU, to transmit time-stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks" library.

Note

The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave from STEP 7 HW Config.LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). For all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.

In contrast to the STEP7 FB62 online help, when integrating via GSD, the slot number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages, and with Slot 0 for special messages.You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.


Logic modules 11In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the SIMOCODE pro logic modules. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions without depending on external components (relays).

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• The basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timers, counters, etc.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Logic modules.

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.1 Introduction

Description

Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their internal logic components. Logic modules can contain:• Plugs• An internal logic component• Sockets• Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.

Schematic

The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

Fig. 11-1: General representation of a logic module


You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your application. These can be used, for example, to implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:

SIMOCODE

Logic module pro C

BU1

Number

pro V

BU2

Number

Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output 3 6

Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output — 2

Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1

Timer 2 4

Counter 2 4

Signal conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit Monitor — 4

Calculation modules (Calculator)* — 2

Table 11-1: Freely-programmable logic modules

*) Only for basic unit 2 for version *E03* onwards

Logic modulePlug 1

Plug n

Socket 1 - n(Logic component)

Setting value

Logic modules


11.2 Truth table 3I/1O

Description

Truth table 3I/1O consists of:• Three plugs• One logic component• One socket.

You can choose from eight possible input conditions the ones with which to generate an output signal.

Overall, the following are available:– Three truth tables, 1 to 3 for BU1– Six truth tables, 1 to 6 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules:

Fig. 11-2: "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules

Truth Table 1 3I/1OInput 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Fig. 11-3: Example of a truth table

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

S3=Input 3

Q1=Output

0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

S1 S2

S3

Q1

Circuit:

Q1 switches with:(S1 or S2) and S3orS1 and S2 and S3

Logic modules


Circuit and parameterization

Fig. 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I/1O

Settings

Truth tables 1-6 3I/

1O -

Description

Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 11-2: Settings for truth table 3I/1O

S2

S3

S1

Circuit:

1

2 Out1

3


Input 2

Input 3

Output

1

2

3

4

L1N

BU

Connect inputs, i.e.Connecting plugs with sockets

Set bits forParameterization with SIMOCODE ES

output signals

Q1

BU Inputs BU Outputs

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Description

The truth table 2I/1O consists of:• 2 plugs• One logic component• One socket.

You can choose from four possible input conditions the ones with which to generate an output signal.

Overall, there are two truth tables (7 and 8) available for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 2I/1O" logic modules


Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Fig. 11-6: Example of truth table 2I/1O


Input 2

OutputTruth Table 8 2I/1O

Input 1

Input 2

Output

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

Q1=Output

0 0 0

0 1 1

1 0 1

1 1 1

S1 S2

Q1

Circuit:

Q1 switches with:S1 or S2

Logic modules



Description

The truth table 5I/2O consists of:• Five plugs• One logic component• Two sockets.

You can choose from 32 possible input conditions the ones with which to generate up to 2 output signals.

Overall, one truth table (9) is available for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 5I/2O" logic modules


Settings

Truth table 9

5I/2O -

Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 11-3: Settings for truth table 5I/2O

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output 1

Input 4

Input 5

Output 2

Truth Table 9 5I/2O

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.5 Counter

Description

Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the plugs "+" or "-".The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset".The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.• Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit)• Plug –: Decreases the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).• Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.

The counter consists of:• 3 plugs (input +, input – and reset)• One logic component• One socket.• One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between

0 and the limit. It remains even if there is a voltage failure.

Overall, the following are available:– Two counters, 1 to 2 for BU1– Four counters, 1 to 4 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:

Fig. 11-8: "Counter" logic modules

Note

The time between the events to be counted depends on:- The input delay- The device cycle time.

Counter 1Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 2

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit Limit

Counter 3Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 4

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit Limit

Actual value Actual value


Logic modules


Note

The actual value remains the same- During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage- If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input –.

Note

The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Settings

Counters 1 to 4 - Description

Input + Increases the actual value by 1.Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter issues an output signal.Range: 0 - 65535

Table 11-4: Counter settings

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.6 Timer

Description

The timer consists of:• Two plugs (input and reset)• One socket.• One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.

The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.

If an input signal is pending, the timer can issue an output signal according to the chosen timer type:• With closing delay• With closing delay with memory• With opening delay• Fleeting closing.

Overall, the following are available:– Two timers, 1 to 2 for BU1– Four timers, 1 to 4 for BU2

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules

Fig. 11-9: "Timer" logic modules

Note


Timer 1Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 2Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 3Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 4Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type


Actual valueActual value

Logic modules


Note

The response of the plugs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely changed to level-active for basic unit 1 from version *E05* and higher and basic unit 2 from version *E03* and higher. Use of an unchanged parameter file utilizing integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such basic units are used. For example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer input, the timer function is automatically restarted after the timer reset occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing" there is no change in the response.

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Output response of the timer

(Basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before version *E03*)

Fig. 11-10: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before version *E03*)

With closing delay:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With closing delay with memory:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With opening delay:

Fleeting closing:

t t

t tt

Input

Reset

Time

Outputt tt

Input

Reset

Time

Outputt

Logic modules


Output response of the timer

(Basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2 from version *E03* onwards)

Fig. 11-11: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2 from version *E03* onwards)

With closing delay:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With closing delay with memory:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With opening delay:

Fleeting closing:

t

Input

Reset

Time

Outputt tt

Input

Reset

Time

Output

t t

t

t t t t

tt t

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Settings

Timers 1 to 4 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the actual value to 0.Activation by any signal(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Closing delay, closing delay with memory,opening delay, fleeting closing

Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output response (type)Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms

Table 11-5: Timer settings

Logic modules


11.7 Signal conditioner

Description

If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:• Non-inverting• Inverting• Edge rising with memory• Edge falling with memory.

You can set the output response.The signal conditioner consists of:• Two plugs (input and reset)• One logic component• One socket.

Overall, the following are available:– Two signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)– Four signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Signal Conditioner" logic modules:

Fig. 11-12: "Signal Conditioner" logic modules

Note


Signal Conditioner 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Types of signals/output responses

Fig. 11-13: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners

Level inverted

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Level not inverted

Input

Output

Reset

Logic modules


NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11-6: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Signal conditioner

1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange:Level not inverted, level inverted,edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.8 Non-volatile elements

Description

Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:• Non-inverting• Inverting• Edge rising with memory• Edge falling with memory.

You can set the output response.The non-volatile element consists of:• Two plugs (input and reset)• One logic component• One socket.

Overall, the following are available:– Two non-volatile elements 1 to 2 for BU1– Four non-volatile elements 1 to 4 for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile Element" logic modules

Fig. 11-14: "Non-volatile Element" logic modules

Note


Non-vol. Elem. 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type

Logic modules


Types of signals/output responses

Fig. 11-15: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements

Level inverted

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Level not inverted

Input

Output

Reset

Voltage failure

Voltage failure

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11-8: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Non-volatile

elements

1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Level not inverted, level inverted,edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 11-9: Non-volatile element settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1

Logic modules


11.9 Flashing

Description

If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module provides a signal at its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 with a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash.The logic module consists of:• One plug• One logic component• One socket.

Overall, three logic modules, "Flashing 1" through to "Flashing 3" are available for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules

Fig. 11-16: "Flashing" logic modules

Settings

Flashing 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, status information, status, etc.)

Table 11-10: Flashing settings

Flashing 1

Input OutputFlashing 2

Input Output

Flashing 3

Input Output

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.10 Flickering

Description

You can use the "Flickering" logic modules to assign the "Flickering" function to the operator panel LEDs (for example).If an input signal is pending, the "Flickering" function block issues an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.The function block consists of:• One plug• One logic component• One socket.

Overall, three logic modules, "Flickering 1" through to "Flickering 3" are available for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:

Fig. 11-17: "Flickering" logic modules

Settings

Flickering 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets , e. g. status information etc.)

Table 11-11: Flickering settings

Flickering 1

Input OutputFlickering 2

Input Output

Flickering 3

Input Output

Logic modules


11.11 Limit monitor

Description

Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limit overshooting or limit undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "marked" according to their function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for overtemperature.The limit monitor consists of:• One analog plug• One logic component• One socket.

Overall, there are 4 limit monitors (1 to 4) available for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Limit Monitor" logic modules:

Fig. 11-18: "Limit Monitor" logic modules

Response

Table 11-12: Limit response


Response Limit 1 to 4

Tripping -Warning - Signaling XDisabled -Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Limit Monitor 1

Event -Type

Limit

Activity

(Marking)

Limit value 1Event -Limit value 2

Limit Monitor 3

Event -Type

Limit

Activity

Limit value 3

Limit Monitor 4

Event -Type

Limit

Activity

Limit value 4

Response

(Marking)

Response

(Marking)

Response

Input Input

Input Input

Limit Monitor 2

Type

Limit

Activity

(Marking)

Response

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Functional principle

The limit signal issued depends on• The operating state of the motor• The TPF function• The parameterized "Activity":

– ON– ON+– RUN– RUN+.

The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity" parameters.

Fig. 11-19: Limit monitor activity

OFF Start Motor is running OFF

"ON"

"ON+"

"RUN"

"RUN+"

Class time

Not with TPF 1)

Not with TPF 1)

Not with TPF 1)

Time

Activity

TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test position, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.

1)

Logic modules


Settings

Note

When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the analog values connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the unit of the limit value to be set. The units and the ranges of all relevant analog values can be found in Chapter B.9 "Data record 94 - Measured values" and Chapter B.10 "Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data".

Limit Monitor Description

Input Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,e.g. maximum current I_max, cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)

Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting.

Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:• ON, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is

running or not• ON+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is

running or notException: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position

• RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test position (TPF)

• RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer pending) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); Example: Cos phi monitoring.

Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor - Delay" parameter.Range: 0 - 65535.

Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot before the "Event - Limit" output is set.Range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s).

Marking No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Limit>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.

Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro:

Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) should be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a maximum temperature of 200 °C.

Unit Range

Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1 K 0 - 65535

Operating hours 1 s 0 - 1193046

Motor stop time 1 h 0 - 65535

Active power 1 W 0 - 4294967295

Apparent power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295

Timer actual value 100 ms 0 - 65535

Currents (e.g. max. current I_max) 1% of Is 0 - 66535

Analog module inputs - 0 - 27648 (S7 format)

Table 11-14: Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro

Logic modules


11.12 Calculators (calculation modules)

Description

Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated and converted, e.g.• Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C• Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]• Conversion of the 0/4 - 20 mA signals of the analog module directly into fill

levels, pressures and flow rates.

The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (counters, denominators, operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value at the analog socket of the logic module(2 bytes/1 word) for further processing.

Each calculator consists of:• One analog plug (calculator 1) or two analog plugs (calculator 2)• One logic component• One analog socket.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the "Calculator" logic modules

Fig. 11-20: "Calculator" logic modules

Calculator 1

Counter

Denominator

Offset

Input

Input 1

Calculator 2

Operating mode

Counter 1

Denominator 1

Offset

Operator

Counter 2

Input 2

Denominator 2

Output

Output

Range: 0 - 65535

Range: 0 - 65535

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Operating modes for calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operating mode" parameter:• Operating mode 1

The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 via a pre-defined formula, using the specified parameters (counters, denominators, offsets, operators).The result is available as an analog value at the output of the function block for further processing (1 word/2 bytes).

• Operating mode 2The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated using the formula defined for this operating mode and using the specified parameters (counters, denominators, offsets) and is output from the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In operating mode 2 it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to generate 2 bytes/1 word.

Logic modules


Settings

Formulae

Fig. 11-21: Calculator formulae

Calculator Description

Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes/1 word)Range: 0 - 65535

Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)Range: 0 - 65535

Calculator 1 - Counter Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1Calculation 1 - Denominator Range: 0 - 255, increment 1Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 - 65535Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 - 65535Calculator 2 - Output Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 - 65535Calculator 2 - Counter 1 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 - 255, increment 1Calculator 2 - Counter 2 1) Range: 0 - 255, increment 1Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 1) Range: -128 to +127, increment 1Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, increment 2Calculator 2 - Operating mode 1 or 2Calculator 2 - Operator 1) +, -, *, /

1) Only relevant for operating mode = 1Table 11-15: Calculator settings

Input 1

Input 2

Calculator 1

Counter

DenominatorOffset

OutputInput

* Input +

Calculator 2

Counter 1

Denominator 1Operator

OutputInput 1

* Input 1Counter 2

Denominator 2Offset* Input 2 +

Operating mode 1

Calculator 2

Counter 1

Denominator 1

Output

* Input 1, input 2 Offset+

Operating mode 2

Input 2

(High)

(Low)

Logic modules

SIMOCODE pro

11-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Examples

Example 1

• Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C

Fig. 11-22: Example 1

Example 2

• Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F


Example 3

• Conversion of the motor current I_max. from % to A (e.g. set current Is = 3.36 A) (only possible for motors with one rotational speed)


TM Inputs

Max. temperature

Sensor type

0 ... 65535 °C

Calculator 1

1



1-273

Unit = 1 K* Input +

TM Inputs

Max. temperature

Sensor type

0 ... 65535 °F

Calculator 1

9



5-460

Unit = 1 K* Input +

Max. current I_max 0 ... 3427 (0 ... 34.72 A)

Calculator 1

336

1000

Unit = 1 %

* Input +


Communication 12In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the options of SIMOCODE pro communication, e.g. communication with a PLC. The default receive, send and diagnostics data settings are sufficient for almost all applications and as such, the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent. Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your application.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets• Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:Device Parameters > Bus Parameters

Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic send data

Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic send data.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.1 Definitions

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals). The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central DP master and the I/O devices.

PROFIBUS DPV1

PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.

DP master

A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Class 1 master

A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

Class 2 master

A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.Typical class 2 masters are, for example:• PC/programming devices with the SIMOCODE ES software• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)• PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).

DPV1 slave

A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

GSD

Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slaves in a DP master system.

OM SIMOCODE pro

OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data) to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES (if it is installed) for parameterization within STEP7.

Communication


SIMATIC PDM

Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and for configuring networks and PCs.

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

A SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into STEP7. It is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process alarms).

Writing data

Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.

Reading data

Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.

PROFIsafe

A safety profile developed and tested according to IEC 61508 for the widely-used PROFIBUS and PROFINET fieldbus protocols.The PROFIsafe profile determines how failsafe safety devices (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP buttons) are connected to programmable controllers via PROFIBUS.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.2 Data transfer

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the options for data transfer:

Fig. 12-1: Options for data transfer

Communication principle

The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is transmitted depending on the master and slave operating modes:

Fig. 12-2: Communication principle

Data transfer to class 1 master, depending on the slave operating mode (see Chapter 12.5.1 "Slave operating modes")

PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,diagnostics, receiving, sending, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1

PC/programming devices with SIMOCODE ESParameterizing, diagnostics, receiving, sending, testing via system interface

Maximum of two class 2 masters possible

Class 1 master

SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processorClass 2 master

PC or programming device with SIMOCODE ES

PLC

3UF7

Class 1 master Class 2 master (max. 2)

Cyclic I/O AcyclicPLC CPU

Acyclic

Configuration

Communication processor

GSD

Cyclic send dataCyclic receive data

Diagnostics Alarms

DPV0

DPV1

Parameter

SIMOCODE pro

Data records Data records

DPV1

Acyclic

PC or PCSe.g. SIMOCODE ES

Startupparameterblock

Communication


12.3 Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe

From version E07, SIMOCODE pro V supports safe tripping of motors by means of data transfer via the PROFIsafe profile in connection with a failsafe controller (F-CPU) and the SIMOCODE pro expansion module DM-F PROFIsafe.You can find further information on this function in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.4 Telegram description and data access

12.4.1 Cyclic data

Cyclic data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the DP slave once every DP cycle. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends the receive data to SIMOCODE pro.In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the send data to the master module.Cyclic data is accessed via the inputs (send data) and outputs (receive data) in the PLC program.The length of the cyclic data which is to be transferred is already set when SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by selecting the basic type which in turn determines the structure and the length of the cyclic data.

The following basic types are available:• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:

Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro

• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master

The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by parameterization, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterizationsoftware is started (see Chapter B.21 "Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions").

Designation Length Designation Infor-

mation

Basic type 1 4 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive -Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU2 Cyclic Receive - Analog value

Basic type 2 2 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive -Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU1 BU2

PROFIsafe 5 bytes of receive data 1 bit user data, assigned permanently to the relay enabling circuits

BU2

Designation Length Designation Infor-

mation

Basic type 1 10 bytes send data Cyclic Send -Bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU2 Cyclic Send - Analog inputs 1 to 4

Basic type 2 4 bytes send data Cyclic Send -Bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU1

BU2Cyclic Send - Analog Input 1

PROFIsafe 4 byte inputs No user data BU2

Communication


12.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms

Diagnostics data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.In contrast to cyclic data, the diagnostics data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes.PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:• Standard diagnostics• Status information• Channel-related diagnostics• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.

Configure diagnostic response

In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the transmission of diagnostics data or the alarms to the PLC:• Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults• Diagnostics for process faults:

For events which are marked with "F" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

• Diagnostics for process warnings:For events which are marked with "W" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

• Diagnostics for process events:For events which are marked with "E" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Set the response in the Device Parameters > Bus Parameters >

Diagnosis.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.4.3 Configuration of the slave diagnostics

Fig. 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics

The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.

.

.

.

Station status 1 to 3

Master PROFIBUS address

High byteLow byte

Manufacturer's

Identification-related diagnostics

Status information

Channel-related diagnostics(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 8

Byte 27

Byte 28

Byte 29

Byte 30

Byte 6

Byte 7

Standarddiagnostics

Channel-related diagnostics(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)

Byte 31

Byte 32

Byte 33

Byte 28+n

Byte 48+n

Process alarm (temporary)Byte 28+n

Byte 48+n

.

.

.

.

.

.

Diagnostic alarm (temporary)

Advanceddiagnostics

identification

Communication


Station status - definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.

Station status 1

Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures

0 The DP slave cannot beaddressed by the DP master.

Check the following:• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on

the DP slave?• Is the bus connection plug plugged in?• Is the DP slave connected to the power

supply?• Is the RS-485 repeater configured

correctly?

1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer.

The DP slave is just starting up.Wait until the startup is completed.

2 The configuration data sent from the DP master to the DP slave does not correspond to the configuration of the DP slave.

Check whether the correct station type and the correct configuration of the DP slave has been entered in the configuration software.

3 External diagnostics is available (general diagnostics display)

Evaluate the identification-related diagnostics, the status information and/or the channel-related diagnostics.Bit 3 is reset as soon as all errors are rectified. The bit is reset if there is a new diagnostic message in the bytes of the above-mentioned diagnostic functions.

4 The required function is not supported by the DP slave

Check the configuration.

5 The DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave.

Check the bus configuration.

6 The DP slave type does not correspond to the software configuration.

Enter the correct station type in the configuration software.

7 The DP slave has been parameterized by another DP master (not by the DP master which has access to the DP slave at the moment).

Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the DP slave from the programming device or from another DP master (for example).The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave is in the "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Station status 2

Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)

Station status 3

Station status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnostics.

Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3

Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte which:• Parameterized the DP slave• Has read and write access to the DP slave.

The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Manufacturer's identification - definition

A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type.

Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification

Bit Meaning

0 The DP slave must be parameterized again.

1 There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave will not function until the fault is rectified (static diagnostic message).

2 The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is present.

3 Address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.

4 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).

5 The DP slave received the "SYNC" control command 1).

6 0: Bit is always "0".

7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.

1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message also changes.

Bit Meaning

0 to 7 Bits are always "0".

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer's identification for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro

Communication


Identification-related diagnostics - definition

Identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.

Identification-related diagnostics - configuration

Fig. 12-4: Configuration of identification-related diagnostics

Status information - definition

The status information provides the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.If SIMOCODE pro is operated downstream from the Y-link (module for connecting single-channel DP slaves to S7-400H), the so-called H_STATUS is also signaled (see Fig. 12-6 "H_STATUS configuration").

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 07 6 5 0

Byte 6

Bit number

= 0x42

Length of identification-related diagnosticsincluding byte 6 (= 2 bytes)

Code for identification-related diagnostics

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x7 6 5 0

Byte 7

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics is available

0 0 0 0 00 0x7 6 5 0

Byte 7

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics is available

GSD

OM SIMOCODE pro

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Status information - configuration

The status information is configured as follows:

Fig. 12-5: Status information configuration

Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 8

Bit number

= 0x14

Length of the status informationincluding byte 8 (= 20 bytes)

7 6 5Byte 12

Bit number

7 0Byte 9 0x81

7 0Byte 10 x

Byte 11 0x00

4 3 2 1 0

Slot number

Status information

GSD:OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04

0x01

Detailed status information...

Byte 27

Communication


The H_STATUS is configured as follows:

Fig. 12-6: H_STATUS configuration

Length of H_STATUS including byte 8Code for device-related diagnostics

7 0

0x00

Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 10

Byte 11

7 6 5 0 Bit number

0x1E = Switching by DP master0x1F = H_STATUS

7 0 Bit number

Always "0"

Not relevant

Not relevantByte 12

Byte 13 H_STATUS

7 06 5 4 3 2 10 0

DeactivatedActivated

Hardware faultData exchange

Master - state - clearBaud rate detected

0x04Byte 14

Byte 15

Always "4"

Always "0"0x00

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Channel-related diagnostics - definition

Channel-related diagnosis is a detailed version of the identification-related diagnostics. It supplies information about the device faults of SIMOCODE pro.

Channel-related diagnostics - configuration

The channel-related diagnostics is configured as follows:

Fig. 12-7: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics

The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes, is either missing (if there is no channel-related diagnostics) or is available once or twice.

Error types

The diagnostic message is output on channel 0.

Table 12-7: Error types

No. Error type Meaning/cause

F9 01001: Error

• Internal fault/device fault• Error during self-test

Exact information: See Chapter B.8 "Data record 92 - Device diagnostics".F16 10000:

Parameterization error

• Incorrect parameter value

1 0 0 0 0 0 x x7 6 5 0

Byte 28

Bit number

Code for channel-related diagnostics

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 29

Bit number

Input/output channel

7 6 5 0Byte 30

Bit number

Channel type:

Error type 9 or 16 (table below)

000B: No special channel type

Byte 31 to Next channel-related diagnostic message(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30)byte 33

0 0 0

0x80 GSD0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro

Communication


Alarms - diagnostic alarm

Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic alarm is started in the SIMATIC S7.

Diagnostic alarm - configuration

The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:

Fig. 12-8: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm

The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.

You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data record 1 in Chapter B.2 "Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14

Length of the diagnostic alarmincluding header byte (= 20 bytes)

7 00x01

7 0x

0x00

Slot number

Diagnostic alarm


0x01

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 28+n

Byte 29+n

Byte 30+n

Byte 31+n

Byte 32+n

Byte 48+n

Contents of data record 1

n = 0; 3; 6

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Alarms - process alarm

Process faults, warnings and status information are alarm sources for process alarms.As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm is started in the SIMATIC S7.

Process alarm - configuration

The process alarm is configured as follows:

Fig. 12-9: Configuration of the process alarm

The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.

Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14

Length of the process alarmincluding header byte (= 20 bytes)

7 0

7 0x

0x00

Slot number

Process alarm


0x01

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

Byte 28+n

Byte 29+n

Byte 30+n

Byte 31+n

Byte 32+n

Byte 48+n

Detailed status information

n = 0; 3; 6

7 6 5 0 Bit number

0x02

Communication


12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems

12.5.1 Slave operating modes

The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:

Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro

12.5.2 Preparing the data transfer

In order to communicate with the class 1 master (PLC), a connection according to Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro must be present and the PROFIBUS-DP address must be configured.See Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" for more information about setting the address.

SIMOCODE pro

connected as:

Class 1 master

DP master

manufacturer-

independent,

without DPV1 alarms

DP master

manufacturer-

independent,

with DPV1 alarms

S7 master

• DPV1 slavevia GSD

• Cyclic data exchange

• Standard diagnostics

• Status information• Parameterization

during startup (only BU1)

• Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records (if supported by the master)



• Status information• Process and

diagnostic alarm• Parameterization


• Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data records



• Status information• Process and

diagnostic alarm• Parameterization



• S7 slave via OMSIMOCODE pro

— — • Cyclic data exchange


• Process and diagnostic alarm

• Parameterization during startup


Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the

configuration software

SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the GSD file.You can download the GSD file• From the internet at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd (switchgears).

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:• SI0180FD.GSG (German)• SI0180FD.GSE (English).• SI0180FD.GSF (French).The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:• SI1280FD.GSG (German)• SI1280FD.GSE (English).• SI1280FD.GSF (French).

Notice

If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g. timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev. 5 such as STEP7 V5.3 and higher.

The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuration software

Step STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards

1 Start STEP7 and in the HW Config select the menu command"Options > Install GSD file".

2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK" -->. The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Other field devices > Switching devices > SIMOCODE pro".

3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.4 Only for SIMOCODE pro V:

SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the "PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1" or "basic type 2").You can find further information on using DM-F PROFIsafe in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".

5 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of the DPV1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms (see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10 "Timestamping").

6 Only for SIMOCODE pro C:It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every startup in the object properties under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").

http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd

Communication


12.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via

GSD) in STEP7 HW Config

SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM object in the STEP7 HW Config of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software from version 6.0 + SP1 onwards. The PDM option "Integration in STEP7" is required for this.The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object in the STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) inSTEP7 HW Config

Step STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards

1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".

2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate to the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices" directory in the hardware catalog.

3 Enter"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or "SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.Only for SIMOCODE pro V:SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the "PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1" or "basic type 2".)You can find further information on using DM-F PROFIsafe in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY ".

4 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of the DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms (see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10 "Timestamping").

5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on the slave symbol (see Chapter 12.8.2 "SIMATIC PDM").

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advantages of SIMOCODE ES and parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the STEP7 HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of supply of the "SIMOCODE ES Premium" software.Install the corresponding software.The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro inthe STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.

Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that are connected to the controller.

Step STEP7

1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".

2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices > Motor Management System" directory.

3 EnterSIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) orSIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.Only for SIMOCODE pro V:SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data".Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" or "basic type 2" as a module.Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1 - PROFIsafe" or "Basic type 2 - PROFIsafe" as a module.You can find further information on using DM-F PROFIsafe in the system manual "Failsafe Digital ModulesSIMOCODE pro SAFETY".

4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES" software to generate the device parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are incorporated in STEP7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during startup (see Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").

Communication


12.6 Evaluating diagnostics data

The way in which the diagnostics data is read out depends in which DP master system you have integrated SIMOCODE pro and how the integration was carried out (see Chapter 12.5 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems").

12.6.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD

DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode)

(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)

The diagnostics data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in DP master systems with DPV1 alarm support.A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool (diagnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled.You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP7 this is carried out in HW Config via the properties of the DP slave.• Response and process in STEP7

A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process faults, warnings and status information. If OB 82 or OB 40 are not programmed, the CPU goes into "STOP" mode.

• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM". The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.

Note

The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the FB "RALRM" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.

You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

DP master without DPV1 alarm support (DPV0 alarm mode)

(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)

SIMOCODE pro diagnostics data can be evaluated via device-specific diagnostics (status information) and channel-related diagnostics (as part of extended diagnostics, see Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave diagnostics") in DP master systems without DPV1 alarm support.You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.Device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults, warnings and status information which are recorded by the process via SIMOCODE pro. Information concerning hardware faults is transmitted via channel-related diagnostics.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

• Response and process in STEP7:The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnostics (device or process fault, warning or status information). If the OB 82 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.

• Reading out slave diagnostics with STEP7It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostics data by evaluating the start information of OB 82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable). OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the slave in the HW Config. The diagnostics data is then read, e.g. in the cyclic part of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".The diagnostics data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the configuration described in Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave diagnostics".You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.

12.6.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES

The diagnostics data concerning diagnostic alarms and process alarms is transmitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave.

DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode

(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)

Response and process in STEP7:A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process faults, warnings and status information.If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7:

The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

Communication


DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode

(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)

Response and process in STEP7:A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new process fault, warning or status information.If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.You will find more information about device faults in the start information of OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.The start information of the OB 40 contains the "OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable, which in turn contains the data of the process alarm that is described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Process alarm - configuration"). The reading of the complete diagnostics can then be initiated from OB 40, while (for example) the complete diagnostics data record 92 is read, e.g. in the cyclic user program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.7 Data records

Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can only be read or partly written.These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via acyclic DPV1 functions. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and parameterize SIMOCODE pro.You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will find an overview of the data records provided by SIMOCODE pro in Chapter B "Data formats and data records".Special function blocks must be started in the user program in the PLC for access to the DPV1 data records unlike access to cyclic I/O data.

Access to data records in STEP7

Read and write access to data records is gained by starting the system functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or via system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC" for CPUs that support the "DPV1" DP mode.

Note

The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.

You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online help.

Communication


12.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS

12.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium

With SIMOCODE ES Premium you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a central location. Parameter data which has been previously created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.

Note

A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512 or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g. transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters.

The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated together with SIMOCODE ES Premium as a class 2 master and use acyclic DPV1 communication functions for the communication with SIMOCODE pro.If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that are connected to the controller.

Notice

The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.8.2 SIMATIC PDM

The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with a comparable functionality to SIMOCODE ES for parameterization of SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS:The following additional functions are available with the PDM option "Integration in STEP7":• "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and

manual transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during startup!)

• "Routing via S7 stations".Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a data record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with different networks.

Notice

The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.

You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC PDM manual.

Communication


12.8.3 Parameter data during startup

Parameters are transferred to the device during every startup of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP.Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific parameters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transferred. The parameters are saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transferred automatically to the DP slave during the system startup.You can set the device-specific parameters:• With the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with

STEP7 HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by configuring the device-specific parameters in the slave properties.

• In the "SIMOCODE ES" software during the integration of SIMOCODE pro in STEP7 HW Config as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can start the "SIMOCODE ES" software for easy configuration of the parameterization from STEP7 HW Config using the button in the "Parameter" tab in the object properties of slot 4.

Notice

In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization during startup, the startup parameter block ("Device Parameter > Bus Parameter") must remain unset.SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are overwritten.

Communication

SIMOCODE pro

12-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.9 Timestamping/time synchronization

See Chapter 10.10 "Timestamping".


Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13In this chapter

This chapter contains information about mounting and wiring individual SIMOCODE pro components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Technicians• Electricians• Maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

Mounting, wiring, interfaces

SIMOCODE pro

13-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.1 General information about mounting and wiring

Safety guidelines

Warning

Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burning. Ensure the system and the device are disconnected from voltage before beginning work.

Notice

Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the devices):

You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

Device Order No.

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1

Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1

Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1

Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1

Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1

Failsafe digital module DM-F Local 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1

Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1

Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1

Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1

Current/voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1

Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1

Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1




Mounting lugs for screw attachment

Notice

For technical reasons, there are two different mounting lugs for the screw attachment:For basic units, expansion modules,and the decoupling module: Order no. 3RP1903For current measuring modules, and current/voltage measuring modules.45 mm and 55 mm width: Order no. 3RP1900-0B

Removable terminals

Notice

The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!


SIMOCODE pro

13-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.2 Mounting

13.2.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

You can attach these system components as follows:• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules of

45 mm and 55 mm width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail without tools

• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order no: 3RP1903) and screws for mounting on a level surface.These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module!

Fig. 13-1: Mounting of basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro Vwith increased installation

Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails

Screw attachment

3RP1903

Ø 5 mm

Expansion module,

Ø 5 mm

3RP1903

Snap-on mounting onto a current measuring modulee.g. a 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1

BU1 BU2

decoupling module

SIMOCODE pro V

DM-F,DM-DO

depth



13.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY", Chapter 5 "Mounting and connection".


SIMOCODE pro

13-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.2.3 Current measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:• Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or

screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B) and screws for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for current measuring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For current measuring modules up to 25 A you will require an additional 25 mm spacer.

• Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw attachment

• Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Fig. 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules

3RP1900-0B

3UF7100-1AA00-03UF7101-1AA00-0

25 mm spacer3RP1900-0B

Snap-on mounting

3UF7102-1AA00-0

Screw attachment

45 mm width 55 mm width

3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 Ascrew attachmentSnap-on mounting or

Screw attachmentSnap-on mounting orscrew attachment



13.2.4 Current/voltage measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail

mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B) and screws for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring modules)! For current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you will require an additional 25 mm spacer.

• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw attachment.

• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Fig. 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules

3UF7110-1AA00-03UF7111-1AA00-0

25 mm spacer3RP1900-0B

Snap-on mounting

3UF7112-1AA00-0

Screw attachment

45 mm width 55 mm width

3UF7113-1AA00-0 3UF7113-1BA00-0 3UF7114-1BA00-0

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 Ascrew attachmentSnap-on mounting or

screw attachmentSnap-on mounting orscrew attachment

3RP1900-0B


SIMOCODE pro

13-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display

Operator panels are designed to be installed e.g. in the front panels of motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors.Install as follows:

Table 13-1: Sequence for installing the operator panel/operator panel with display

Fig. 13-4: Mounting the operator panel

Step Description

1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions (see Fig. 13-4 and 13-5).

2 Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.

3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel

4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket screws.

Front panelswitchgear

etc.

4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm

90+0.5

30+

0.5

Cutout

Operator panel Mounting bracket

cabinet door



Fig. 13-5: Mounting the operator panel with display

Warning

To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel, the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the seal provided must be applied.

Note

Only a connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with display to SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1.6 "Overview of system components"). Additional wiring for the power supply or ground is not required.

91.5+0.5

54.5

+0.

5

Cutout

Front panelswitchgear cabinet dooretc.

Operator panel with display

4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm

Mounting bracket


SIMOCODE pro

13-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel, proceed as follows:

Table 13-2: Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

Fig. 13-6: Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)

Step Description

1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator panel from the front panel or switchgear cabinet door.

2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door measure 91.5+0.5 mm (width) and 54.5+0.5 mm (height) (see Fig. 13-6)

3 Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see Fig. 13-6).

4 Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.

5 Position the operator panel in the adapter.

6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel

7 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket screws (see Fig. 13-7 and safety guidelines!).

4x



Fig. 13-7: Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)

Warning

To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel, the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the seal provided must be applied.

Notice

A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel can not be used with SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5, and vice versa.

IP54


SIMOCODE pro

13-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.3 Wiring

13.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!

Fig. 13-8: Removable terminals on basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Notice

The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!

Cables

The cable cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the removable terminals:

Table 13-3: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

Strip lengths Cable cross section

2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /1 x 0.5 mm2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12

2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14

Removable terminalsBasic units Expansion modules/

A

D

C

A, C, D: Coding

A

C

D

decoupling module

PZ2/Ø 5 mm - 6 mm

10 Solid

10 Finely strandedwith/withoutend sleeve



Supplying the inputs of the basic unit

There are three possibilities for supplying the inputs:• a): 24 V DC internal• b): 24 V DC external However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.

three inputs are available.• c): 24 V DC external Only possible for basic units with a supply voltage of

24 V DC!

Fig. 13-9: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs

All inputs work reactionless, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs do not influence each other.

Basic unit (BU)

BU Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable

A1

A2

a) b) c)

Only possible for the basic unit with 24 V DCsupply voltage!

24 V DC

(not usable)


SIMOCODE pro

13-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Basic unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 13-4: Pin assignment for the removable terminals of the basic unit

Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for basic units

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-5: Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit

Connection Assignment

Upper terminals

1 Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2

2 Relay output OUT1

3 Relay output OUT2

4 Digital input IN3

5 Digital input IN4

T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

6 Relay output OUT3

7 Relay output OUT3

8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4

9 Digital input IN1

10 Digital input IN2

T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

Lower terminals

A1 Pin 1 supply voltage

A2 Pin 2 supply voltage

A PROFIBUS DP pin A

B PROFIBUS DP pin B

SPE/PE System shielding

Step Description

1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.

2 If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.

NoticeThe A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!

3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.

1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN4 5 T2

OUT3 7 8 9 IN1 IN210 T16

DEVICE

BUS

GEN. FAULT

ϑ

TEST/RESET

PRO

FIBU

S D

P

A1 A2 A B SPE/PE

24V

SIMOCODE PRO



Basic unit connection example

Fig. 13-10: Basic unit connection example

Supplying the inputs of the digital module

• Digital module with 24 V DC input supply• Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply

Fig. 13-11: Supplying the inputs of the digital module

Device

Bus

Gen. Fault

9 10 4 5 8

1

2

3

6

7PROFIBUS DP

SPE/PEA B

a)

b)

T1 T2

A1 A2

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 24 V

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

Max. 1.5 MBd

24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external

Digital module (DM)

DM Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M

Digital module (DM)

DM Inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M~


SIMOCODE pro

13-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Digital module pin assignment


Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module


Upper terminals

20 Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2

21 Relay output OUT1

22 Relay output OUT2



25 N/M for IN1 to IN4

Lower terminals



PE System shielding

20 21 22OUT1 .2

23 24 25IN2

READY

26 27 PEIN3 IN4

IN1



Digital module connection example

Fig. 13-12: Digital module connection example

Ready

23 24 26 27

20

21

22

PE

25

+

–

~ AC

DC

N/MIN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

OUT1

OUT2


SIMOCODE pro

13-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Earth-fault module pin assignment


Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth fault module


Upper terminals

40 Input C1 summation current transformer

43 Input C2 summation current transformer

Lower terminals

PE System shielding

40

READY

C1

43 C2

EM3UF7 500–1AA00–0

G/YYMMDD *Exx*

PE



Earth-fault module connection example

Fig. 13-13: Earth-fault module connection example

*) Cable shielding recommended

Ready

C1

PE

3UL22 Z1

C2

40 43

L1L2L3N

Z2

*)


SIMOCODE pro

13-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Temperature module pin assignment


Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module

You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.• 2-wire temperature sensors:

Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminals.• 3-wire temperature sensors.

Assign terminals 56 and 57 doubly when three sensors are used.


Upper terminals

50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1






Lower terminals

56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3

57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3

PE System shielding READYTM3UF7 700–1AA00–0

G/YYMMDD *Exx*

50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3

53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2

56 T1 57 PE



Temperature module connection example

Fig. 13-14: Temperature module connection example

NTC type: B 57227-K333-A1

J

RQ 63022-K7182-S1

Ready

T1

PE

1T2

56 57

1T3

1)ϑ

3 x max.

53

1T2

T1

50

1T3

54

2T2

51

2T3

55

3T2

52

3T3

2)ϑ

3 x max.

T1

T1 2T2 2T3T1 3T2 3T3

T1 1T2 1T3T1 2T2 2T3T1 3T2 3T3

*) *) *) Cable shielding recommended

NTC temperature sensor:


SIMOCODE pro

13-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Analog module pin assignment


Table 13-9: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module


Upper terminals

30 Analog input IN1+




Lower terminals

36 Analog output OUT+

37 Analog output OUT+

PE System shielding READYAM3UF7 400–1AA00–0

G/YYMMDD *Exx*

33 IN1- 34IN2-

36 +OUT- PE37

30 IN1+ 31IN2+



Analog module connection example

Fig. 13-15: Analog module connection example

Ready

PE36 37

30

IN1+

33

IN1-

31

IN2+

34

IN2-

L++

-

IN1+ IN1-

RL

RL < 500 Ohm

+

-

IIN (0/4 mA - 20 mA)

OUT+ OUT-

IOUT (0/4 A - 20 mA)

IN2+ IN2-

2 x max.

*) M

*)*) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m

Cable shielding necessary for over 30 m

(potential-free current source, e.g. isolation amplifier)

and for outside of the switchgear cabinet.


SIMOCODE pro

13-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Decoupling module pin assignment


Table 13-10: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the decoupling module

Decoupling module connection example

Fig. 13-16: Decoupling module connection example

Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling

module

Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.


Upper terminals

-

Lower terminals

PE System shielding

READYDCM3UF7 150–1AA00–0

G/YYMMDD *Exx*

PE

Ready



13.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Wiring:


Warning

Loss of safety function possible.

For the 24 V DC power supply, always use a power supply according to IEC 60536 protection class III (SELV or PELV).

Note

Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.


SIMOCODE pro

13-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Digital module DM-F Local pin assignment


Table 13-11: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local, 24 V DC and 110-240 V UC version.


Upper terminals

60, 66 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60) and 2 (66)

61, 67 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO contact


Y12, Y22 Sensor input channel 1, channel 2

T1, T2 Supply for sensor inputs(24 V DC, pulsed)

Y33 Start button (start after rising and falling edge)

Y34 Feedback circuit

Lower terminals

A1(+) Voltage supply connection 110 to 240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC

A2(-) N or -24 V

M Ground (reference potential sensor inputs, only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)

1 Cascade input

T3 Supplying the sensor inputs (24 V DC, static)

PE Protective earth



Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe pin assignment


Table 13-12: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F PROFIsafe,24 V DC version and 110-240 V UC version


Upper terminals

80, 86 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80) and 2 (86)



83 (IN1)

85 (IN2)

89 (IN3)

Digital module inputs 1,2,3

84 Digital module supplyInputs 1 to 3 24 V DC

90 (T) Feedback circuit supply (FBC) 24 V DC

91 (FBC) Feedback circuit

Lower terminals

A1(+) Voltage supply connection 110 to 240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC

A2(-) N or -24 V

M Ground (reference potential inputs, only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)

PE Protective earth


SIMOCODE pro

13-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Digital module DM-F Local connection example

DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,monitored start.

Warning

The protection stipulated must be observed!This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

Fig. 13-17: Connection example "DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,monitored start"

Further connection examples:See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY"

-Q4

-Q1

START

Y22 T2 Y34 Y12 T1 Y33 T3 1 M

A1 A2

61 62

60 66 67 68

Q4 Q2 Q1

Safety logic

READYDEVICEOUTINGF

CH1

CH2

+/L -/N

OUT1

OUT2

Digital module output

Q3

DIAZED 4 A, gLgG

PE

ON

21

34

56

78

910



Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection examples

Warning

The protection stipulated must be observed!This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

Fig. 13-18: Block diagram DM-F PROFIsafe

Connection examples:See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY"

-Q1

-Q4

83 85 89 91 90 M

PEA1 A2 80 86 87 88

Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2+/L -/N

81 82

Safety logic

Digital module output

READYDEVICEOUT

GF

CH1

CH2

OUT1

OUT2

84

(24 V=) (FBC) (T)(IN3)(IN2)(IN1)

DIAZED 4 A, gLgG


SIMOCODE pro

13-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.3.3 Current measuring modules

Select a suitable current measuring module for measuring current, depending on the motor current size:• Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are

passed through the through-hole openings.• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to

Siemens contactors.

The following table shows the various current measuring modules:

Notice

When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring module and correct routing direction!Observe the information in the operating instructions!You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

Current measuring module Main circuit connection

3UF7100-1AA00-00.3 A - 3 AØ through-hole openings: 7.5 mm

Through-hole technology


3UF7102-1AA00-010 A - 100 AØ through-hole openings: 14 mm


3UF7103-1BA00-020 A - 200 AConductor cross section: 16 mm² - 95 mm², AWG 5 to 3/0

Bus connectionsystem

3UF7104-1BA00-063 A - 630 AConductor cross section:50 mm² - 240 mm², AWG 1/0 kcmil to500 kcmil

Table 13-13: Current measuring modules

Ø

L1L2L3N

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

M~3




13.3.4 Current/voltage measuring modules

Select a suitable current/voltage measuring module for measuring current and voltage, depending on the motor current size:• Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are

passed through the through-hole openings.• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to

Siemens contactors.

The following table shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:

Current/voltage measuring modules

Main circuitconnection


Through-hole technology




3UF7113-1BA00-020 A up to 200 AConductor cross section: 16 mm² - 95 mm²,AWG 6 to 3/0

Bus connectionsystem

3UF7114-1BA00-063 A - 630 AConductor cross section:50 mm² - 240 mm², AWG 1/0 kcmil to500 kcmil

Table 13-14: Current/voltage measuring modules

L1L2L3N

M~3

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

L1 L2 L3


SIMOCODE pro

13-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Safety guidelines

Note

Measuring voltage or power values:For current/voltage measuring modules, connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 with the connection terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals via a 3-core cable. The supply cables may require additional cable protection, for example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.

Notice

When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage measuring modules and correct routing direction! Observe the information in the operating instructions!You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

Removable terminals

The following table shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the removable terminals:

Table 13-15: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cablesThe following is a representation of the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Fig. 13-19: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules

Caution

The L1 and L3 phases are interchanged on the upper/lower terminals!

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

Strip lengths Cable cross section

2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /1 x 0.5 mm2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12

2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14

PZ2/Ø 5 mm -6 mm

10 Solid

10 Finely strandedwith/withoutend sleeve

L1, L2, L3:Terminals for connecting the 3-wirecable of the main circuit

Bottom Upper




13.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing

transformer)

Description

SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the three through-hole openings of the current measuring module, and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external current transformer is the primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.

Notice

If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the current transformer must be within the setting range of the current measuring module used!

Fig. 13-20: Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer

Transformation ratio

The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:

Transformation ratio =

In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not need to be converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value, based upon the parameterized set current Is.

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit

Current measuringmodule 3UF 71

3UF18 current transformer

Basic unit3UF 70

Secondary circuit

Primary current (external current transformer)

Secondary current x number of loops n(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)


SIMOCODE pro

13-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Technical data of the current transformer

• Secondary current: 1 A• Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz• Transformer rating: Recommended > 2.5 VA, according to the secondary

current and cable length• Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10• Accuracy class: 1

Example 1:

• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load– Secondary current: 1 A

• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,Set current 0.3 to 3 A

This means:– The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load

and is, therefore, within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used

– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.

Fig. 13-21: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an 3UF18 external current transformer

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit



Basic unit3UF 70

Secondary circuit

Primary current atnominal load: 820 A

Secondary current: 1 A Set current Is: 1 A

Adjustment range:0.3 A - 3 A



Example 2:

• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load– Secondary current: 0.25 A

• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,Set current 0.3 to 3 A

This means:– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated

load and is, therefore, not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used.

– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the secondary cables through the through-hole openings of the current measuring module. Double-looping results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.

– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.

Fig. 13-22: Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer

Note

When using basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03* onwards, the set current does not have to be converted. It will correspond to the rated current flowing on the main current side.Additional entry of the transformation ratio of the current transformer (interposing transformer) will result in automatic conversion in the device.

M3~

L1 L2 L3

K1

K2

K3

L

Main circuit


Basic unit3UF 70

Secondary circuit

Primary current atnominal load: 205 A

Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A Set current Is: 0.5 A


Adjustment range:0.3 A - 3 A

Double-looping through of the secondary cables


SIMOCODE pro

13-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.4 System interfaces

13.4.1 General

Please observe the following:• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the

system interfaces.• Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system

components.• The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have

two system interfaces:– Bottom: For outgoing connecting cables that, in the case of BU1, always

lead to the current measuring module.– Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module

or operator panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.

• Current measuring modules have one system interface:– Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.

• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front. – Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion

module or basic unit BU2.– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module

or operator panel, and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.

• Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front: – Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion

module or basic unit BU2.– Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current/

voltage measuring module.• Operator panels have two system interfaces:

– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion

module or basic unit.• System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover.

Warning

Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and on door adapters (IP54 degree of protection):When using for the first time, press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket!



Fig. 13-23: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the door adapter

Fig. 13-24: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel

Fig. 13-25: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel with display

0

0


SIMOCODE pro

13-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Example

The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V installation:

Fig. 13-26: Example of system interfaces

UF-0

1130

SIMOCODE pro V

Basic unit (BU2) Current measuringmodule (IM)

Operator panel (OP)

Expansion modules

Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)

Incoming, from• Expansion module• Basic unit BU2

Outgoing, to• Expansion module• Operator panel

Incoming, from• Basic unit

UF-

0113

0

Operator panel (OP)Incoming, from• Upstream expansion module• Basic unit

Cover

Basic units (BU)

Outgoing, to• Current measuring module


Current measuring module (IM)

• Decoupling module

Digital module DM-F Local,

DM-F PROFIsafe


Incoming, from• Expansion module• Basic unit BU2



13.4.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module,

current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules

The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic units. Other system components can be connected here:• Via a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measuring modules• By plugging them in directly, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.

Notice

Only connect system interfaces when disconnected from voltage!

Fig. 13-27: Connecting system components to the system interface

Memory module,

Connecting cable

Expansion modules/Basic units

Current measuring modules

2 systeminterfaces

Systeminterface

Connecting cable

Systeminterfaces

addressing plug,System interface cover


Systeminterface

Connecting cable

Removable terminals

Removable terminals

Decoupling module


SIMOCODE pro

13-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-16: Connecting to the system interface

Fig. 13-28: Procedure for connecting to the system interfaces

Safety guidelines

Notice

For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be used for the current measuring module!

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be

used for the current measuring module!

2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use

ConnectingcableCover

System interfaces on the

1

2

3

front side and bottom

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

Catches

Catches

Color coding



Notice

Only a current/voltage measuring module may be connected to the system interface on the right of the decoupling module. Memory modules, addressing plugs or PC cables will not be recognized there.

Notice

Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!

13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe



SIMOCODE pro

13-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with

display

The operator panel has two system interfaces:• Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated

operator panel. The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module is always connected here.

• Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator panel. Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed again after use.These can be:

– Memory module– Addressing plug– PC cable for connecting a PC/programming device– Cover (if the system interface is not in use).

Fig. 13-29: System interfaces on the operator panel

Fig. 13-30: System interfaces on the operator panel with display

Front system interface

e.g. memory module

Rear system interface

Connecting cable

Rear system interface Front system interface

e.g. memory module



Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the

operator panel with display

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-17: Connecting system components to the system interface

Notice

In order to ensure IP54 degree of protection, press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).When mounting the operator panel using the screws provided, ensure the tightening torque is not set too high.

Note

Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park positions" (see Figure 13-31).

Notice

Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.

2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use


SIMOCODE pro

13-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Fig. 13-31: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel

Connecting cable

2

1

1

Catches

Catches

Color coding

Cover Park pos.

Front

Rear

0



Fig. 13-32: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with display

Front

Rear

Cover

Park position


SIMOCODE pro

13-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket

The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.

Notice

The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A/B terminals!

Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-18: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module

Fig. 13-33: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket

Step Description

1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

PROFIBUS DP cable

PROFIBUS DP interface

9-poleSUB-D plug

9-pole SUB-D socket



13.6 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

Specifications

The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.

PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS User Organization. They contain important information about the cable routing and commissioning ofPROFIBUS networks.

Publisher:PROFIBUS User OrganizationHaid-und-Neu-Strasse 776131 Karlsruhe, GermanyTel.: +49 721 96 58 590 Fax: +49 721 96 58 589Internet: http://www.profibus.comGuidelines, Order No. 2.111

See also the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual athttp://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286.

Application of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in MCC motor feeders. It provides correct bus termination, even for removed MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when a standard SUB-D plug cannot be used for the last device on a bus line.The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module may also be connected to 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can be used for 24 V DC.

Fig. 13-34: Bus termination module

http://www.profibus.com

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286


SIMOCODE pro

13-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


Commissioning and service 14In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Commissioners• Technicians• Maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• General basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro, e.g. from Chapter 1• SIMOCODE ES software.

Commissioning and service

SIMOCODE pro

14-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14.1 General information about commissioning and service

Safety guidelines

Warning

Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burning. Ensure the system and the device are disconnected from voltage before beginning work.

Notice

Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the devices):


Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing:• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired• The motor is switched off.

Device Order No.
















Notes on parameterizing

You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:• With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved

from a basic unit. The memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit will be automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded into the basic unit from the memory module by briefly pressing the Test/Reset button.

• With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the PC cable.

• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable should be connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.

Commissioning options

There are two commissioning options:

1. Normal case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and still has the factory settings:When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "Bus" LED flashes green when a DPmaster is connected.

2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:– The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.– The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether

the parameters (e.g. the set current) apply to the new application. Change these accordingly, if necessary.


SIMOCODE pro

14-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14.2 Commissioning

14.2.1 Sequence

Please observe the information in the previous Chapter "General information about commissioning and service" on Page 14-2.

To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:

Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit

Fig. 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit

Step Description

1 Switch on the supply voltage. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash green:• "Device" (lights up)• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).Continue with step 2.Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display.You will find further information in Chapter 14.2.3 "Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel". Try to rectify the fault.

2 If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information about this in Chapter "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on Page 14-5.

3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization e.g. with a PC via SIMOCODE ES software.For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below).

Notice

For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C), only use the front system interface!


PC cable,Order No. 3UF7940-0AA00-0



14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Note

This setting cannot be carried out if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe


Step Description

1 Set desired valid address on the DIP switch.The switches are numbered.For example address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.

2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.

3 Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

4 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open Online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.Confirm with OK.

5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Load to Switchgear. The address is set.


SIMOCODE pro

14-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel

The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

faults

Device Device status

Green Device is ready for operation

—

Green –flickering

Internal fault Send back the basic unit

Yellow Memory module or addressing plug recognized, Test/Reset buttons control the memory module or addressing plug

—

Yellow –flashing

Memory module/addressing plug read in; factory settings configured (duration: 3s)

—

Yellow –flickering

Memory module programmed (duration: 3s)

—

Red Parameterization incorrect (also Gen. Fault on)

Parameterize again and switch the control voltage off and on again

Basic unit defective (also Gen. Fault on)

Replace basic unit!

Red –flashing

Memory module,addressing plug,expansion modules defective (also Gen. Fault on - flashing)

Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion modules

Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage is connected/switched on

Bus Bus status

Off Bus not connected or bus fault

Connect the bus or check bus parameters

Green –flashing

Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device

—

Green Communication with PLC/PCS

—

Gen. Fault

Fault status

Red Fault pending; reset has been saved

Rectify fault, e.g. overload

Red –flashing

Fault pending; reset has not been saved

Rectify fault, e.g. overload

Off No fault —



14.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or

DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules" or system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY"


SIMOCODE pro

14-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14.3 Service

14.3.1 Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance so that e.g. production losses due to plant downtimes are avoided. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are always kept in perfect working order.

Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data that can be read out, for example with SIMOCODE ES under Target System > Service Data/Statistical Data. For example, via "Motor Operating Hours" and "Number of Starts", you can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.

Fig. 14-2: Reading out statistical data



14.3.2 Securing and saving parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module

Note

This function will not be available if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module

Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file

Note


Proceed as follows:

Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file

Step Description

1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET" button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Open the menu Target System > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded into the main memory from the basic unit.

4 Click on the menu Switchgear > Save copy as .... The parameters are saved from the main memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.


SIMOCODE pro

14-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit

Note


Proceed as follows:

Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit

Notice

If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.

Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit

Step Description

1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST/RESET" button. The parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file will be transferred to the main memory.

4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters will be saved into the basic unit from the main memory.



14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components

Safety guidelines

Warning

The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules.

Notice

Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.

Notice

It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the components!

Replacing a basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit

Step Description

1 Save the parameters. See Chapter "Securing and saving parameters" on Page 14-9.

2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit.

3 If necessary, pull the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable out of the system interface.

4 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.

5 Demount the basic unit.

6 Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.

7 Mount the new basic unit.

8 Plug in the wired removable terminals.

9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.

10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.

11 Save the parameters into the basic unit. See Chapter "Securing and saving parameters" on Page 14-9.

12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.



SIMOCODE pro

14-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-10: Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Replacing a DM-F

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-11: Replacing a DM-F

Step Description




4 Demount the expansion module or the decoupling module.

5 Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion or decoupling module.

6 Mount the new expansion module or decoupling module.





Step Description

1 First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for the basic unit and the DM-F.



4 Demount the DM-F.

5 Remove the removable terminals of the new DM-F.

6 Mount the new DM-F.



9 Only DM-F PROFIsafe:Set the DIP switch setting for the PROFIsafe address according to the configuration in the F-controller (see "Configuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and integrating it into the failsafe automation system" in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY").

10 Switch on the supply voltage for the DM-F and the basic unit.

11 Only DM-F Local:Configure the DM-F Local correctly (see chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local" in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY")




Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Proceed as follows:

Table 14-12: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Fig. 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules

Step Description


2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.

3 Pull out the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below (Current/voltage measuring modules only).

4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.

5 Replace the module (see Chapter 13.2.3 "Current measuring modules" and Chapter 13.2.4 "Current/voltage measuring modules").

6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the through-hole openings.

7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring modules only).




Upper terminals

Lower terminals


SIMOCODE pro

14-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

14.3.4 Resetting the factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.

Resetting the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit

Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):

Table 14-13: Resetting factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit

Notice

If any one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to normal operation.

Notice

This function is always active, independent of the "Test/Reset - Button blocked" parameter.

Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/programming device via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.

Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):

Table 14-14: Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Step Description

1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2 Press the Test/Reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.

3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED lights up yellow.

4 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.

5 Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.

6 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.

7 Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.

9 Factory settings are reset.

Step Description

1 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open Online.

2 In the menu, select Target System > Command > Factory Settings.

3 Confirm with "Yes".

4 Factory settings are reset.



14.4 Error buffer/reading out error protocol

Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a timestamp.• Error/Fault:

The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the incoming error (rising edge) is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.

• Power - On:If the most recent entry is "Power - On", this is not logged multiple times. Instead, the error number is used as a power on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be deleted by frequent on/off operations.

Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Example:

Fig. 14-4: Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software

SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer, in which the 21 most recent errors/faults, "Power - On" events" are recorded with a timestamp. Timestamps are based upon the operating hours of the device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the amount of time that the device is supplied with control supply voltage.


SIMOCODE pro

14-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Example:

The most recent "Power - On" event was logged at a device operating time of 17 days, 21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power - On", the device was operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min. The "No. of Starts >" fault was logged at a device operating time of 18 days, 22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24 h 46 min after the most recent "Power - On".

When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:• Time• Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"– Number:

Line 1: 200 or 202Line 2: 201 or 203

– Text:Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 -> 1" or DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 -> 1"Line 2: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 -> 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 -> 0".

The current DIP switch position of the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe is displayed under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event"

See also Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".

14.5 Event buffer

In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event buffer

Note:From firmware version 3.0, the event buffer will be supported with the following content from basic unit 2:Entry 1 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"Entry 2 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"

See also Chapter B.7 "Data record 73 - Event memory".


Alarms, faults and system events 15In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Commissioners• Maintenance and service personnel.• Configurators• PLC programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro• Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software• Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.

Alarms, faults and system events

SIMOCODE pro

15-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Event

(alphabetical)

Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg

ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)

Analog module open circuit

The analog value measuring circuit is open.

Check the transducer and the measuring circuit.

Reset 64

Antivalence Only for positioner 5 control function: The change-over contacts of the limit switch do not issue an antivalent signal.

Limit switch defect, limit switch open circuit

Tripped

Configuration fault

The configured device configuration does not match the existing configuration.

• Please check whether all configured components are present.

• Check the actual configuration using "Configuration".

Rectify the fault; reset

Tripped 3

DM-F feedback circuit

DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe has detected a fault in the feedback circuit (when the enabling circuit is being switched on, the feedback circuit must be closed.);The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the front of the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe flashes red

• Check the wiring of the feedback circuit

• Check the contact blocks in the feedback circuit.

Rectify fault so that the feedback circuit is closed.

Tripped

DM-F safety-oriented tripping

The DM-F has tripped the enabling circuit for safety reasons.

The motor can only be switched on again after the DM-F module enabling circuits have been closed.

Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto-reset is not active.

Tripped

DM-F - Test requirement

The DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafeenabling circuits have not been opened and closed again within the configured time period.

The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are switched.Carry out a function test.

Please adopt the measures intended for this case.

DM-F wiring DM-F module wiring fault (short-circuit to ground in the sensor circuit/feedback circuit);The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the front of the DM-F Local is lit red.

• Check the wiring of the sensor circuit/feedback circuit

• Rectify the fault.

Reset Tripped

DM-FL - Configuration deviation

The effective configuration of the DM-F Local does not correspond to the parameterized set configuration.

Check whether the effective configuration of the DM-F Local corresponds to the parameterized set configuration. Correct the effective configuration by changing the DIP switch settings or adjusting the set configuration by means of parameterization if required.

Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events



DM-FL - Configuration mode

The DM-F Local is in "Configuration mode";The "DEVICE" LED on the front of the DM-F Local is lit yellow.

Complete the configuration (see system manual "Failsafe Digital Module SIMOCODEpro Safety", Chapter 7.4)

DM-FL - Cross circuit

DM-F Local sensor circuit cross circuit.The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the front of the DM-F Local is lit red.

• Check the wiring of both sensor circuits for cross circuiting

• Rectify the fault.

Reset Tripped

DM-FL - Simultaneity

The DM-F Local has detected a discrepancy fault in the two-channel sensor circuit.

Please check the contact blocks in the sensor circuit.

Rectify the fault by opening or closing the sensor inputs

Tripped

DM-FL waiting for start-up test

The DM-F Local is in the "Waiting for start-up test" state.

Carry out the start-up test by actuating the sensor in the sensor circuit.

DM-FP F PRM error

The specified PROFIsafe profile parameters are erroneous or the specifiedPROFIsafe address does not correspond to the configuration.

Please check the PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe parameters of SIMOCODE pro, which were set on the DP Master system.

Double 0 Both torque switches have activated simultaneously. The motor feeder has been turned off.

• Open circuit torque switch.

• Torque switch is defective.

Tripped 13

Double 1 Both limit switches have activated simultaneously.

Limit switch is defective. Tripped 14

End position Except positioner 5 control function: The state of the limit switch has changed without a command (positioner has left the end position without a command)

"OPEN/CLOSED" counter command.

Tripped 15

Execution ON command

The motor feeder could not be turned on after an ON command is issued.

• Main circuit is interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker)

• The motor contactor or contactor control is defective

• Parameter execution time is too short.

Reset or OFF command/counter-command

Tripped

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)

Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

15-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Execution STOP command

The motor feeder could not be turned off after a STOP command was issued.

• The contactor contact is welded

• Parameter execution time is too short

• The "open" end position has not been reached during the parameterized runtime (only for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve" control functions).

Rectify the fault;reset

Tripped 9

External earth fault

External earth-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing.

Please check the motor connection cable for damage.

Reset Tripped 29

External fault1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function.

Check the motor feeder. Tripped 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61

Feedback (FB) OFF

The current flow in the motor feeder has been interrupted without the motor feeder being turned off.

• The main circuit has been interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker, main switch).

• The motor contactor or contactor control is defective

Reset or OFF command

Tripped 11

Feedback (FB) ON

Current is flowing in the motor feeder without the motor feeder being switched on

• Contactor contacts have been manually activated

• Contactor has not been switched on via SIMOCODE

Rectify the fault;Reset or OFF command

Tripped 10

Hardware fault The SIMOCODE pro basic unit hardware is defective.

Please replace the basic unit.See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".

Rectify the fault

Tripped 0


Internal earth-fault monitoring response. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing.

Please check the motor connection cable for damage.

Reset Tripped 28

Just one start possible

The start after the next one should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Module fault At least one SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for use.

• The connecting cable is defective or has not been plugged in correctly.

• Module is defective.Please replace the module.For this, seeChapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".


Tripped 1

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)




Module supply voltage is not present

Supply voltage on the DM-F Local is too low or not present.

• The terminals are not wired properly

• Module is defective.Please replace the module.For this, seeChapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".


Tripped

Motor operating hours >

The configured limit value for the motor operating hours has been exceeded.

Please adopt the maintenance measures intended for the feeder.

Motor stop time >

The configured limit value for motor stop time monitoring has been exceeded.

Please adopt the maintenance measures intended for the feeder. If possible, switch on the feeder.

No start possible The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has been attained. The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Reset Tripped

Operational protection OFF (OPO)

An "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" signal is pending.A switched-on motor feeder has been switched off.Switching on is not possible while the OPO signal is pending.

Reset Tripped; for positioners: QE1 or QE2 switched on until end position is reached - depending upon configuration

19

Overload The motor feeder has been overloaded.

Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor.The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start.

Reset, auto-reset

Tripped

Overload and unbalance

The motor feeder has been asymmetrically overloaded.Possible causes:• Phase failure• Fault in the motor windings.

Check the motor feeder and the motor.The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start.

Reset orauto-reset

Tripped 25,26,27

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)



SIMOCODE pro

15-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state

It is not possible to change at least one parameter in the current operating state

Many parameters can only be changed if the motor feeder is switched off and is not in the "Remote" operating mode.For an overview of parameters that can always be changed,see: Chapter "Data formats and data records" on Page B-1.

Parameter is incorrect ("Event" category)

There is an error in the parameter data transmitted to the device.Errors in the parameter data can occur, for example, if device parameterization was not carried out with SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM.

Check the parameter data (data records 130 - 133) that has been transmitted to the device for the correct content.

4

Parameter is incorrect ("General fault" category)

The parameter data is incorrect. The designation of the faulty parameter can be found via the number (byte No.) in the system manual, Chapter A "Tables".


Tripped

Permissible number of starts exceeded

The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded. The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Reset Tripped 52

Phase unbalance The limit value for phase unbalance has been exceeded. Phase unbalance can cause an overload.Possible causes:• Phase failure• Fault in the motor windings.

Check the motor feeder and the motor.

Reset Tripped

Power failure (UVO)

The power failure lasted longer than the set power failure time.

Rectify the fault;Reset or OFF command

Tripped 18

Pre-warning overload(I > 115%)

The motor feeder is in overload operation.If this condition continues to persist, the motor feeder will trip within a short period of time due to overload.

Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor.

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)




Required function is not supported

At least one parameterized function is not supported by the version of the basic unit.

Activate only the functions that are supported by the version of the basic unit.For example, SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the version *E01* do not support voltage measurement, the temperature module or the analog module.

Stalled positioner

The torque switch has activated before or without the respective limit switch.

• The positioner may be blocked.

• Acknowledge the fault by releasing with the"OPEN/CLOSED" counter command.

• Please check the positioner application and the limit switches

"OPEN/CLOSED" counter command.

Tripped 12

Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for stalled rotor protection.Possible cause: The motor is blocked.

Please check the application that is being driven by the motor.

Reset Tripped 48

Start-up parameter block active

The start-up parameter block prevents adoption of SIMOCODE pro parameters that can be saved in the DP Master.The block must be set when:• SIMOCODE ES

or• SIMATIC PDMis used for parameterizing.The block may not be set if:• SIMOCODE pro C/V is

integrated in STEP7 via the SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)or

• SIMOCODE pro C has been parameterized via GSD.

Status - Cooling down period active

The motor feeder has been switched off due to overload.

The motor can only be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired.

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)


Notice

The parameter block is not activein the case of devices that are stset to the factory settings or devices that have been reset to the factory settings!


SIMOCODE pro

15-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Status - DM-F enabling circuit

Shows the status of the enabling circuit:• closed

or• tripped

Status - Emergency start executed

The thermal memory has been deleted with the function "Emergency start".

The motor can be switched on again immediately after an overload trip.

Status - Test position (TPF)

The motor feeder is in the test position (TPF).The main current circuit has been interrupted and "cold starting" of the feeder can be carried out.

17

Temperature module - Warning level exceeded

The temperature warning level has been exceeded.

Check the temperature measuring station.

35

Temperature module out of range

Temperature sensor is delivering impermissible values.

Check the temperature sensor.

Reset Tripped 37

Temperature module sensor fault

Either a short circuit or an open circuit has occurred in the temperature sensor circuit.

Check the temperature sensor and the sensor cable.


Tripped 36

Test position feedback (TPF)

Current is flowing in the motor feeder although the motor feeder is in the test position (TPF).

The main circuit is not interrupted in test operation.

Reset or OFF command

Tripped

Test trip The motor feeder has been checked and switched off by a test trip.

Reset Tripped 65

Thermistor open circuit

An open circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.

Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor.


Tripped 33

Thermistor short circuit

A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable.

Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor.


Tripped 32

Thermistor trip level

Thermistor protection response. The temperature of the motor is too high.

Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor.The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has reached the switch-back point of the thermistor.

Reset, auto-reset

Tripped 31

Trip antivalence The limit switches are not reporting any antivalent signals.

• Limit switch open circuit

• Please check the positioner application and the limit switches

Counter command "OPEN/CLOSED"

Tripped 16

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)




Trip - Bus PROFIBUS DP communication has been interrupted or is interrupted

Check the PROFIBUS connection (plugs, cables, etc.)

Reset, auto-reset

Tripped 5

Trip end position Positioner/solenoid valve has left the end position without a command being issued. The motor feeder has been switched off.

Acknowledge the fault by releasing with the counter command "OPEN/CLOSED".

Reset; counter command

Tripped

Trip - PLC/PCS The PLC controlling the feeder was or is in the STOP state.

Please check the operating state of the PLC.

Reset, auto-reset

Tripped 6

Trip temporary components (e.g. memory module)

One of the following components is defective:• Addressing plug• Memory module• PC cable.

Please replace the defective components.For this, seeChapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".


Tripped 2

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< undershot

The measured value at the analog input has undershot the warning level.

Check the measuring station.

47

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot

The measured value at the analog input has overshot the warning level.

Check the measuring station.

46

Warning level cos phi <

The power factor cos phi has undershot the warning level.Possible cause: The motor is being operated without a load.


44

Warning level I> overshot

The maximum current has overshot the warning level.


40

Warning level I< undershot

The maximum current has undershot the warning level.


41

Warning level P> overshot

The active power of the motor has overshot the warning level.


42

Warning level P< undershot

The active power of the motor has undershot the warning level.


43

Warning level U< undershot

The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the warning level.Possible causes:• Undervoltage in the network• Fuse has tripped.

Check the motor feeder. 45

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)



SIMOCODE pro

15-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

*) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer"

Wrong password SIMOCODE pro parameters are protected by a password. An attempt has been made to change the parameters without entering the password.

Please use the correct password for changing the parameters.If you do not know the password, new parameters can only be entered after the factory settings have been restored.For a description of factory settings, please refer to Chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the factory settings".

Event

(alphabetical)


ement/fault

rectification

Contactor

control

Error

no.*)


SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-1

Tables A In this chapter

In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working with SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and

status information for the control functions

Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status information for control functions

Des

igna

tion

/co

ntro

l fun

ctio

nCo

ntro

l sta

tion

Cont

acto

r con

trol

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<(O

N<<

)Q

LE<

(ON

<)Q

LA(O

FF)

QLE

>(O

N>)

QLE

>>(O

N>>

)

Stat

us in

form

atio

n

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dire

ct s

tarte

r 1),2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLe

ft-

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ON puls

e-

OFF

puls

e-

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

tast

arte

r 2)

--

OFF

ON-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

tare

vers

ing

star

ter 2

)Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-St

arco

ntac

tor

Delta

cont

acto

rRi

ght

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

Dah

land

er 2

)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dah

land

erre

vers

ing

star

ter 2

)Le

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

fast

Righ

tsl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

Left

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g st

arte

r 2)

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Fast

Slow

--

--

-OF

FSl

owFa

st

Pole

cha

ngin

gre

vers

ing

star

ter 2

)Le

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

fast

Righ

tsl

ow-

Left

slow

Left

fas t

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Sole

noid

val

ve 2

)-

-CL

OSED

OPEN

-OP

EN-

--

--

-CL

OSED

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 1 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 2 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 3 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 4 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Posi

tione

r 5 2

)-

CLOS

EDST

OPOP

EN-

OPEN

CLOS

ED-

--

-CL

OSED

STOP

OPEN

-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON ne

twor

kco

ntac

tor

-Re

set

ON com

man

d-

--

OFF

ON-

Soft

star

ter w

ithre

vers

ing

cont

acto

r 2)

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-Ri

ght

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

Rese

tON co

mm

and

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

Tables


A.2 Abbreviations and specifications

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

Abbreviation Meaning

BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)

IM Current measuring module

UM Current/voltage measuring module

DM1 Digital module 1


DM-FL Failsafe digital module DM-F Local

DM-FP Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe

OP Operator panel

OPD Operator panel with display

AM Analog module

EM Earth-fault module

TM Temperature module

Th Thermistor

GF General fault, control function

Cyclic Cyclic

Acyclic Acyclic

F Fault

M Status information

W Warning

Table A-2: Abbreviations

Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Fig. A-1: Table specifications

Event - PRM error number (bytes):If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here.

Fig. A-2: Example for parameter group

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]

Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Is BU1 BU2

Entry relevant for basic unit and basic unit 2

Example

Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with "0"

Parameters can be changed while running.

Byte.Bit Designation

(PRM group)

0.0 Reserved

4.0 Device configuration (12) Parameter group 12

. . .

. . .

Tables


A.3 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write these back.

No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected BU1 BU2

1 Fixed level‚ 0 BU1 BU2

2 Fixed level‚ 1 BU1 BU2

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Basic unit (BU) BU Test/Reset button BU1 BU2

9 BU Input 1 BU1 BU2




13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1

17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1







24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL

25 DM-FL sensor channel 2 Y22 DM-FL

26 Reserved

27 Reserved

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Operator panel OP/OPD OP Test/Reset button OP OPD

33 OP Button 1 OP OPD




37 Reserved

Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital

Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

38 Reserved

39 Reserved

40 DPV1/RS-232 interface(acyclic data)

Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2

41 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2















56 PLC/PCS interface PLC [DPV0](cyclic data)

Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2

57 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2















72 Enabled control command Enabled control command - ON <<

Dependent on the control function

73 Enabled control command - ON <

74 Enabled control command - OFF

75 Enabled control command - ON >

76 Enabled control command - ON >>

77 Reserved

78 Reserved

79 Reserved


Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (Cont.)

Tables


80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1


81 Contactor control 2 QE2




85 Reserved

86 Reserved

87 Reserved

88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON <<)


89 Display - QLE< (ON <)

90 Display - QLA (OFF)

91 Display - QLE> (ON >)

92 Display - QLE>> (ON >>)

93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1 BU2

94 Reserved

95 Reserved

96 Status information - General Status - General fault BU1 BU2

97 Status - General warning BU1 BU2

98 Status - Device BU1 BU2

99 Status - Bus BU1 BU2

100 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2

101 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM

102 Reserved

103 Reserved

104 Status information - Receive Status - ON <<


105 Status - ON <

106 Status - OFF

107 Status - ON >

108 Status - ON >>

109 Status - Start active BU1 BU2

110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and positioners

111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta,Dahlander,Pole changing starter

112 Status - Runs in open direction


113 Status - Runs in close direction

114 Status - FC

115 Status - FO

116 Status - TC

117 Status - TO

118 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2

119 Status - OPO BU2

120 Status - Remote mode BU1 BU2



Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM

122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM

123 Status - Pause time active IM UM

124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device test active BU1 BU2

125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM

126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM

127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F

128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM

129 Event - Unbalance IM UM

130 Event - Overload IM UM

131 Event - Overload + phase failure IM UM

132 Event - Internal earth fault IM UM

133 Event - External earth fault EM

134 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM

135 Event - Thermistor overload Th

136 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th

137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th

138 Event - TM warning T> TM

139 Event - TM Trip T> TM

140 Event - TM sensor fault TM

141 Event - TM out of range TM

142 Reserved

143 Reserved

144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM

145 Event - Warning I< IM UM

146 Event - Warning P> UM

147 Event - Warning P< UM

148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM

149 Event - Warning U< UM

150 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM

151 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM

152 Event - Trip I> IM UM

153 Event - Trip I< IM UM

154 Event - Trip P> UM

155 Event - Trip P< UM

156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM

157 Event - Trip U< UM

158 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM

159 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM

160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM

161 Reserved

162 Reserved

163 Event - No start possible BU1 BU2

164 Event - No. of starts > BU1 BU2



Tables


165 Event - Just one start possible BU1 BU2

166 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2

167 Event - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2

168 Event - Limit 1 BU2




172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU1 BU2

173 Event - External fault 2 BU1 BU2



176 Event - External fault 5 BU2

177 Event - External fault 6 BU2

178 Reserved

179 Reserved

180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM

181 Event - DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-F

182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F

183 Reserved

184 Events - Time stamp function Event - Timestamping function active + OK BU2

185 Reserved

186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL

187 Event - PROFIsafe active DM-FP

188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing BU1 BU2

189 Reserved

190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F

191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL

192 Trip - General Trip - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2

193 Trip - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM) BU1 BU2

194 Trip - Temporary components (e.g. memory module)

BU1 BU2

195 Trip - Configuration fault BU1 BU2

196 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2

197 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2

198 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2

199 Reserved

200 Trip - Controlling Trip - Execution Time ON

Not for overload relays201 Trip - Execution time OFF

202 Trip - FB ON

203 Trip - FB OFF

204 Trip - Stalled positioner Positioner

205 Trip - Double 0 Solenoid valve/positioner

206 Trip - Double 1 Solenoid valve/positioner

207 Trip - End position Solenoid valve/positioner



Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

208 Trip - Antivalence Positioner

209 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1 BU2

210 Trip - UVO fault BU2

211 Trip - OPO fault BU2

212 Reserved

213 Reserved

214 Reserved

215 Reserved

216 Freely-programmable elements Truth Table 1 3I/1O output BU1 BU2

217 Truth Table 2 3I/1O output BU1 BU2

218 Truth Table 3 3I/1O output BU1 BU2

219 Truth Table 4 3I/1O output BU2





224 Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2

225 Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2

226 Reserved

227 Reserved

228 Reserved

229 Reserved

230 Reserved

231 Reserved

232 Timer 1 output BU1 BU2

233 Timer 2 output BU1 BU2

234 Timer 3 output BU2

235 Timer 4 output BU2

236 Counter 1 output BU1 BU2

237 Counter 2 output BU1 BU2

238 Counter 3 output BU2

239 Counter 4 output BU2

240 Signal Conditioner 1 output BU1 BU2

241 Signal Conditioner 2 output BU1 BU2

242 Signal Conditioner 3 output BU2

243 Signal Conditioner 4 output BU2

244 Non-volatile Element 1 output BU1 BU2

245 Non-volatile Element 2 output BU1 BU2

246 Non-volatile Element 3 output BU2

247 Non-volatile Element 4 output BU2

248 Flashing 1 output BU1 BU2



251 Flickering 1 output BU1 BU2



Tables




254 Reserved

255 Reserved



Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

A.4 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write these back.All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:• The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.

No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected BU1 BU2

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms BU1 BU2

5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms BU1 BU2

6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms BU2

7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms BU2

8 Counter 1 - Actual value BU1 BU2

9 Counter 2 - Actual value BU1 BU2

10 Counter 3 - Actual value BU2

11 Counter 4 - Actual value BU2

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM

17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM



20 Phase unbalance 1 % IM UM

21 Reserved

22 Reserved

23 Reserved

24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM



27 Cos phi 1% UM

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Thermal motor model 2 % IM UM

33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM

34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog

Tables


1) S7 format: 0/4 mA=020 mA=27648

35 Last trip current 1 % / Is IM UM

36 TM - Max. temperature 1K TM

37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM



40 Permissible starts - Actual value BU1 BU2

41 Motor stop time 1h BU1 BU2

42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F

43 Reserved

44 AM - Input 1 See 1) AM

45 AM - Input 2 See 1) AM

46 Reserved

47 Reserved

48 Acyclic Receive - Analog value BU1 BU2

49 Cyclic Receive - Analog value BU2

50 Reserved

51 Reserved

52 Motor operating hours - H word

1s

BU1 BU2

53 Motor operating hours - L word BU1 BU2

54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU1 BU2

55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU1 BU2

56 Device operating hours - H word BU1 BU2

57 Device operating hours - L word BU1 BU2

58 Number of starts - H word BU1 BU2

59 Number of starts - L word BU1 BU2

60 Int. number of starts right - H word BU1 BU2

61 Int. number of starts right - L word BU1 BU2

62 Int. number of starts left - H word BU1 BU2

63 Int. number of starts left - L word BU1 BU2

64 Reserved

.. Reserved

69 Reserved

70 Active power P - H word1W

BU2

71 Active power P - L word BU2

72 Apparent power S - H word1VA

BU2

73 Apparent power S - L word BU2

75 Reserved

.. Reserved

255 Reserved

No. Designation Unit Information

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (Cont.)

Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

A.5 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed messages of the slave diagnostics for status information and the process alarm. This information is also contained in data record 92.

Byte.Bit Status information Information

0.0 Trip - Controlling Trip - Execution ON command BU1 BU2

0.1 Trip - Execution STOP command BU1 BU2

0.2 Trip - FB ON BU1 BU2

0.3 Trip - FB OFF BU1 BU2

0.4 Trip - Stalled positioner BU1 BU2

0.5 Trip - Double 0 BU1 BU2

0.6 Trip - Double 1 BU1 BU2

0.7 Trip - End position BU1 BU2

1.0 Trip - Antivalence BU1 BU2

1.1 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault BU1 BU2

1.2 Trip - UVO fault BU2

1.3 Trip - OPO fault BU2

1.4 Reserved

2.0 Reserved

2.1 Trip - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM

2.2 Trip - Overload IM UM

2.3 Trip - Overload + phase failure IM UM

2.4 Trip - Int. earth fault IM UM

2.5 Trip - Ext. earth fault EM

2.6 Reserved

2.7 Trip - Thermistor overload Th

3.0 Trip - Thermistor short circuit Th

3.1 Trip - Thermistor open circuit Th

3.2 Reserved

3.3 Trip - TM tripping T> TM

3.4 Trip - TM sensor fault TM

3.5 Trip - TM out of range TM

3.6 Reserved

4.0 Trips - Level monitoring

Trip - Trip I> IM UM

4.1 Trip - Trip I< IM UM

4.2 Trip - Trip P> UM

4.3 Trip - Trip P< UM

4.4 Trip - Trip cos phi< UM

4.5 Trip - Trip U< UM

4.6 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM

4.7 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM

5.0 Trip - Stalled rotor IM UM

5.1 Reserved

Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

Tables


5.4 Trip - Number of starts > BU1 BU2

5.5 Reserved

6.0 Trips - Miscellaneous

Trip - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2

6.1 Trip - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2



6.4 Trip - Ext. fault 5 BU2

6.5 Trip - Ext. fault 6 BU2

6.6 Reserved

6.7 Reserved

7.0 Trip - Analog module open circuit AM

7.1 Trip - Test trip BU1 BU2

7.2 DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-FL DM-FP

7.3 Trip - DM-F wiring DM-FL DM-FP

7.4 Trip - DM-F cross circuit DM-FL

8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM

8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM

8.2 Warning - Overload IM UM

8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM

8.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM UM

8.5 Warning - External earth fault EM

8.6 Reserved

8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th

9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th

9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th

9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM

9.3 Reserved

9.4 Warning - M sensor fault TM

9.5 Warning - TM out of range TM

9.6 Reserved

10.0 Warnings - Level monitoring

Warning - Warning I> IM UM

10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM

10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM

10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM

10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM

10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM

10.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM

10.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM

11.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM

11.1 Reserved

11.3 Warning - No start possible BU1 BU2

11.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1 BU2

11.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU1 BU2

11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2


Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)

Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2

12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2

12.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2



12.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2

12.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2

12.6 Reserved

12.7 Reserved

13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2

13.1 Warning - DM-F safety-oriented tripping

13.2 Warning - Test requirement DM-FL DM-FP

13.3 Reserved

13.4 Reserved

13.5 Reserved

13.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-FL DM-FP

13.7 Warning - DM-FL DM-FL

14.0 Reserved

14.1 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM

14.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM

14.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM

14.4 Reserved

14.5 Reserved

14.6 Status information - Receive Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2

14.7 Reserved

15.0 Events -Parameterization

Event - Start-up parameter block active BU1 BU2

15.1 Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state

BU1 BU2

15.2 Event - Device does not support the required functions

BU1 BU2

15.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU1 BU2

15.4 Event - Wrong password BU1 BU2

15.5 Event - Password protection active BU1 BU2

15.6 Event - Factory settings BU1 BU2

15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1 BU2

17.0 Event - DM-FL - Configuration mode DM-FL

17.1 Event - DM FL - Configuration deviation DM-FL

17.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test DM-FL

17.3 Event - DM FP F PRM error DM-FP

17.4 Reserved


Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-1

Data formats and data records BIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Thorough knowledge of writing and reading data records• Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Data formats and data records

SIMOCODE pro

B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Data records - overview

Table B-1: Data records - overview

Data record No. Description Read/write

1 S7 system diagnostics Read

63 Analog value recording Read

67 Process image of the outputs Read

69 Process image of the inputs Read

72 Error buffer Read

73 Event memory Read

92 Device diagnostics(faults, warnings, status information)

Read

94 Measured values Read

95 Service/statistical data Read/write

130 Basic device parameters 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

131 Basic device parameters 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

132 Extended device parameters 1 (BU2) Read/write

133 Extended device parameters 2 (BU2) Read/write

139 Marking Read/write

160 Communication parameters Read/write

165 Identification Read/write

202 Acyclic receive Read/write

203 Acyclic send Read

224 Password protection Write



B.1 Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data records.

B.1.1 Writing/reading data records

Access to data records via slot and index

• Slot: Access via slot 1• Index: Data record number

Writing/reading data records with STEP 7

You can access the data records from the user program.• Writing data records:

S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58S7 master: By calling SFC 58

• Reading data records:S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59S7 master: By calling SFC 59"

Further information

You will find further information on the SFBs: • In the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"

reference manual• In the STEP7 online help.

Byte arrangements

When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

Fig. B-1: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

Byte 0

Byte 1

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High word

Low word

Data type

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte arrangement

Byte

Word

Double word (D-word)


SIMOCODE pro

B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.1.2 Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:


BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)

IM Current measuring module

UM Current/voltage measuring module



DM-FL Failsafe digital module DM-F Local

DM-FP Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe

OP Operator panel

OPD Operator panel with display

AM Analog module

EM Earth-fault module

TM Temperature module

Th Thermistor

CF Control function

Cyclic Cyclic

Acycl. Acyclic

F Fault

M Status information

W Warning

Table B-2: Abbreviations



B.1.3 Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Fig. B-2: Specifications

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]

Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Is BU1 BU2

Entry relevant for basic unit and basic unit 2

Example

Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with "0"

Parameters can be changed while running.


SIMOCODE pro

B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics

Byte

Bit

DR0 DR1 Designation Type No error Error Information

0.0 X X Module fault/OK Bit 0 1

0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0

0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1

0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1

0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0

0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0

0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0

0.7 X X Wrong parameters on module Bit 0 0

1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3

1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1

1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0

1.6 X X Substitute diagnostic alarm Bit 0 0

1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0

2.0 X X Application module wrong/missing

Bit 0 0

2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0

2.2 X X Operating status (0=RUN, 1=STOP)

Bit 0 0

2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0

2.4 X X Supply voltage within modulefailed

Bit 0 0

2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0

2.6 X X Total backup power failed Bit 0 0


3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM/UM) Bit 0 0

3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0

3.2 X X EPROM error Bit 0 0

3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0

3.4 X X ADC/DAC error Bit 0 0

3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0

3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0


4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D

5.0 X Length of the channel specificdiagnostics

Byte 0x20 0x20

6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01

7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per channel)

Byte 0x00 0x01

8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0

8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0

8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0

8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0

Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics



ByteBit

DR0 DR1 Designation Type No error Error Information

8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0

8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0

8.6 X Open circuit Bit 0 0

8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0

9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0

9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Error F9







10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Error F16

10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0

10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0


10.4 X Earth fault Bit 0 0

10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0

10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0

10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0

11.0 X Actuator trip Bit 0 0

11.1 X Safety-oriented tripping Bit 0 0

11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0

11.3 X Non-specific error Bit 0 0





12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0

Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

Table B-4: Data record 63 - Analog value recording

The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.You will find all the available analog values with their units in Chapter A.4 "Socket assignment table - analog".

B.4 Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0 BU2

2.0 Channel No. Byte 1 BU2

3.0 Analog value record currently running Bit 0, 1 BU2

3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1 BU2

3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0

4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2


...


124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0

Byte.Bit Designation Default

(also see parameters)

Type Information

0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON< Bit

BU1 BU2

0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Bit

0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON> Bit

0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit

0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit

0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit

0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit

0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit









2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU2

Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs



B.5 Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs

Byte.Bit Designation Default(also see parameters)

Type Information

0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON < Bit

BU1 BU2

0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - OFF Bit

0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON > Bit

0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit

0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit

0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit

0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit

0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit

1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit








2.0 PLC/PCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word

4.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word BU2



Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs


SIMOCODE pro

B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Table B-7: Data record 72 - Error buffer

Time stamp

The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).

Type/error number

If the type has the value 71, the entry contains an error: Refer to the error numbers for detailed information. You will find the meaning in the "Error number" column of "Data record 92 - Diagnostics" in Chapter B.8 "Data record 92 - Device diagnostics".If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - On". In this case, the error number contains the number of power on operations, reduced by 1 (0 = 1x power on, ...).

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0

1

Time stamp D-word BU1 BU2

4.0 Type Byte BU1 BU2

5.0 Error number Byte BU1 BU2

6.0

2




...

120.0

21






B.7 Data record 73 - Event memory

Table B-8: Data record 73 - Event memory

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0

1

Time stamp D-word BU2

4.0 Type Byte BU2

5.0 Information Byte BU2

8.0

2

Time stamp D-word BU2

12.0 Type Byte BU2

13.0 Information Byte BU2


SIMOCODE pro

B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP

Diagn.*)Error No.

***)

0.0 Reserved

1.0 Status information - General

Status - General fault BU1 BU2

1.1 Status - General warning BU1 BU2

1.2 Status - Device BU1 BU2

1.3 Status - Bus BU1 BU2

1.4 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2

1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM

1.6 Reserved

2.0 Status information - Receive

Status - ON <<


2.1 Status - ON <

2.2 Status - OFF

2.3 Status - ON >

2.4 Status - ON >>

2.5 Status - Start active BU1 BU2

2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and positioners

2.7 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta, Dahlander, pole-changing starters

3.0 Status - Runs in open direction


3.1 Status - Runs in close direction

3.2 Status - FC

3.3 Status - FO

3.4 Status - TC

3.5 Status - TO

3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2 M

3.7 Status - OPO BU2

4.0 Status - Remote mode BU1 BU2

4.1 Status information - Protection

Status - Emergency start executed IM UM M

4.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM M

4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM

4.4 Status information - Miscellaneous

Status - Device test active BU1 BU2

4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM

4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM

4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F

Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics



5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM

5.2 Event - Overload IM UM

5.3 Event - Overload + phase failure IM UM

5.4 Event - Internal earth fault IM UM

5.5 Event - External earth fault EM

5.6 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM

5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th

6.0 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th

6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th

6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM

6.3 Event - TM Trip T> TM

6.4 Event - TM sensor fault TM

6.5 Event - TM out of range TM

6.6 Reserved

7.0 Events - Level monitoring

Event - Warning I> IM UM

7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM

7.2 Event - Warning P> UM

7.3 Event - Warning P< UM

7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM

7.5 Event - Warning U< UM

7.6 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM

7.7 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM

8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM

8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM

8.2 Event - Trip P> UM

8.3 Event - Trip P< UM

8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM

8.5 Event - Trip U< UM

8.6 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM

8.7 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM

9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM

9.1 Reserved

9.3 Event - No start possible BU1 BU2

9.4 Event - No. of starts > BU1 BU2

9.5 Event - Just one start possible BU1 BU2

9.6 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2

9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2

10.0 Event - Limit 1 BU2



Diagn.*)Error No.

***)

Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



10.4 Events -Miscellaneous

Event - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2

10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2



11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5 BU2

11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6 BU2

11.2 Reserved

11.3 Reserved

11.4 Event - Analog module open circuit AM

11.5 Event - DM-F safety-oriented tripping

DM-F

11.6 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F

11.7 Reserved

12.0 Events - Time stamp function

Event - Timestamping function active + ok

BU2

12.1 Reserved

12.2 Events - Miscellaneous

Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL

12.3 Event - DM-F PROFIsafe active DM-FP

12.4 Events - System interface

Event - Configured operator panel missing

BU1 BU2

12.5 Event - Module not supported BU1 BU2

12.6 Event - No module voltage BU2

13.0 Events - Memory module

Event - Memory module read in BU1 BU2

13.1 Event - Memory module programmed

BU1 BU2

13.2 Event - Memory module erased BU1 BU2

13.3 Reserved

13.7 Event - Addressing plug

Event - Addressing plug read in BU1 BU2

14.0 Events - Parameterization

Event - Start-up parameter block active

BU1 BU2 M

14.1 Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state

BU1 BU2 M

14.2 Event - Device does not support the required functions

BU1 BU2 M

14.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU1 BU2 M

14.4 Event - Wrong password BU1 BU2 M

14.5 Event - Password protection active BU1 BU2


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)




14.6 Event - Factory settings BU1 BU2

14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1 BU2

15.0 Event - PRM error number (bytes) **)

BU1 BU2

16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode DM-FL

16.1 Event - DM-FL configuration deviation

DM-FL

16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test

DM-FL

16.3 Event - DM FP PRM error DM-FP

16.4 Reserved

17.0 Warnings - Protection

Warning - Overload operation IM UM W

17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM W

17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM W

17.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM W

17.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM UM W

17.5 Warning - External earth fault EM W

17.6 Reserved

17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W

18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th W

18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th W

18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM W

18.3 Reserved

18.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM W

18.5 Warning - TM out of range TM W

18.6 Reserved

19.0 Warnings - Level monitoring

Warning - Warning I> IM UM W

19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM W

19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W

19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W

19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM W

19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W

19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM W

19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM W

20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM W

20.1 Reserved

20.3 Warning - No start possible BU1 BU2 W

20.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1 BU2 W

20.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU1 BU2 W

20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2 W

20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2 W


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)



SIMOCODE pro

B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

21.0 Warnings -Miscellaneous

Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2 W

21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2 W



21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2 W

21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2 W

21.6 Reserved

21.7 Reserved

22.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit

AM W

22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-oriented tripping

DM-F W

22.2 Warning - DM-F test requirement DM-F W

22.3 Reserved

22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F W

22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL W

23.0 Trips -General

Trip - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2 F9 0

23.1 Trip - Module fault(e.g. IM, UM, DM module)

BU1 BU2 F9 1

23.2 Trip - Temporary components (e.g. memory module)

BU1 BU2 F9 2

23.3 Trip - Configuration fault BU1 BU2 F16 3

23.4 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2 F16 4

23.5 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2 5

23.6 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2 6

23.7 Reserved

24.0 Trips -Receive

Trip - Runtime ON CF = positioner F 8

24.1 Trip - Execution STOP command CF = positioner F 9

24.2 Trip - FB ON CF = positioner F 10

24.3 Trip - FB OFF CF = Positioner F 11

24.4 Trip - Stalled positioner CF = positioner F 12

24.5 Trip - Double 0 CF = positioner F 13

24.6 Trip - Double 1 CF = positioner F 14

24.7 Trip - End position CF = positioner F 15

25.0 Trip - Antivalence CF = positioner F 16

25.1 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault BU1 BU2 F 17

25.2 Trip - UVO fault BU2 F 18

25.3 Trip - OPO fault BU2 F 19

25.4 Reserved

26.0 Reserved


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)




26.1 Trip - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM F 25

26.2 Trip - Overload IM UM F 26

26.3 Trip - Overload + phase failure IM UM F 27

26.4 Trip - Int. earth fault IM UM F 28

26.5 Trip - Ext. earth fault EM F 29

26.6 Reserved

26.7 Trip - Thermistor overload Th F 31

27.0 Trip - Thermistor short circuit Th F 32

27.1 Trip - Thermistor open circuit Th F 33

27.2 Reserved

27.3 Trip - TM trip T> TM F 35

27.4 Trip - TM sensor fault TM F 36

27.5 Trip - TM out of range TM F 37

27.6 Reserved

28.0 Trips - Level monitoring

Trip - Trip I> IM UM F 40

28.1 Trip - Trip I< IM UM F 41

28.2 Trip - Trip P> UM F 42

28.3 Trip - Trip P< UM F 43

28.4 Trip - Trip cos phi< UM F 44

28.5 Trip - Trip U< UM F 45

28.6 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM F 46

28.7 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM F 47

29.0 Trip - Stalled rotor IM UM F 48

29.1 Reserved

29.4 Trip - Number of starts > BU1 BU2 F 52

29.5 Reserved

30.0 Trips -Miscellaneous

Trip - External fault 1 BU1 BU2 F 56

30.1 Trip - External fault 2 BU1 BU2 F 57



30.4 Trip - External fault 5 BU2 F 60

30.5 Trip - External fault 6 BU2 F 61

30.6 Reserved

30.7 Reserved

31.0 Trip - Analog module open circuit AM F 64

31.1 Trip - Test trip BU1 BU2 F 65

31.2 Trip - DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-F F

31.3 Trip - DM-F wiring DM-FL F

31.4 Trip - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL F

31.5 Reserved


Diagn.*)Error No.

***)



SIMOCODE pro

B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

*) The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available in the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:• F: Fault• M: Status information• W: Warning• F9, F16:Error types

See also Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics".

**) Event - PRM error number (bytes):If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the parameter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.

Fig. B-3: Example for parameter group

***) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".

Byte.Bit Designation

(PRM group)

0.0 Reserved

4.0 Device configuration(see above)(12) Parameter group 12

. .

.



B.9 Data record 94 - Measured values

1) S7 format:0/4 mA = 020 mA = 27648

2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":Value always refers to symm. trip level,representation in 2% increments in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254%),bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).

3) Representation in Kelvin.

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Informa-tion

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]

4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 .. 255 See 2) IM UM

5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 1 % IM UM

6.0 Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % UM


12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Is IM UM

14.0 Current IL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Is IM UM



20.0 Last trip current Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Is IM UM

22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM

24.0 Cooling down period Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM

26.0 Voltage UL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM



32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 32767

See 1)

AM

34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 32767 AM

36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 .. 32767 AM

38.0 AM - Input 3 Word 0 .. 32767 AM

40.0 TM - Max. temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM

42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM




52.0 Active power P D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W UM

56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM


Table B-10: Data record 94 - Measured values


SIMOCODE pro

B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.

Additional abbreviations

r/w: value can be written/changedr: value can only be read

1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Informa-

tion

0.0 Coordination Byte[4] BU1 BU24.0 Permissible starts - Actual value Byte 0 .. 255 r1) BU1 BU25.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 .. 255 1 week r BU26.0 Reserved Byte[2]8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU210.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1 BU212.0 Number of internal overload trips Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU214.0 Motor stop time Word 0 .. 65535 1 h r/w BU1 BU216.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU218.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU220.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU222.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU224.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU226.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU228.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU230.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU232.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 .. 65535 r BU234.0 Calculation module 2 - Output Word 0 .. 65535 r BU236.0 Reserved Byte[4] 040.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r/w BU1 BU244.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1 BU248.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1 BU252.0 Number of starts D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU1 BU256.0 Internal number of starts right D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU260.0 Internal number of starts left D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU264.0 Energy consumed D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM68.0 Reserved Byte[8]

Table B-11: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data



B.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion


4.0 Device configuration (12) Byte[8] BU1 BU2

4.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU19 = BU2

BU1 BU2BU2

5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1 BU2

5.1 Reserved Bit[7]

6.0 Operator panel (OP or OPD) Bit 0, 1 BU1 BU2

6.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.3 Earth-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module1 = monostable2 = bistable

BU2

6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2

7.0 Reserved Bit[8]

8.0 Current measuring module (IM/UM)

Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement1 = 0.3 A - 3 A2 = 2.4 A - 25 A3 = 10 A - 100 A4 = 20 A - 200 A5 = 63 A - 630 A

BU1 BU2

8.7 Voltage measuring module (UM)

Bit 0, 1 BU2

9.0 Reserved

10.0 Control function (CF) 0x000x100x110x120x200x21

0x300x31

0x400x41

0x500x600x610x620x630x640x700x71

0x00 = Overload0x10 = Direct starter0x11 = Reversing starter0x12 = Linked device0x20 = Star-delta starter0x21 = Star-deltareversing starter0x30 = Dahlander0x31 = Dahlander reversing starter0x40 = Pole-changing starter0x41 = Pole-changing reversing starter0x50 = Solenoid valve0x60 = Positioner 10x61 = Positioner 20x62 = Positioner 30x63 = Positioner 40x64 = Positioner 50x70 = Soft starter0x71 = Soft starter with reversing contactor

BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU2BU2

BU2BU2

BU2BU2

BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2

11.0 Reserved Bit[8]

Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1


SIMOCODE pro

B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.0 Bit parameters (16)

12.0 No configuration fault due to OP

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

12.1 Start-up parameter block active

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

12.2 Test/Reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Auto BU1 BU2

12.4 Reserved Bit 0

12.5 Reserved Bit 0

12.6 Reserved Bit 0

12.7 Reserved Bit 0

13.0 Diagnostics for process events Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

13.1 Diagnostics for process warnings

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.2 Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.3 Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.4 Reserved Bit 0

13.5 Reserved Bit 0

13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.7 PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

14.0 Overload protection - Type of load

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase IM UM

14.1 Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic IM UM

14.2 Reserved Bit 0

14.3 Saving change-over command Bit 0, 1 0

14.4 Non-maintained command mode

Bit 0, 1 0

14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2

14.6 Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor, 1 = Resistive load BU1 BU2

14.7 Reserved Bit 0

15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2

15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2



15.4 External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always, 1 = Only motor ON BU1 BU2

15.5 External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2



Byte

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion

Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 (Cont.)



16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (20)

16.0 Thermistor - Overload response

Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3

0 = Deactivated1 = Signaling2 = Warning3 = Tripping

Th

16.2 Thermistor - Response to sensor error

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 Th

16.4 Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0

16.6 Motor protection - Overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3

17.0 Motor protection - Overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2

17.2 Motor protection - Unbalance response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2

17.4 Trip response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.0 Trip response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.4 Stalled rotor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0


19.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Response at overshoot

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2

19.2 Monitoring the number of starts - Response at pre-warning

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

19.4 Motor operating hours monitoring - Response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

19.6 Motor stop time monitoring - Response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

20.0 Ext. fault 1 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1 BU2





21.2 Basic unit - Delay inputs Bit[2] 0 - 3 1 Offset 6 ms BU1 BU2

21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay1 = Closing delay with memory2 = With opening delay3 = With fleeting closing

BU1 BU2

21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2

22.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting1 = Inverting2 = Edge rising with memory3 = Edge falling with memory

BU1 BU2

22.2 Signal conditioner 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2

22.4 Non-volatile element 1 - Type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2

22.6 Non-volatile element 2 - Type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2

23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1 BU2



Byte

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


24.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (24)

24.0 External fault 1 - Reset also by

Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel resetBit[1] = Auto-resetBit[2] = Remote resetBit[3] = OFF command reset

BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2

26.0 Limit monitor - Hysteresis for limit monitors

Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 BU1 BU2




28.0 Byte parameters (28)

28.0 Internal earth fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

29.0 Overload protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35, 40

10 BU1BU2

30.0 Motor protection - Delay with overload operation

Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

31.0 Motor protection - Unbalancelevel

Byte 0 .. 100 40 IM/UM

32.0 Unbalance protection - Delay with unbalance

Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 0

34.0 FB time Byte 0 .. 255 5 0 = Deactivated

35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM

36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM

37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM

38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM

39.0 Stalled rotor level Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM

40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM

45.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Permissible starts

Byte 1 .. 255 1 BU1BU2

46.0 Reserved Byte 0


48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU1 BU2




Byte

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion




1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor

52.0 Word parameters (32)

52.0 Motor protection - Cooling down period

Word 600 .. 65535 3000 IM/UM

54.0 Motor protection - Pause time Word 0 .. 65535 0 0 = Deactivated IM/UM

56.0 Execution time Word 0 .. 65535 10 0 = Deactivated

58.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Time range for starts

Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

60.0 Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time

Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

62.0 Stop time level > Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

70.0 Counter 2 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1BU2

72.0 Reserved Word 0

74.0 Reserved Word 0

76.0 D-word parameters (36)

76.0 Enabled commands Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0..0B

80.0 Motor protection - Set current Is1

D-word 1) 30 IM/UM

84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 BU1BU2

88.0 Reserved D-word 0

Byte

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug )

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2



7.0 Reserved Byte 0

8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP OPD




12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP




16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: Status - ON<

BU1 BU2

17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 106 Default: Status - OFF

BU1 BU2

18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 107 Default: Status - ON>

BU1 BU2

19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: Event - Overload operation

BU1 BU2

20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 110 Default: Status - Interlocking time active

BU1 BU2

21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 .. 255 120 Default: Status - Remote mode

BU1 BU2

22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 .. 255 96 Default: Status - General fault

BU1 BU2

23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 .. 255 97 Default: Status - General warning

BU1 BU2

24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2








32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Table B-13: Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2

















48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

49.0 Motor protection - Emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4

IM UM



52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5

BU1 BU2

53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: Fixed level value "1"

BU1 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent on the control function

55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0

57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 56 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0

58.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 57 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1

59.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 58 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2

60.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0

61.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0

63.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0

64.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

65.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0

66.0 Control function - ON < Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: General control station ON <

67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: General control station OFF

68.0 Control function - ON > Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: General control station ON >

69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: Status - Motor current flowing

70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2




74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2




78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3

BU1 BU2

80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6

BU1 BU2

82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2




Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion





88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2










98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

108.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

109.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

110.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

111.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2



119.0 Flickering 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2



122.0 Analog parameters (44)

122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: Max. current I_max

BU1 BU2


Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.13 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]4.0 Bit parameters (17)4.0 3UF50 - Compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

4.1 3UF50 operating mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0, 1 = DPV1

BU2

4.2 Reserved Bit 0

4.3 Reserved Bit 0

4.4 Reserved Bit 0

4.5 Reserved Bit 0

4.6 Reserved Bit 0

4.7 Reserved Bit 0

5.0 Reserved Bit 0

5.1 Reserved Bit 0

5.2 Reserved Bit 0

5.3 Reserved Bit 0

5.4 Analog module - Measuring rangeInput

Bit 0, 1 00 = 0..20 mA1 = 4-20 mA

AM

5.5 Analog module - Measuring range Output

Bit 0, 1 0 AM

5.6 Reserved Bit 0

5.7 Reserved Bit 0

6.0 Overshooting/undershooting limit 1 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" (Overshooting)1 = "<" (Undershooting)

BU2

6.1 Overshooting/undershooting limit 2 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2



6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No, 1 = Yes BU2

6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO Contact, 1 = NC Contact

BU2

6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED, 1 = OPEN

BU2

6.7 Star-delta - Transformer mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta1 = In supply cable

7.0 External fault 5 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO Contact1 = NC Contact

BU2

7.1 External fault 6 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

7.2 Reserved Bit 0

7.3 Reserved Bit 0

7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always1= Motor ON

BU2

7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1



7.6 Reserved Bit 0

7.7 Reserved Bit 0

8.0 Calculation module 2 - Operating mode

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word1= D-word

BU2

8.1 Reserved Bit 0

8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No1 = Yes

DM-F

8.3 DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping reset

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual,1 = Auto

DM-F

8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

8.5 Reserved Bit 0

8.6 Reserved Bit 0

8.7 Reserved Bit 0

9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable parameters comparable with the module configuration

DM-FL

9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL







10.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (21)10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2



10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated, 1 = Activated

BU2

11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (always)1 = ON+ (always, not TPF)2 = RUN (motor ON, not TPF)

UM

11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 UM



Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion

Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON (always)1 = ON+ (always, not TPF)2 = RUN (motor ON, not TPF)3 = RUN+ (motor ON, not TPF,start-up override)

AM

12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM

13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2







14.6 AM - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input1 = 2 inputs2 = 3 inputs

AM

15.0 DM - Delay inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM2

15.2 AM - Response for open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Deactivated1 = Signaling2 = Warning3 = Tripping

AM

15.4 EM - Response to an external earth fault

Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM

15.6 EM - Response to warning of an external earth fault

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM



16.4 DM-F - Test requirement response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated1 = Signaling2 = Warning3 = Tripping

DM-F

16.6 DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 DM-F

17.0 TM - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 TM

17.2 TM - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM

17.4 TM - Response to a sensor fault/out of range

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM

17.6 TM - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor1 = 2 sensors2= 3 sensors

TM

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion




18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Deactivated1 = Signaling2 = Warning3 = Tripping

UM

18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.0 Trip response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.2 Warning response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM

20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM





22.0 Response - External fault 5 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = Deactivated1 = Signaling2 = Warning3 = Tripping

BU2

22.2 Response - External fault 6 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU2



23.0 Analog value recording - Trigger edge

Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = Positive 1 = Negative

BU2








25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay

1 = Closing delay with memory

2 = With opening delay

3 = With fleeting closing

BU2

25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

25.4 Signal conditioner 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting1 =Inverting2 = Edge rising with memory3 = Edge falling with memory

BU2

25.6 Signal conditioner 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2

26.0 Non-volatileelement 3 - Type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2

26.2 Non-volatileelement 4 - Type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2

26.4 Calculation module 2 - Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +, 1 = -,2 = *,3 = /






28.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (25)28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3]

+Bit000B - 100B 000B 000B = PT100,

001B = PT1000 010B = KTY83 011B = KTY84 100B = NTC

TM



Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset,Bit[1] =Auto-reset,Bit[2] =Remote reset,Bit[3] = OFF command reset

BU2


Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU2





32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B 0 BU2

32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B 0 BU2

33.0 Is1 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 .. 15 0 BU2

33.4 Is2 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 .. 15 0 BU2

34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % UM

34.4 Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % AM

35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % BU2


36.0 Byte parameters (29)36.0 Reserved Byte 0

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion




37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 EM

38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 .. 100 1 % 0 UM

39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 .. 100 1 % 0 UM

40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM

41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM

42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 BU2




62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 .. 255 1 K 5 TM

63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 20 Star-delta starter

64.0 UVO time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 BU2

65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 0 BU2

66.0 Analog value recording -Sampling rate

Byte 0 .. 20 5 % 0 BU2

67.0 Calculation module 2 - Denominator 1

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

68.0 Calculation module 2 - Counter 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

69.0 Calculation module 1 - Denominator

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2



73.0 Calculation module 2 - Counter 1 Byte -128 .. 127 0 BU2

74.0 Calculation module 2 - Denominator 2

Byte -128 .. 127 0 BU2

75.0 DM-F - Test requirement level Byte 0 .. 255 1 week 0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



SIMOCODE pro

B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor

76.0 Word parameters (33)

76.0 Analog module - Start value output Word 0 .. 65535 0 Value for 0/4mA

AM

78.0 Analog Module - End value output Word 0 .. 65535 27648 Value for 20 mA

AM

80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM

82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM

84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2




92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2

94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2

96.0 Counter 3 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

98.0 Counter 4 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 .. 65535 10 ms 0

102.0 Analog value recording -Sampling rate

Word 1 .. 50000 1 ms 100 BU2

104.0 Is1 conversion factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

106.0 Is2 conversion factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2

108.0 D-word parameters (37)

108.0 Motor protection - Set current Is2 D-Word 1) 10 mA 0

112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM

128.0 Truth table 9 type 5I/2O - Output 1

Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2

132.0 Truth table 9 type 5I/2O - Output 2

Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2

136.0 Calculation module 2, offset D-word -0x80000000 ..0x7FFFFFFF

0 BU2

140.0 Calculation module 1, counter/offset

D-word 2x-32768..32767

0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion




B.14 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2

(plug )

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion



4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1DM-F

5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1FM-F

6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

8.0 Reserved Byte 0

9.0 Reserved Byte 0



12.0 Timestamping - Input 0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2








20.0 Analog value recording - Trigger input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent on the control function

23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0

24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0

25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0

26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0

27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0

28.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0

29.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP]<>/ <<>>

Byte 0 .. 255 0

30.0 Control function - ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0

31.0 Control function - ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0

32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0

33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0

34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0

35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0

36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters


SIMOCODE pro

B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2



44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


















64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

74.0 Signal conditioner 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

75.0 Signal conditioner 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

76.0 Signal conditioner 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

77.0 Signal conditioner 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion

Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)



81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2







88.0 Analog parameters (45)

88.0 Analog module - Output Byte 0 .. 255 0 AM

89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2




93.0 Calculation module 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

94.0 Analog value recording - Analog input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2



98.0 Calculation module 2 - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

99.0 Calculation module 2 - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

Byte.

Bit

Designation

(PRM group)

Type Range De-

fault

Note Informa-

tion

Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)


SIMOCODE pro

B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.15 Data record 139 - Marking

The diagnostics • External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings and faults)• Limit 1 to 4 (status information) • TM warning T>/tripping T> (status information, warnings and faults) • Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA mA<> (status information, warnings and

faults)

can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, bearing hot, etc. To simplify diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES The texts do not contain any functions.

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information



10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU1 BU2




50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2

60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2



90.0 Marking - Limit 1 Byte[10] BU2

100.0 Marking limit 2 Byte[10] BU2



130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2

140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10] BU2

150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2

170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2


Table B-16: Data record 139 - Marking



B.16 Data Record 160 - Communication parameters

Notice

Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automatically. The current baud rate is read.

B.17 Data record 165 - Identification



BU1 BU24.0 Station address Byte

5.0 Baud rate Byte

6.0 to 9.0 Reserved Byte[6]

10.0 PROFIsafe address (read only) Word BU2

Table B-17: Data record 160 - Communication parameters



BU1 BU2

4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]

36.0 Location designation Byte[22]

58.0 Date Byte[16]


112.0 Comment Byte[54]

Table B-18: Data record 165 - Identification


SIMOCODE pro

B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.18 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive

Description

The acyclic receive data can be used for any functions. The receive data is available as device-internal outputs (sockets).



BU1 BU2

4.0 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Bit
















6.0 Acyclic receive - Analog value Word

Table B-19: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive



B.19 Data record 203 - Acyclic send

Description

Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic send data. The send data is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).


0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit

BU1 BU2
















Table B-20: Data record 203 - Acyclic send


SIMOCODE pro

B-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.20 Data record 224 - Password protection

Description

• Password protection ONIf the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, "Password protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is carried out.

• Password protection OFFIf the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is carried out.

Table B-21: Data record 224 - Password protection



BU1 BU24.0 Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF1 = password protection ON

Bit

4.1 Reserved Bit[31]

8.0 Password Byte[8] BU1 BU2




B.21 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for

predefined control functions

B.21.1 Overload relay

Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, overload relay

*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Not connectedBit 0.2 Not connectedBit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Not connectedBit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Not connectedBit 0.2 Not connectedBit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Not connectedBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.2 Direct starter

Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, direct starter


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ONBit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.21.3 Reversing starter

Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, reversing starter


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.4 Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)


Cyclic receive data


Cyclic send data




B.21.5 Star-delta starter

Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta starter


Cyclic receive data


Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ONBit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.6 Star-delta reversing starter

Table B-27: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta reversing starter


Cyclic receive data


Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.21.7 Dahlander

Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.8 Dahlander reversing starter

Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander reversing starter


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <Bit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status ON <Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.21.9 Pole changing starter

Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing starter


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.10 Pole-changing reversing starter

Table B-31: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing reversing starter


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFFBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <Bit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - ON <<Bit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status ON <Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.21.11 Solenoid valve

Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSEDBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPENBit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Not connectedBit 0.1 Status - OFF (Closed)Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)Bit 0.3 Not connectedBit 0.4 Not connectedBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Not connectedByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected


SIMOCODE pro

B-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.12 Positioner

Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, positioner


Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSEDBit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> STOPBit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPENBit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - InputBit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - InputBit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - InputBit 0.7 Not connectedBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (Closed)Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Status - Positioner runs in open directionBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Status - Positioner runs in close directionBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected



B.21.13 Soft starter

Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter


Cyclic receive data


Cyclic send data



SIMOCODE pro

B-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B.21.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor

Table B-35: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter with reversing contactor


Cyclic receive data


Cyclic send data

Bit 0.0 Status - ON <Bit 0.1 Status - OFFBit 0.2 Status - ON >Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time activeBit 0.5 Status - Remote modeBit 0.6 Status - General faultBit 0.7 Status - General warningBit 1.0 Not connectedBit 1.1 Not connectedBit 1.2 Not connectedBit 1.3 Not connectedBit 1.4 Not connectedBit 1.5 Not connectedBit 1.6 Not connectedBit 1.7 Not connectedByte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_maxByte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connectedByte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-1

Dimension drawings CIn this chapter

This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators• Technicians.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration.

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.1 3UF70 basic unit

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit

Fig. C-1: SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit

C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit

Fig. C-2: SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit

865 36

80 106

125

445

80 106

125

45115

5 654

Dimension drawings


C.2 3UF710 current measuring module

C.2.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A

Fig. C-3: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A

45 405

8438

T1T3

7,5

T2

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

Fig. C-4: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

55 67

9465

14

5

T1

T2

T3

Dimension drawings



3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A


120

95

79 95

5 140

78

25

7

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.2.4 Current measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

Fig. C-6: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

120

9537 17

9

79 95 119

7 47140

5

84

Dimension drawings


C.2.5 Current measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A


145

57

255011

985 12

214

7

125

6148

60,5

60,5

6

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.3 Current/voltage measuring modules

C.3.1 Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)

3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

Fig. C-8: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

711

21

45

855

3166

Dimension drawings



3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A


2023

12

94

5592

605

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03


3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A

Fig. C-10: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A

Dimension drawings


C.3.4 Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

Fig. C-11: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

3

79

140475

12095

119

9579

9 1737Ø

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.3.5 Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)

3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A


145

6

14967

8832125

147

122

Ø112548

Ø11

Dimension drawings


C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels

C.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel

Fig. C-13: 3UF7200 operator panel

C.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display

Fig. C-14: 3UF7210 operator panel with display

298 7

2936

89

96

5560

2933

91,5

96

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module

Fig. C-15: Expansion modules/decoupling module

Versions:

• 3UF73 digital modules• 3UF7500 earth-fault module• 3UF7700 temperature module• 3UF7400 analog module• 3UF715 decoupling module

1155 4

1068

92

22,5

110

15

Dimension drawings


C.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe

Fig. C-16: Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe

Dimension drawings

SIMOCODE pro

C-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

C.7 Accessories

C.7.1 Door adapter

Fig. C-17: Door adapter

C.7.2 Operator panel adapter

Fig. C-18: Operator panel adapter

39

4617

37

Ø3

24,5+0,5

13.5

+0.5

R2ø3.4 ±0.1

37±0,1

IP54

IP54

26.5+0.5

13.5

+0.5

R2ø3.4

37

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-1

Technical data DIn this chapter

This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Configurators.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration• Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.1 Common technical data

Specifications EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, DIN EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508

Test verification documents Certificates:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals.

Permiss. ambient temperature

In operation -25 °C - +60 °C1)

For storage and transport -40 °C - +80 °C 2)

Site altitude above sea level

< 2000 m

< 3000 m Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)

< 4000 m Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)

Degree of protection

(according to IEC 60529)

All components (except current measuring module with bus connection, operator panel and door adapter)

IP20

Current measuring module with bus connection

IP00

Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover

IP54

Shock resistance (sine pulse)

according to DIN EN 60068-2-2715 g / 11 ms

Mounting position Any

Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

EMC stability according to

• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1,SN 27095, NE21

• DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1

Corresponds to Degree of Severity 3

Conducted interference, burst according to IEC 61000-4-4

2 kV (power ports) overvoltage limiter is required

for inductive loads.

1 kV (signal ports)

Conducted interference, high frequency according to IEC 61000-4-6

10 V

Conducted interference, surge according to IEC 61000-4-5

2 kV (line to earth)1 kV (line to line)

Electrostatic discharging,ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV (air discharge)6 kV (contact discharge) 3)

Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3

10 V/m


Technical data


1) For 3UF721 operator panel with display 0 °C - 60 °C2) For 3UF721 operator panel with display -20 °C - 70 °C3) For 3UF721 operator panel with display 4 kVTable D-1: Common technical data

This is a Class A product. This product can

cause radio interference if used in a

domestic environment. Therefore, the user

may need to implement suitable

countermeasures.

Conducted and emittedinterference

DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)(corresponds to Degree of Severity A)

Safe isolation

according to IEC 60947-1

All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double creepage distance and air clearance.

Notice

Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test report, No. 2668.

Connecting cable 3UF73

• Rated voltage• Rated operating voltage

300 V24 V

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.2 Technical data of the basic units

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs

Display

• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED •Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"•Green: "Ready for operation"•Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"•OFF: "No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"•Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/

programming device"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

"TEST/RESET" button •Resetting the device after tripping•Function test (system self-test)•Operation of memory module, addressing plug

System interfaces

• Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system interface for parameterization purposes.

• Bottom For connecting a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module


• Interface design• Connection system

RS4859-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section as per control circuitConnection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or 9-pole SUB-D socket.

Rated control supply voltage Us

(according to DIN EN 61131-2)110 V - 240 V AC/DC 50/60 Hz 24 V DC

Operating range 0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us - 0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us -

Power consumption

• Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA/5 W 5 W

• Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)(including two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2)

10 VA 7 W 7 W

Rated insulation

voltage Ui

300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)

Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp

4 kV

Technical data


Mains buffering time

(longer power failures lead to shutdown of the relay outputs (monostable))

•SIMOCODE pro C -24 V DC110 V - 240 V AC/DC

•SIMOCODE pro V -24 V DC

•SIMOCODE pro V -110 V - 240 V AC/DC

Type 50 ms

Type 50 ms

Type 200 ms

Relay outputs:

• Number 3 monostable relay outputs

• Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable via internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs with common ground, one separate relay output, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or operating state status information.)

• Mandatory short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)

•Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)

•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic(IEC 60947-5-1)

•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)

• Rated uninterrupted current 5 A 6 A at max. +50 °C

• Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A / 230 V ACDC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC

Inputs (binary) 4 inputs with a common ground that are supplied via the device electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-assignable to control functions.

• 24 V DCCable lengths (single)Input characteristic

300 mType 1 according to EN 61131-2

Thermistor motor protection

(PTC binary)

• Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm

• Response value 3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm

• Return value 1.5 kOhm - 1.65 kOhm

• Cable lengths Cross section: 2.5 mm2

1.5 mm2

0.5 mm2

Length: 2 x 250 m2 x 150 m2 x 50 m

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Table D-2: Technical data of the basic units

Connection removable terminal block with screw connection

• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

• Connection cross sections:

- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data


D.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or

current/voltage measuring modules

Mounting

• Set current Is = 0.3 A - 3 A;2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A (3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs

• Set current Is = 20 A - 200 A(3UF7103, 3UF7 113)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw attachment onto the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor

• Set current Is = 63 A - 630 A(3UF7104, 3UF7 114)

Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor

System interface For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module

Main circuit

• Set current Is 3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A

3UF71.1: 2.4 A - 25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A

3UF71.2: 10 A - 100 A

• Rated insulation voltage Ui (at Degree of Pollution 3)

690 V 1)

• Rated operational voltage Ue 690 V

• Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

6 kV 2)

• Rated frequency 50/60 Hz

• Type of current Three-phase current

• Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit required 3)

• Accuracy of current measuring (ranging from 1 times the minimum set current Iu to 8 times the maximum set current Io)

+/- 3 %

Typical measuring range of the voltage measuring• Line-to-line voltage/voltage

between lines (e.g. UL1L2)• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1)

110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the system as measured values)65 V - 400 V

Accuracy• Voltage measuring in the range

230 V - 400 V• Cos phi measurement (in the

nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 - 0.8)

• Apparent power measurement (in the nominal load range)

+/- 3 % (typical)

+/- 5 % (typical)

+/- 5 % (typical)

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

1) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 1000 V2) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 8 kV3) More information can be found at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.7 "Short-

circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V" on Page D-24.

4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19... box terminal.5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section

larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.

6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 and when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal coveris required to maintain phase separation.

Table D-3: Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules

Notes on voltage measuring:Current/voltage measuring modules must be used with a decoupling module for certain network types. See table 1-35 in Chapter 1.7.6 "Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules, SIMOCODE pro V device series.".

Caution

Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may require additional cable protection.

Through-hole opening Diameter

• Set current 0.3 A - 3 A; 2.4 A - 25 A

7.5 mm

• Set current 10 A - 100 A 14.0 mm

• Set current 20 A - 200 A 25.0 mm

Bus connection 4)

• Set current Is 20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A

• Connection screw M8x25 M10x30

• Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm - 24 Nm

• Solid with cable lug 16 mm2 - 95 mm2 4)5) 50 mm2 - 240 mm2 4)6)

• Stranded with cable lug 25 mm2- 120 mm2 4)5) 70 mm2- 240 mm2 4)6)

• AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil

Connection for voltage measurement



- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14



Technical data


D.4 Technical data of the decoupling module

Table D-4: Technical data of the decoupling module

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs.

Display

• Green "READY" LED

System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an expansion module, the right interface is exclusively for connection to a current/voltage measuring module.

Connection cross sections



- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded, with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

D.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules


Display

• Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"

System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module or the operator panel

Control circuit

Rated insulation voltage Ui

300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

4 kV

Relay outputs

• Number• Function

• Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)

• Rated uninterrupted current

• Rated switching capacity

2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on version)Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via internal signal conditioning), relay outputs all with common ground, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or operating state status information).•Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A

(IEC 60947-5-1)•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic

(IEC 60947-5-1)•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)5 A6 A at max. +50 °CAC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V ACDC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC

Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V AC/DC, depending on version), with common ground for measuring process signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated switches, limit switches, ...), freely-assignable to control functions.

• 24 V DCCable lengths (single)Input characteristic

300 mType 2 according to EN 61131-2

• 110 V - 240 V AC/DCCable lengths (single)Input characteristic

200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)—

Technical data


Table D-5: Technical data of the expansion modules

Connection removable terminal block with screw connection




2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.5.2 Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules


Enclosure width 45 mm

System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a cur-rent measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module or the operator panel

Rated control supply

voltage Us (according to DIN EN 61131-2)

AC/DC 110 V - 240 V 50/60 Hz DC 24 V

Operating range •24 V DC: 0.8 up to 1.2 Us•110 V - 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 up to 1.1 Us

Power consumption DM-F Local:•DC 24 V: 3 W•AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 9.5 VA/4.5 WDM-F PROFIsafe:•DC 24 V: 4 W•AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 11,0 VA/5.5 W

Safe isolation according

to IEC 60947-1

Between relay enabling circuits/relay outputsand electronics

Rated insulation

voltage Ui

300 V (at pollution degree 3)

Rated impulse with-

stand voltage Uimp

4 kV

Power loss ride-through

time

•DC 24 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,8xUs•AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,85xUs

typ. 200 ms at 230 V

Relay outputs

• Quantity• Function

2 monostable relay outputs• Common connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner

by a relay enabling circuit• Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions

Electrical service life of

relay outputs

0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)

Relay enabling circuits

•Quantity 2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits

•Function Fail-safe normally open contacts• Prescribed short-circuit

protection for relay enabling circuits/relay outputs

Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate foreach relay enabling circuit

Technical data


Table D-6: Technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

• Rated uninterrupted cur-rent of relay enabling circuits

5 A

•Rated switching capacity of relay enabling circuits

AC-15: 3 A / AC 24 V; 3 A / AC 120 V; 1,5 A / AC 230 VDC-13: 4 A / DC 24 V; 0,55 A / DC 60 V; 0,22 A / DC 125 V; 0,11 A / DC 250 V

•Electrical service life of relay enabling circuits

0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)

•Switching rate of the relay enabling circuits

2000/h

Connection Removable terminal block with screw connection

• Tightening torque Torque: 7 lb.in to 10.3 lb.in0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm

• Connection cross-sec-tions:

- solid 2x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 ... 4 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

- Finely stranded withend sleeve

2x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

LED display

DM-F Local

Color Meaning

"READY" OFF System interface disconnected/supply voltage too low/device defective

Green Device is ready for operation/system interface OK

Flashing green

Device is ready for operation/system interface is inactive or faulty

"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low


Flashing green

Self-test

Yellow Configuration mode

Flashing yellow

Configuration fault

Red Device is defective or interrupted

"OUT" OFF Safety-oriented output inactive

Green Safety-oriented output active

Flashing green

Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition has been fulfilled

"IN" OFF Input inactive

Green Input active

Flashing green

Fault recognized (e.g. cross circuit at the input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)

"GF" OFF No general fault

Red General fault (wiring fault, cross circuit, configuration fault)

Flashing red General fault (enabling circuit fault, simultaneity not fulfilled)

"1" OFF Cross-circuit detection OFF

Yellow Cross-circuit detection ON

Flashing yellow

Configuration mode awaits confirmation

Technical data


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"2" OFF NC contact/NO contact

Yellow NC contact/NC contact

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"3" OFF 2 x 1-channel

Yellow 1 x 2-channel

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"4" OFF Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 ∼ 50 ms

Yellow Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 ∼ 10 ms

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"5" OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start

Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"6" OFF Cascade input 1, automatic start

Yellow Cascade input 1, monitored start

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"7" OFF With start-up testing

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Table D-7: Technical data of the digital module DM-F Loca

Yellow Without start-up testing

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

"8" OFF Automatic starting after power failure

Yellow No automatic starting after power failure

Flashing yellow


Flickering yellow

Configuration fault

DIP switch Setting of the safety functions

SET/RESETbutton •Application of parameters set via DIP switch•Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" on basic unit)

Inputs with safety relay

function

2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)•Supply via terminal T1 or T2 with cross-circuit monitoring or external

supply without cross-circuit monitoring•Functions parameterizable via DIP switch

1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)•For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a

safety-oriented disconnection•Supply via terminal T2 or T3

1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)•For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay•Supply via terminal T2 or T3

1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)•For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply

contactors via seriesconnected auxiliary switch normally-closed contacts

•Supply via terminal T3

Cable length sensor

input and start signal

input (single)

1500 m

Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

Technical data


D.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

LED display

DM-F PROFIsafe

Color Meaning

"READY" OFF System interface disconnected/supply voltage too low/device defective

Green Device is ready for operation/system interface OK

Flashing green

Device is ready for operation/system interface is inactive or faulty

"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low


Red Device is defective or interrupted

"OUT" OFF Safety-oriented output inactive

Green Safety-oriented output active

Flashing green

Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition has been fulfilled

"GF" OFF No general fault

Red General fault (PROFIsafe inactive, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring fault, device defective)

"1" Yellow PROFIsafe address 1










DIP switch Setting of the safety functions

SET/RESET button •Application of parameters set via DIP switch• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" onbasic unit)

Inputs (binary) • 3 inputs 24 V DC (83, 85, 89)• Supply via terminal 84 or external supply• Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring process-

signals (e.g., local control station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), fre-elassignable to control functions

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Table D-8: Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module

Safety-related technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules:

See chapter "Technical Data" in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety".

Input with safety relay function

•1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (91/FBC)•For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply

contactors via series-connected auxiliary switch normally-closed contacts

•Supply via terminal 90/T

Cable length (single) 300 m

Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

Technical data


D.5.5 Technical data of the analog module


Display



Control circuit

Type of connection: 2-wire connection

Inputs:

• Channels 2 (passive)

• Parameterizable measuring ranges

0/4 mA - 20 mA

• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m

• Max. input current(destruction limit)

40 mA

• Accuracy ±1 %

• Input resistance 50 Ohm

• Conversion time 150 ms

• Resolution 12 bit

• Open circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA

• Isolation of the inputs to the device electronics

No

Output:

• Channels 1

• Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA - 20 mA

• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m

• Max. output voltage 30 V DC

• Accuracy ±1 %

• Max. output load 500 Ohm

• Conversion time 25 ms

• Resolution 12 bit

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Table D-9: Technical data of the analog module

D.5.6 Technical data of the earth-fault module

Table D-10: Technical data of the earth-fault module

• Short-circuit proof Yes

• Isolation of the output to the device electronics

No

Connection:




2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14


Display



Control circuit

Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer with rated fault currents IN• IEarth fault < 50 % IN• IEarth fault > 100 % IN

0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A

No trippingTripping

Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms - 500 ms, additionally delayable

Connection:



- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data


D.5.7 Technical data of the temperature module

Table D-11: Technical data of the temperature module


Display



Sensor circuit

Conversion time 500 ms

Type of connection 2 or 3-wire connection

Typical sensor current:

• PT100 1 mA (typical)

• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC 0.2 mA (typical)

Open circuit detection/short-circuit detection/measuring range:

• PT100/PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +500 °C

• KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +175 °C

• KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 °C - +300 °C

• NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C - +160 °C

Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (T20)

<+ 2 K

Deviation due to ambient temperature (as % of measuring range)

0.05 per K deviation from T20

Isolation of the inputs to the device electronics

No

Connection:




2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12


2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.6 Technical data of the operator panels

D.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel

Table D-12: Technical data of the operator panels

Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface cover.

Display

• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: Blocked

• Green:• Flashing green:• Yellow:

• OFF:

"Function test was negative, device is blocked""Ready for operation""No connection to basic unit""Memory module or addressing plug detected""No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light:• Flashing:

"Communication with PLC/PCS""Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light/flashing:

"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals

Buttons

• Test/Reset • Resetting the device after tripping• Function test (system self-test)• Operation of memory module, addressing plug

• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable

System interfaces

• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization purposes

• Rear For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion module

Technical data


D.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display

Table D-13: Technical data of the operator panel with display

Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface cover.

Display

• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED •Red: Blocked

•Green:•Flashing green:•Yellow:

•OFF:

"Function test was negative, device is blocked""Ready for operation""No connection to basic unit""Memory module or addressing plug detected""No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light:•Flashing:

"Communication with PLC/PCS""Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED •Continuous light/flashing:

"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

• 4 green LEDs For freely-assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback on the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT)

Display Graphic display of current measured values, operating and diagnostics data or status information.

Buttons

• Control buttons •Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable

• Arrow keys •Navigation in the display menu

• Softkeys •Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test, reset, operation of memory module and addressing plug

System interfaces

• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization purposes.

• Rear Connection to the basic unit or expansion module

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

D.7 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for

short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

690V

/50

kA69

0V/

100k

A69

0V/

50kA

415V

/50

kA60

0VSt

anda

rd sh

ort-

circu

itBr

itish

Ratin

gsLV

HRC

Type

3NA

Type

3ND

stand

ards

UL lis

ted

DIAZ

EDTy

pe 5

SBaM

Fuse

sFu

ses

Over

load

relay

Con

tact

orC

lass

Over

load

relay

Con

tact

orC

lass

Over

load

relay

Con

tact

or88SB

ES5 epyTDEZOEN

RK5/

CLAS

S L

Settin

g ra

nge

15Se

tting

rang

e30

3540

Settin

g ra

nge

Oper

ating

clas

s gL

(gG)

(Typ

e)(T

ype)

Rate

d op

erat

ing cu

rrent

Is/A

C-3

in A

at(T

ype)

V096/V005

/V004

V096/V005

/V004

V096/V005

/V004

V096/

V005/

V004V096

/V005

/V004

V096/

V005/

V004V096/

V005/

V0041

21

22

2S

ize

S00

Siz

e S

00S

ize

S00

0.3

- 3.0

A3R

T101

53.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

00.

3 - 3

.0A

3RT1

015

3.0

/3.

0/

3.0

3.0

/3.

0/

3.0

3.0

/3.

0/

3.0

0.3

- 3.0

A3R

T101

535

2020

2020

103R

T101

63.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03R

T101

63.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03.

0/

3.0

/3.

03R

T101

635

2020

2020

10S

ize

S0

Siz

e S

0S

ize

S0

2.4

- 25A

3RT1

015

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

2.4

- 25A

3RT1

015

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

7.0

/5.

0/

4.0

2.4

- 25A

3RT1

015

3520

2020

2060

3RT1

016

9.0

/6.

55.

29.

0/

6.5

5.2

9.0

/6.

55.

29.

0/

6.5

5.2

3RT1

016

9.0

/6.

55.

29.

0/

6.5

/5.

28.

5/

6.5

5.2

3RT1

016

3520

2020

2060

3RT1

017

12.0

/9.

0/

6.3

11.0

/9.

0/

6.3

10.0

/9.

0/

6.3

9.5

/9.

0/

6.3

3RT1

017

9.0

/9.

0/

6.3

9.0

/9.

0/

6.3

8.5

/8.

5/

6.3

3RT1

017

3520

2020

2060

3RT1

023

9.0

/6.

5/

5.2

9.0

/6.

5/

5.2

9.0

/6.

5/

5.2

3RT1

023

3RT1

023

6325

2525

2570

3RT1

024

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

3RT1

024

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

12.0

/12

.0/

9.0

3RT1

024

6325

2525

2025

703R

T102

517

.0/

17.0

/13

.017

.0/

17.0

/13

.016

.0/

16.0

/13

.015

.0/

15.0

/13

.03R

T102

514

.0/

14.0

/13

.013

.0/

13.0

/13

.012

.0/

12.0

/12

.03R

T102

563

2525

2520

2570

3RT1

026

25.0

/18

.0/

13.0

18.0

/18

.0/

13.0

16.0

/16

.0/

13.0

15.0

/15

.0/

13.0

3RT1

026

14.0

/14

.0/

13.0

13.0

/13

.0/

13.0

12.0

/12

.0/

12.0

3RT1

026

100

3525

2520

2510

03R

T103

425

.0/

25.0

/20

.025

.0/

25.0

/20

.022

.3/

22.3

/20

.020

.3/

20.3

/20

.33R

T103

419

.1/

19.1

/19

.117

.6/

17.6

/17

.616

.1/

16.1

/16

.13R

T103

412

563

6363

5063

100

3RT1

035

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

3RT1

035

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

23.5

/23

.5/

23.5

3RT1

035

125

6363

6350

6310

0S

ize

S2/

S3

Siz

e S

2/S

3S

ize

S2/

S3

10-1

00A

3RT1

034

32.0

/32

.0/

20.0

25.5

/25

.5/

20.0

22.3

/22

.3/

20.0

20.3

/20

.3/

20.0

10-1

00A

3RT1

034

19.1

/19

.1/

19.1

17.6

/17

.6/

17.6

16.1

/16

.1/

16.1

10-1

00A

3RT1

034

125

6363

6350

6312

53R

T103

540

.0/

40.0

/24

.033

.0/

33.0

/24

.029

.4/

29.4

/24

.028

.0/

28.0

/24

.03R

T103

526

.5/

26.5

/24

.025

.0/

25.0

/24

.023

.5/

23.5

/23

.53R

T103

512

563

6363

5080

150

3RT1

036

50.0

/50

.0/

24.0

38.5

/38

.5/

24.0

32.7

/32

.7/

24.0

29.4

/29

.4/

24.0

3RT1

036

26.5

/26

.5/

24.0

25.0

/25

.0/

24.0

23.5

/23

.5/

23.5

3RT1

036

160

8080

8050

8020

03R

T104

465

.0/

65.0

/47

.056

.0/

56.0

/47

.049

.0/

49.0

/47

.045

.0/

45.0

/45

.03R

T104

441

.7/

41.7

/41

.738

.2/

38.2

/38

.234

.5/

34.5

/34

.53R

T104

420

012

512

512

563

125

250

3RT1

045

80.0

/80

.0/

58.0

61.0

/61

.0/

58.0

53.0

/53

.0/

53.0

47.0

/47

.0/

47.0

3RT1

045

45.0

/45

.0/

45.0

43.0

/43

.0/

43.0

40.0

/40

.0/

40.0

3RT1

045

200

160

160

160

8016

030

03R

T104

695

.0/

95.0

/58

.069

.0/

69.0

/58

.059

.0/

59.0

/58

.053

.0/

53.0

/53

.03R

T104

650

.0/

50.0

/50

.047

.0/

47.0

/47

.044

.0/

44.0

/44

.03R

T104

620

016

016

016

010

016

035

03R

T105

410

0.0

/10

0.0

/10

0.0

93.2

/93

.2/

93.2

81.7

/81

.7/

81.7

74.8

/74

.8/

74.8

3RT1

054

69.0

/69

.0/

69.0

63.0

/63

.0/

63.0

57.0

/57

.0/

57.0

3RT1

054

355

315

315

315

160

250

400

3RT1

055

100.

0/

100.

0/

100.

010

0.0

/10

0.0

/10

0.0

97.5

/97

.5/

97.5

3RT1

055

90.0

/90

.0/

90.0

82.0

/82

.0/

82.0

74.0

/74

.0/

74.0

3RT1

055

355

315

315

315

200

315

400

Siz

e S

6S

ize

S6

Siz

e S

620

-200

A3R

T105

411

5.0

/11

5.0

/11

5.0

93.2

/93

.2/

93.2

81.7

/81

.7/

81.7

74.8

/74

.8/

74.8

20-2

00A

3RT1

054

69.0

/69

.0/

69.0

64.0

/64

.0/

64.0

20-2

00A

3RT1

054

355

315

315

315

160

250

450

3RT1

055

150

/15

0.0

/15

0.0

122

/12

1.5

/12

1.5

107

/10

6.5

/10

6.5

98/

98/

97.5

3RT1

055

90/

90.0

/90

.082

/82

.0/

82.0

74/

74.0

/74

.03R

T105

535

531

531

531

520

031

550

03R

T105

618

5/

185.

0/

170.

015

0/

149.

9/

149.

913

1/

131.

4/

131.

412

0/

120

/12

0.3

3RT1

056

111

/11

1.0

/11

1.0

102

/10

2.0

/10

2.0

93/

93.0

/93

.03R

T105

635

531

531

531

520

031

550

0S

ize

S10

/S12

Siz

e S

10/S

12S

ize

S10

/S12

63-6

30A

3RT1

064

225

/22

5.0

/22

5.0

182

/18

2.3

/18

2.3

160

/15

9.8

/15

9.8

146

/14

6/

146.

363

-630

A3R

T106

413

5.0

/13

5.0

/13

5.0

126

/12

6/

126

63-6

30A

3RT1

064

500

400

400

400

250

400

600

3RT1

065

265

/26

5.0

/26

5.0

215

/21

4.7

/21

4.7

188

/18

8.2

/18

8.2

172

/17

2/

172.

33R

T106

515

9.0

/15

9.0

/15

9.0

146

/14

6/

146

133

/13

3/

133

3RT1

065

500

400

400

400

315

400

700

3RT1

066

300

/30

0.0

/28

0.0

243

/24

3/

243

213

/21

3/

213

195

/19

5/

195

3RT1

066

180.

0/

180.

0/

180.

016

5/

165

/16

515

0/

150

/15

03R

T106

650

040

040

040

031

540

080

03R

T107

540

0/

400.

0/

400.

032

4/

324

/32

428

4/

284

/28

426

0/

260

/26

03R

T107

524

0.0

/24

0.0

/24

0.0

220

/22

0/

220

200

/20

0/

200

3RT1

075

630

500

500

500

400

450

1000

3RT1

076

500

/50

0.0

/45

0.0

405

/40

5/

405

355

/35

5/

355

325

/32

5/

325

3RT1

076

300.

0/

300.

0/

300.

027

5/

275

/27

525

0/

250

/25

03R

T107

663

050

050

050

050

050

012

003R

T126

422

5/

225

/22

522

5/

225

/22

522

5/

225

/22

519

4/

194

/19

43R

T126

417

3.3

/17

3.3

/17

3.3

152

/15

2/

152

131

/13

1/

131

3RT1

264

500

500

500

500

400

450

600

3RT1

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

228

/22

8/

228

3RT1

265

204.

1/

204.

1/

204.

118

0/

180

/18

015

6/

156

/15

63R

T126

550

050

050

050

040

045

070

03R

T126

630

0/

300

/30

030

0/

300

/30

030

0/

300

/30

025

8/

258

/25

83R

T126

623

1/

231

/23

120

4/

204

/20

417

7/

177

/17

73R

T126

650

050

050

050

040

045

080

03R

T127

540

0/

400

/40

040

0/

400

/40

040

0/

400

/40

034

4/

344

/34

43R

T127

531

6/

316

/31

63R

T127

580

080

080

063

080

010

003R

T127

650

0/

500

/50

050

0/

500

/50

050

0/

500

/50

043

0/

430

/43

03R

T127

638

5/

385

/38

534

0/

340

/34

031

6/

316

/31

63R

T127

680

080

080

063

080

012

003T

F68

2)63

0/

630

/63

050

2/

502

/50

244

0/

440

/44

040

8/

408

/40

83T

F68

2)37

6/

376

/37

634

4/

344

/34

431

7/

317

/31

73T

F68

2)80

050

04)

500

4)50

04)

630

500

1600

3TF6

92)

630

/63

0/

630

630

/63

0/

630

572

/57

2/

572

531

/53

1/

531

3TF6

92)

500

/50

0/

500

469

/46

9/

469

438

/43

8/

438

3TF6

92)

800

630

4)63

04)

630

630

1600

Siz

e 14

Siz

e 14

Siz

e 14

0.30

- 3.

0A w

ith3T

F69

2)82

0/

820

/82

066

2/

662

/66

257

2/

572

/57

253

1/

531

/53

10.

30 -

3.0A

with

3TF6

92)

500

/50

0/

500

469

/46

9/

469

438

/43

8/

438

0.30

- 3.

0A w

ith3T

F69

2)80

063

04)

630

4)63

063

016

003U

F186

8-3G

A00

3UF1

868-

3GA0

03U

F186

8-3G

A00

2) C

anno

t be

mou

nted

on

cont

acto

rs

3 ) O

bser

ve o

p era

ting

volta

ge4)

Ensu

re th

at th

e sa

fety

mar

gin b

etwe

en th

e m

axim

um A

C-3

oper

ating

curre

nt a

nd th

e fu

se ra

ting

is su

fficien

t.5)

Ass

ignm

ent a

nd s

hort-

circ

uit d

evic

es a

ccor

ding

to IE

C60

947-

4-1

tiucric trohs a fo tneve eht ni smetsys ro snosrep rehtie regnadne ton ya

m sretrats dna srotcatnoc ,1 tnemngissa fo epyt hti

W.decalper neeb evah strap evitcepser eht ro deriaper neeb evah yeht litnu noitarepo rehtruf rof elbatius eb ton tsu

m dnatiucric trohs a fo tneve eht ni s

metsys ro snosrep rehtie regnadne ton yam sretrats dna srotcatnoc ,2 tne

mngissa fo epyt htiW an

d m

ust b

e su

itable

for f

urth

er o

pera

tion.

The

re is

a d

ange

r of c

onta

ct we

lding

.

Type

of a

ssign

men

t 5)

Fuse

links

3)

5 an

d 10

Rate

d op

erat

ing cu

rrent

Is/A

C-3

in A

at20

25

Technical data


Table D-14: Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 Vfor 3UF7

690V

/10

0kA

690V

/10

0kA

415V

/80

k A60

0V

Sich

erun

gsein

sätze

3)Br

itish

Stan

dard

s

NH D

IAZE

D, N

EOZE

DSi

cher

unge

n

Über

lastre

lais

Sch

ütz

CL

AS

STY

P 3N

A, 5

SB, 5

SETy

p 3N

DBS

88

Eins

tellb

ereic

h5

u.10

1520

2530

3540

Betri

ebsk

lasse

gG

Betri

ebsk

lasse

aM

(Typ

)Be

mes

sung

sbet

riebs

strom

Ie/A

C-3

in A

bei

Zuor

dnun

gsar

t 5)

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

12

12

12

Bau

grö

ße

S00

2)

0.3

- 3.

0Aoh

ne S

chüt

z3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

35A

20A

20A

16A

35A

20A

10A

10A

3RT

2015

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A35

A20

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

3RT

2016

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

3A/

3A3A

35A

20A

20A

16A

35A

20A

3RT

2017

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A35

A20

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

3RT

2018

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A3A

/3A

/3A

3A/

3A/

3A35

A20

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

2.4

- 25

A3R

T20

157,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A7,

0A/

6,0A

/4,

9A35

A20

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

3RT

2016

9,0A

/7,

7A6,

7A9,

0A/

7,7A

6,7A

9,0A

/7,

7A6,

7A9,

0A/

7,7A

/6,

7A9,

0A/

7,7A

/6,

7A8,

5A/

7,7A

/6,

7A8,

0A/

7,7A

/6,

7A35

A20

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

3RT

2017

12,0

A/

9,2A

/6,

7A10

,7A

/9,

2A/

6,7A

10,0

A/

9,2A

/6,

7A9,

5A/

9,2A

/6,

7A9,

0A/

9,0A

/6,

7A8,

5A/

8,5A

/6,

7A8,

0A/

8,0A

/6,

7A50

A25

A20

A16

A35

A20

A

3RT

2018

16,0

A/

12,4

A/

8,9A

13,0

A/

12,4

A/

8,9A

11,5

A/

11,5

A/

8,9A

10,3

A/

10,3

A/

8,9A

9,5A

/9,

5A/

8,9A

8,8A

/8,

8A/

8,8A

8,3A

/8,

3A/

8,3A

50A

25A

25A

20A

50A

25A

Bau

grö

ße

S0

2)

2.4

- 25

Aoh

ne S

chüt

z25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A25

A/

25A

/25

A12

5A50

A50

A25

A12

5A50

A10

0A10

0A

3RT

2024

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

9,0A

63A

25A

32A

20A

63A

25A

3RT

2025

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

13,0

A17

,0A

/17

,0A

/13

,0A

16,0

A/

16,0

A/

13,0

A14

,8A

/14

,8A

/13

,0A

14,0

A/

14,0

A/

13,0

A13

,4A

/13

,4A

/13

,0A

13,0

A/

13,0

A/

13,0

A63

A25

A32

A20

A63

A25

A

3RT

2026

25,0

A/

18,0

A/

13,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/13

,0A

16,0

A/

16,0

A/

13,0

A14

,8A

/14

,8A

/13

,0A

14,0

A/

14,0

A/

13,0

A13

,4A

/13

,4A

/13

,0A

13,0

A/

13,0

A/

13,0

A10

0A35

A50

A20

A10

0A35

A

3RT

2027

25,0

A/

25,0

A/

21,0

A23

,0A

/20

,0A

/20

,0A

20,0

A/

20,0

A/

17,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/15

,0A

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

15,0

A16

,0A

/16

,0A

/15

,0A

15,0

A/

15,0

A/

15,0

A12

5A50

A50

A25

A12

5A50

A

3RT

2028

25,0

A/

25,0

A/

21,0

A23

,0A

/20

,0A

/20

,0A

20,0

A/

20,0

A/

17,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/15

,0A

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

15,0

A16

,0A

/16

,0A

/15

,0A

15,0

A/

15,0

A/

15,0

A12

5A50

A50

A25

A12

5A50

A

10 -

100

Aoh

ne S

chüt

z10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A10

0A/

100A

/10

0A31

5A31

5A31

5A31

5A40

0A40

0A

3RT

2024

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

12,0

A/

63A

25A

32A

20A

63A

25A

3RT

2025

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

13,0

A17

,0A

/17

,0A

/13

,0A

16,0

A/

16,0

A/

13,0

A14

,8A

/14

,8A

/13

,0A

14,0

A/

14,0

A/

13,0

A13

,4A

/13

,4A

/13

,0A

13,0

A/

13,0

A/

13,0

A63

A25

A32

A20

A63

A25

A

3RT

2026

25,0

A/

18,0

A/

13,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/13

,0A

16,0

A/

16,0

A/

13,0

A14

,8A

/14

,8A

/13

,0A

14,0

A/

14,0

A/

13,0

A13

,4A

/13

,4A

/13

,0A

13,0

A/

13,0

A/

13,0

A10

0A35

A50

A20

A10

0A35

A

3RT

2027

32,0

A/

32,0

A/

21,0

A23

,0A

/20

,0A

/20

,0A

20,0

A/

20,0

A/

17,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/15

,0A

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

15,0

A16

,0A

/16

,0A

/15

,0A

15,0

A/

15,0

A/

15,0

A12

5A50

A50

A25

A12

5A50

A

3RT

2028

38,0

A/

32,0

A/

21,0

A23

,0A

/20

,0A

/20

,0A

20,0

A/

20,0

A/

17,0

A18

,0A

/18

,0A

/15

,0A

17,0

A/

17,0

A/

15,0

A16

,0A

/16

,0A

/15

,0A

15,0

A/

15,0

A/

15,0

A12

5A50

A50

A25

A12

5A50

A

2) k

ein

Sch

ütza

nbau

mög

lich

3) B

etrie

bssp

annu

ng b

each

ten

4) B

each

ten

Sie

, daß

der

max

imal

e A

C-3

Bet

riebs

stro

m e

inen

gen

ügen

den

Sic

herh

eits

abst

and

vom

Sic

heru

ngsn

enns

trom

bes

itzt.

5) Z

uord

nung

und

Kur

zsch

luß

einr

icht

unge

n ge

mäß

IEC

6094

7-4-

1B

ei Z

uord

nung

sart

�1�

dar

f das

Sch

ütz

oder

der

Sta

rter

im K

urzs

chlu

ssfa

ll P

erso

nen

und

Anl

age

nich

t gef

ährd

enun

d br

auch

t für

den

wei

tere

n B

etrie

b oh

ne R

epar

atur

und

Tei

leer

neue

rung

nic

ht g

eeig

net z

u se

in.

Bei

Zuo

rdnu

ngsa

rt �

2� d

arf d

as S

chüt

z od

er d

er S

tart

er im

Kur

zsch

luss

fall

Per

sone

n un

d A

nlag

e ni

cht g

efäh

rden

und

mus

s fü

r de

n w

eite

ren

Geb

rauc

h ge

eign

et s

ein.

Die

Gef

ahr

der

Kon

takt

vers

chw

eiß

ung

ist g

egeb

en.

3UF

7102

-1A

A00

-0/

3RB

2906

-2J

G1

Stan

dard

Sh

ort-

Circ

uit-

Ratin

g

High

Sho

rt-Ci

rcuit

-Ra

ting

UL-g

eliste

tete

Sich

erun

gen

RK5/

CLAS

S L

3UF

7101

-1A

A00

-0/

3RB

2906

-2D

G1

3UF

7100

-1A

A00

-0/

3RB

2906

-2B

G1

3UF

7101

-1A

A00

-0/

3RB

2906

-2D

G1

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

The selection tables for fuseless motor feeders can be found in the manuals "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188 and"Configuration Manual SIRIUS Configuration - Selection data for Fuseless Load Feeders"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241.



Technical data


D.8 Typical reaction timesD.8.1 SIMOCODE pro C device series

Table D-15: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro C device series

D.8.2 SIMOCODE pro V 1) device series

1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module + 2 expansion modules

Table D-16: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro V device series

Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs conversion timeExample:You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is set:• SIMOCODE pro C:

Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms• SIMOCODE pro V:

Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms

Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic unit Set delay time

30 ms

10 ms

Thermistor 400 ms

PROFIBUS 30 ms 30 ms

Current measuring 200 ms

Internal earth fault 300 ms - 600 ms +Set delay

Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic unit Set delay time

5 ms

10 ms

Thermistor 400 ms

PROFIBUS 5 ms 5 ms

Current measuring 300 ms

Voltage measurement 300 ms

Active power/cos phi 1000 ms

Internal earth fault 300 ms - 600 ms +Set delay

Earth-fault module/external earth fault

300 ms - 500 ms +Set delay

Digital module (24 V) 15 ms + delay 25 ms

Digital module(110 V - 240 V)

50 ms + delay 25 ms

Analog module 150 ms 25 ms

Temperature module 500 ms

DM-F Local ≤ 75 ms + delay time 30 ms

DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + delay 30 ms

Technical data

SIMOCODE pro

D-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-1

Example circuits EIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find example circuits for the following parameterizable control functions:

– Overload relay– Direct starter– Reversing starter– Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)– Star-delta starter– Star-delta reversing starter– Dahlander– Dahlander reversing starter– Pole-changing starter– Pole-changing reversing starter– Solenoid valve– Positioner– Soft starter– Soft starter with reversing contactor– Direct starter for 1-phase loads

Target groups

This manual is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners• Configurators• Technicians• Electricians• Commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1)• Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.1 General

Aim of the example circuits

The examples should:• Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function

using SIMOCODE pro• Help you modify these examples for your application• Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps

• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit devices and control and signaling devices) (see circuit diagrams)

• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphical editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).

• Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the "Assignment of cyclic receive and send data" tables)

Prerequisites

• Load feeder/motor is present• PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present• The main circuit is already connected• PC/programming device is present• SIMOCODE ES software is installed• The basic unit has the factory settings. More information about how to apply

the factory settings can be found in the "Resetting the factory settings" section of the SIMOCODE pro manual.

Example circuits


E.2 "Overload relay" example circuit

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram

Fig. E-1: "Overload relay" circuit diagram

7

1N

Profibu

s DP

5

6

-X2

-X19

2N

B

PROF

IBUS

7

SPE/PE

B

4

4

-K1

T2 2

B

/.5

A1

2L1

I >

4 3

9

1

-M1

6

N

-T10

1L1

C 1A

-Q1

5

18

-X19

2

T1

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

Gen.f

ault

L1

PE1

T2

T3

2

Basic

Unit

PE

2

6

6

L2 -X1

1

C 1,6A

PE

A1

230V

AC

-F11

1

3

24V

-A10

BU

19

V6

A IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

Test/re

set

L1

2

PE

BUS

I >

U

Mains

conta

ctor

T1

5

L3

Current measurement

8

-F12

1

/.2

2

3

>>

>I

II

20

X9

L3

WL2

Devic

e

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

/.2

1

42

3

A2

-K1

SYS

10

A

3 ACM

15

123

A

SIMOC

ODEp

ro C/V

-X1

3

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

4

CT

5

A2

Example circuits


E.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-2: "Overload relay" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.3 "Direct starter" example circuit

E.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-3: "Direct starter" circuit diagram

13SPE/PE

/.2C 1

,6A

-Q2

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1

B

-M1

1

6

4

14

/.4A1

8

19

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1

-X2

SYS

12

=DOL

3L1

9

3 2

PE

5

-A12

1N

3

A2

230V

AC

PROF

IBUS

L2

2L1

-F12

7

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

65

2N

U

18

SYS

1

10

5

24V

-Q2

C 1A

BU

5

A

A

4

2

PE

T1

3

9

A2

20BU

S

W

I>

SIMOC

ODEp

ro C/V

-A10

A1

1L1

1

4

6

B

4

CT

PE -X1

-S12

3

8

X9

22

L2

T1

21

1

N

V3

3 ACM2

BUS

5

6

-X1

>>

>I

II

T3

-X19

L3

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

T2

T2

/.2

1

PE

-S11

-T10

L1

10

L3

2

I>

2

2

Profibu

s DPA

11

B

2

2

-F11

4

6 7

-X19

1

Gen.f

ault

TEST

/

DEVIC

ERE

SET

GEN.F

AULT

Test/re

setOp

erator

Pane

l

OFF

Basic

Unit

Devic

eON

Current measurement

Motor

conta

ctor

Loca

l On Lo

cal

Off

Example circuits


E.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-4: "Direct starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.4 "Direct starter" example circuit

E.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-5: "Reversing starter" circuit diagram

3

2

ON>

I >

2

CT

6SYS

A

14

-A12

2L1

BUS

Gen.f

ault

-X1

PE

I >

-T10

-F11

9

PROF

IBUS

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

U

5

1

T1

1

C 1,6A

L2

OFF

-F12

4

A2

6

18

-Q3

A2

B

14

X9

-M1

-S12

Profibu

s DP

1

3

5

11

A1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

22

5

1

B

V

PE

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

ON<

3

L3

A1

/.2-A10 T1

L2 N

2

4

-X2

3 ACM

19

7

9

-Q2

PE

5>>

>I

II

W

-Q2

-X19

/.4

2

3

2N

4 10

-Q3

A2

13

L1

-S13

-X1

1

1L1

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

13

T2

/.4

6

21

L3 6

B A

5

1

4

1

A1

SIMOC

ODEp

ro C/V

BUS

RESE

TGE

N.FAU

LTDE

VICE

TEST

/

2

T3

6

8

10

34

4

7

BU

230V

AC

21

/.2

PE

22

Test/re

set

24V

3

8

1

SPE/PE

T2

1N

6

3

20

SYS

-S11

-X19

C 1A

12

A

2

L1

Motor

conta

ctor

Run s

ignal

- righ

t

Motor

conta

ctor

Run s

ingal

- left

Loca

lOf

f

Loca

lRu

n sign

al - r

ight

Loca

lRu

n sign

al - le

ft

Current measurement

Devic

e

Basic

Unit

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Example circuits


E.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-6: "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.5 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example

circuit

E.5.1 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram

Fig. E-7: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram

C1

1

L3

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

I>

/.6

SYS

N

8

C 1,6A

/.6

-X2

A5

X20.2

33

B

D4

-A10

A

M

T3

A

1L1

-Q1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

/.6

C 1A

2L1

D1

-Q1

A3

2

T2

1

A

A2

CT

X20.1

B

2

PE

SYS

X20.5

230V

AC-T1

0

BUS

-A11

2

7

5

-S12

C5

3

Profibu

s DP

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

X9

X1.1

21

24V

L2

1N

22

X1.2

1 L1

1

-F12

SPE/PE

X1.4

-X19

T1

X20.3

X1.3

10

T14

/.6

1

2

14

-X1

PROF

IBUS

L1

BUS

-F11

T25

D3

A1

-Q1

I>

2

6

3

B

-X19

2N

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

II

>

M

>I

>

-Q1

4

C4

-S11

1

BU13

L2

X20.4

L3

6

9

A1D2

2

X1.6/.4

X1.2

/.4

1

-Q1

53

>I>I

>I

M

X20.5

X1.5

X1.1

X20.1

X20.3

/.3

X1.3

/.224

X1.4

X20.2

6

X20.4

Gen.f

ault

Test/re

set

TEST

/

GEN.F

AULT

RESE

T

Circui

t-brea

ker (M

CCB)

on

Circui

t-brea

ker (M

CCB)

off

Check

back

signa

lLS

on

Check

back

signa

lLS

trigg

ered

Local

Contr

olON Lo

cal Co

ntrol

Devic

e

Basic

Unit

OFF

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

eON

Current measurement

Example circuits


E.5.2 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-8: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

E.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

Fig. E-9: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

N

A2

PROF

IBUS

PE

/.2

6

1

M AC

A1

-X2-X1

9

-Q2

-M1

SYS

C510

T2

A

-Q3

A2

1L1

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

U2

-Q4 /.4

OFF

A2

A1

1N

1

-S12

2

PE

B

T1

8

L1

U1

3

D2

-X2

A3

4

-Q2

3

Test/re

set

-F12

C 1A

1

1

22

BUS

T3PE

3-X1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

1

13

A1

L2

A A1

2L3

BUS

RESE

TGE

N.FAU

LTDE

VICE

TEST

/SPE/PE

C2

Gen.f

ault

V1

3X9

2

6

5

L2

51

/.4BU

1

SYS

2

3

B

3

/.26

W2

4

3

A2

-A11

-A10

6

A

2

T2

4

-F11

PE

2

-Q4

-S11

-Q3

*)

5

T1

C3

C4

/.5

4

I > 2

2

5

6

I >

ON

V2

2

1

5

L3

21

L1

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

D4

230V

AC

4

I>

II

>>

9

CT

4

D3

A5

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

C 1,6A

2L1

B

3

5

1

24V

W1

C1

7 A1

2N

D1

6

-X19

14Profibu

s DP

Mains

conta

ctor

Delta

conta

ctor

Star

conta

ctor

Loca

lOn Lo

cal

Off

Current measurement

Basic

Unit

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

e

*) An

elec

tronic

/mec

hanic

al int

erloc

k is r

ecom

mend

ed fo

r Q3/Q

4

Example circuits


E.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

Fig. E-10: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

Fig. E-11: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

N

A2

PROF

IBUS

PE

/.2

6

1

M AC

A1

-X2-X1

9

-Q2

-M1

SYS

C510

T2

A

-Q3

A2

1L1

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

U2

-Q4 /.4

OFF

A2

A1

1N

1

-S12

2

PE

B

T1

8

L1

U1

3

D2-X2

A3

4-Q

2

3

Test/re

set

-F12

C 1A

1

1

22

BUS

T3PE

3-X1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

1

13

A1

L2

A A1

2L3

BUS

RESE

TGE

N.FAU

LTDE

VICE

TEST

/

SPE/PE

C2

Gen.f

ault

V1

3X9

2

6

5

L2

5

-T10

1

/.4BU

1

SYS

2

3

B

3

/.26

W2

4

3

A2

-A11

-A10

6

A

2

T2

4

-F11

PE

2

-Q4

-S11

-Q3

*)

5

T1

C3

C4

/.5

4

I > 2

2

5

6

I >

ON

V2

2

1

5

L3

21

L1

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

D4

230V

AC

4I

>I

I>

>

9

CT

4

D3

A5

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

C 1,6A

2L1

B

3

5

1

24V

W1

C1

7 A1

2N

D1

6

-X19

14Profibu

s DP

Mains

conta

ctor

Delta

conta

ctor

Star

conta

ctor

Loca

lOn Lo

cal

Off

Devic

e

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

Current measurement

*) An

elec

tronic

/mec

hanic

al int

erloc

k is r

ecom

mend

ed fo

r Q3/Q

4

Example circuits


E.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply

cable)

Fig. E-12: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example

E.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-13: "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram

Example circuits


E.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-14: "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

E.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

Fig. E-15: "Dahlander" circuit diagram

1

2N

1

6

22

1L1

A22

V1

D4

T1

5

2L1

U2

3

7

/.4

-F12

PE

4

1

B

-Q2

*)

-M1

-Q2

230V

AC

2

SYS

4

/.4

-X2

A1

-Q3

L1

5

14

X9

N

2

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

BU

1

-A11

1N

D1

A2

6

C5

/.5

EIN>

2

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1

V2

C 1,6A

W1

64

1

M AC PE

C1

13

21

-T10

1

PE

C3

C2

1

W2

A1

3

-X1

D2

6

-S12A

13

SYS3

I>

II

>>

C 1A

/.2

I>

6

4

D3

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

-Q4

3

PE

2

3

-A10

-Q3

-Q4

-S13

2

EIN>>

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

-X19

-S11

A2

3

L2

9

I>

T35

A2

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

4

U1

T2

14

3

5

/.2

2

10

6

L2

5

L1

2

-X2

2

L3

A1

L3

14

A1

C4

T2

8

CT

5

3

SPE/PE

24V

T1-F1

1

A5

A

PROF

IBUS

BA

A3

B

A1

A4A2

-X19

DEVIC

E

TEST

/

GEN.F

AULT

RESE

TGe

n.fau

lt

Profibu

s DP

BUS

Test/re

set

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Star

conta

ctor

Fast

Loca

lFa

st

Loca

l Sl

ow

Loca

l Of

f

Devic

eOF

F

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

C urrent measurement

*) An

elec

tronic

/mec

hanic

al int

erloc

k is r

ecom

mend

ed fo

r Q3/Q

4

Example circuits


E.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-16: "Dahlander" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit

E.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-17: "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

B2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

2

/.6

3

/.7

I>

II

>>

Test

/rese

t

2

-X19

I>

C 1,6A

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

5 V1A1

-M1

D4

Profibu

s DP

U1

L1

/.5

A1

1

/.6

T2

PE

U2

A1

3

-X19

1

M AC

T2

21

6

-S14

-Q22

-X2

B

2

OUT1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

-A12

6

C 1A

D3

1

-A10

3

C5

C3

1

4

-S13

9

L3

3

5

/.5

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

C4

B5

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

BUS

13

A1

5

1L1

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

25

PE

1

1

Gen.

faul

t

8

SYS2

3

W2

6

-Q42

A2

-S15

A2

I>

22

2

B3

4

-Q21

5

-Q41

2L1

6

20

13Ready

4

A2

3

N

A1

T3

/.2

ON>

/.5 -X2

2

-A11

-X1

OFF

-F12

-Q22

230V

AC

ON<

A1

-Q21

-S12

6

B4

5

2

W1

/.2

1N

1

SPE/PE

5

6

A2

SYS

13

PE

3

13

5

-F11

22

5BU

SRE

SET

GEN.F

AULT

DEVIC

E

TEST

/

27

1

4

PE

-Q42

CT

X9

14

43

A2

2

1

T1L2

/.7

2N

4

C1

<>/<<>

>

1

-Q3

V2

14

3

-T10

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

6

D2

SYS

2

L1

-Q3

PE

A

23

-Q41

6

B1

2

24V

21

L2

1

D1

BU

4

26

4

10

C2

14

3 -S11

14

2

T1

SYS1

L3

1

1

A2

2

7

24

A5

A

-X19

PROF

IBUS

BA

A3

B

A1

A4A2

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Righ

t

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Righ

t

Star

conta

ctor

Fast

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Left

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Left

Loca

lOf

f

Loca

lSl

owRi

ght

Loca

lFa

stRi

ght

Loca

lSl

owLe

ft

Loca

lFa

stLe

ft

Digital

Mod

uleBa

sic U

nit

Current measurementOp

erator

Pane

l

Devi

ce

Example circuits


E.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-18: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Fig. E-19: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

Example circuits


E.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-20: "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram

I>

II

>>

B

A5

230V

AC

T1

6

2

C 1A

5

-M1

1

V1

-F12

A2

BUS

PROF

IBUS

9

-X1L2

6

1

X9

U2

/.4

-X2

21

N

5

U1

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1

A

M AC

13

-T10

13

1

C 1,6A

BU

D1

A

1

4

-F11

T2

3

3

A

2

C1

A3

-Q2

PE6

B

L2

10

6 W2

A2

T1

PE

PE

22

3

4

C3

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

2L1

1

3

A1B

SYS

SYS

-S11

2

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

14

L3/.2

I >

W1

L1

2

6

1

A1

-S12

2N

4 -Q3

7

L1 3

4

1

/.4

5

-X2

14

SPE/PE

-Q2

A1

5

-X19

PE-A1

1

C5

A1

-A10

V2

/.2

C4

T2

2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

D2

L3

3

1L1

C2

24V

BUS

D3

1N

Profibu

s DP

-S13

3

4

-Q3

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

-X19

T3

8

D4

CT

2

2

2

A2

5

I >

Test/re

set

TEST

/

GEN.F

AULT

RESE

TGe

n.fau

ltBa

sic Un

itON

>OF

F

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

e

Devic

e

Current measurement

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Loca

l Fa

st

Loca

l Sl

ow

Loca

l Of

f

ON>>

Example circuits


E.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-21: "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit

E.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram

Fig. E-22: "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram

-F11

14

5

21

-F12

PROF

IBUS

7

14

/.5

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

/.5

L3

U1

BUS

RESE

TGE

N.FAU

LTDE

VICE

TEST

/

1

4

-S14

-S12

SIMOC

ODE p

ro V

9

2

25

C4

A1

/.2

3

4

PE

Ready

2 2

D3

ON<

1

SPE/PE

3

14

C 1,6A

-A12

B5

CT

5

-Q21

C5

-Q31

B

OUT1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

-T10

T2

8

A

<>/<<>

>

22

A

1

6

1N

5

-Q22

SIMOC

ODE p

ro V

W1

C3

M AC

T3

Gen.f

ault

26

/.7

B3

V1

6

1

4

22

A1

6

A1

A2

1

N

2

A2

D2

BU

T1

5

SYS2

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1

2

L1

3

5

14

/.2

2

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

13

A1

3

2

3

-Q21

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

5

3

C2

X9

20

4

1

2

W2

PE

SYS

-M1

-Q32

1L1

4

A3

A5

I>

II

>>

10

5

A1

230V

AC

PE6

D4

PE

1

64

-Q31

4

/.7

L2

-X19

27

2

ON>

1-X1

9

Profibu

s DP

Test/re

set

L2

V2

C 1A

A2

-S15

L1

3

-A11

2

A1

13

A2

B2

T2

21

-Q32

B

24

SYS1

I >

-X19

6

/.6

24V

-X1

1

-X2

1

L3

-Q22

B

B4

PE

-S13

6

23

/.5

BUS

T1

A

1

-S11

2L1

2N

A2

I >

SYS

C1

3

U2

13

13

-A10

D1

B1

OFF

-X2

3

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Righ

t

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Righ

t

Mains

conta

ctor

Slow

Left

Mains

conta

ctor

Fast

Left

Loca

lOf

f

Loca

lSl

owRi

ght

Loca

lFa

stRi

ght

Loca

lSl

owLe

ft

Loca

lFa

stLe

ft

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Digital

Mod

ule

Devic

e

Current measurement

Basic

Unit

Example circuits


E.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-23: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Fig. E-24: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

Example circuits


E.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram

Fig. E-25: "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram

9

SYS

CLOS

E

-X1

Test/re

set

2

1

L1

-Y1

C 1,6A

13

-X2

3

C 1A

4

AB

L2

2

14

PROF

IBUS

-Q2

4

14

-A10

2

19

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

-RMA

Profibu

s DP

PE

6

II >

I>

>

3

SYS

8

1

-S12

24V

7

1

BUS

RESE

TGE

N.FAU

LTDE

VICE

TEST

/

PE

CT

B

230V

AC

3

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

1

I >

1

6

-F12

1

20

Gen.f

ault

25

9

SIMOC

ODE p

ro V

1L1

2

1

65

A1

N

2

A2 -Q2

7

6

11

PE

T1

2

/.2

22

A1

13

7

2N 5

-X19

5

-F11

8

A2

3

6

-X19

-X1

-A12

SPE/PE

5

A

-RMZ

OPEN

1

B 12

1

BUS

I >

21

14/.4

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

2

T2

/.2

3

1N

10

X9

4

132L1

2

44

L3

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

N

10

PE

-S11

18A

8

3

Mains

conta

ctor

Loca

lOn Lo

cal

Off

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Clos

e

Feed

back

limit s

witch

Open

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

Devic

e

Example circuits


E.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-26: "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.13 "Positioner" example circuit

E.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

Fig. E-27: "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

Devic

e

Basic

Unit

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Digital

Mod

ule

Current measurementMa

ins co

ntacto

rOp

en

Mains

conta

ctor

Clos

ed

Loca

l St

op

Loca

l Cl

osed

Loca

l Op

en

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Open

CLOS

EOP

ENST

OPTE

ST-/

RESE

T

-A10

SYS1

-X1

T2

2

16

3

13

A20

230V

AC

27

-M1

5

2N

12

A2

21

L3

23

13

1L1

14

4

230V

AC

L3

11

L2

2

B

/.2

9

A1

PROF

IBUS

>>

>I

II

2

2

Profibu

s DP

7

24

-X19

13

6

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

3

8

X9

Test/re

set

24V

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

-X19

2L1

Gen.f

ault

3 ACM

-RMZ

-S11

-Q3

T3

-X1

18

I >1

10

12

1

A2A1

13

1

BUS

-F12

3

-S13

/.4L1

A1

CT

2

26

-Q3

SYS

4

6

2

14

U

4

N

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

1

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

4

-T10

10

BUS

GEN.F

AULT

DEVIC

E

6

1325

20

1

B

-X19

-Q2

6

B

1

-RMA

PE

3

17

/.2

C 1,6A

I >

/.4

-S12

-X2

-F11

7

PE

T1

4

3

T1

/.7

9

22

-Q2

L1

14

W

-A12

8

1N

-Q1

4

22

C 1,6A

6

1

1

15

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

19

2

A

3

T2

A

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

1

14

3

1

A2

6

PE

L2

5

/.4

-A11

14

PE

PE

V5

OUT1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

SPE/PE

21

BU

SYS

5

2

5

SYS2

Ready

Example circuits


E.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram

Fig. E-28: "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



Devic

e

OPEN

Digital

Mod

uleOpera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

Current measurement

Mains

conta

ctor

Open

Mains

conta

ctor

Clos

ed

Loca

l St

op

Loca

l Cl

osed

Loca

l Op

en

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Open

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch

Open

CLOS

EST

OPTE

ST/

RESE

T

4

-RMZ

1L1

L1

L3

10

T2

-RMA

-S13

21

-X2

1

>>

>I

II 5

13

L2

-S12

Profibu

s DP

I >

-DMA

24V

51/N AC

50Hz

230V

11

21

3 ACM

9

1

PE

-X19

25

3BU13

/.7

SYS2

16

3

20

-T10

21

1

Test/re

set

3

X9

3

B

-A12

1

1N

3

-Q3

2

-Q3

27

-Q1

24

-X19

-X1

17

6 U

18

2

C 1,6A

9

2L1

6

B

SYS1

-F12

2N

/.4

13

10

-Q2

PE

L1

19OU

T1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

A

4

22

A1

1T2

A2

A

PE

BUS

W

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

2

-X1

4

22

BUS

GEN.F

AULT

DEVIC

E

21

6

8

I >

B

T1

1

/.4

14

-A11

A

20

2

3

/.2

SYS

-F11

230V

AC

14

PE

2

13

A2

/.2

2

14

7

25

12

6

26

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

PE

SPE/PE

2

3

1

4

T3

A1

6

A1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

22

T1

7

4

5

1

-X19

2

-S11

C 1,6A

8

Gen.f

ault

N

SYS

14

13

22

L3

4

23

CT

1

-Q2

V

-DMZ

PROF

IBUS

1

/.4

-M1

15

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

-A10

6

14

1

5

A2

L2

230V

AC

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

Ready

Example circuits




Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



CLOS

E

Digital

Mod

ule

OPEN

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

e

Current measurement

Basic

Unit

Mains

conta

ctor

Open

Mains

conta

ctor

Clos

ed

Loca

l St

op

Loca

l Cl

osed

Loca

l Op

en

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Open

STOP

TEST

/RE

SET

1

-X19

23

3

5

13

L3

21

SPE/PE

5

-M1N

10

-A11

>>

>I

II

25

W

A2

3

24V

B

1

BUS

21

230V

AC

14

2 3

22

5

L3

PROF

IBUS

9

-X19

63

-A10

20

OUT1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

/.2

4

PE

A

VT3

13

6

-Q2

19

1L1

SYS

2L1

T2

BU

26

PE

A2

-Q2

3 ACM

/.4

6

C 1,6A

-F11

7

2N

13

4 14

2

9

-S12

2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

B

22

I >

61

-S11

/.2

13

-Q3

SYS1

C 1,6A

-RMZ

A1

BUS

GEN.F

AULT

DEVIC

E

1

A

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

1

8

230V

AC

3

-X19

12

11

-A12

L1

Gen.f

ault

24

-X2

-T10

14

14

41

13

L2

7

5

SYS

-Q3

X9

20

4

SYS2

15

18

1N

1

-RMA

13

3

10

U

Profibu

s DP

21

A2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

2

L1

-X1

A1

/.4

4

27

-F12

17

6

Test/re

set

PE

24

8

I >

CT

2

2

-DMZ

-S13

/.4

T1

16

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

L2

PE

PE

T25

6

T1

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

1

B

1

A1/.7

A

14

1

-X1

2

22

2

Ready

Example circuits




Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



Mains

conta

ctor

Open

Mains

conta

ctor

Clos

ed

Loca

l St

op

Loca

l Cl

osed

Loca

l Op

en

Feed

back

Limit s

witch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

lLim

it swi

tchOp

en

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch

Open

CLOS

E

Digital

Mod

ule

OPEN

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

e

Current measurement

Basic

Unit

STOP

TEST

/RE

SET

1

-X19

23

3

5

13

L3

21

SPE/PE

5

-M1N

10

-A11

>>

>I

II

25

W

A2

3

24V

B

1

BUS

230V

AC

14

21

2 3

22

5

L3

PROF

IBUS

9

-X19

-DMA

63

-A10

20

OUT1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

/.2

4

PE

A

VT3

13

6

-Q2

19

1L1

SYS

2L1

T2

BU

26

22

A2

-Q2

3 ACM

/.4

6

C 1,6A

-F11

7

2N

13

4 14

2

9

-S12

2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

B

22

PE

I >

61

-S11

/.2

13

-Q3

SYS1

C 1,6A

-RMZ

A1

BUS

GEN.F

AULT

DEVIC

E

1

A

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

1

8230V

AC

3

-X19

12

11

-A12

L1

Gen.f

ault

24

-X2

-T10

14

14

41

13

L2

7

5

SYS

-Q3

X9

20

4

SYS2

15

18

1N

1

-RMA

13

3

10

U

Profibu

s DP

21

A2

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

L1

-X1

A1

2

/.4

4

27

-F12

17

6

Test/re

set

PE

24

8

I >

CT

2

2

-S13

/.4

T1

16

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

L2

PE

PE

T25

6

T1

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

1

B

1

A1/.7

A

14

1

-X1

2

2

Ready

Example circuits




Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03



4

1L1

L1

L3

10

T2

-S13

21

-X2

1

>>

>I

II 5

13

L2

-S12

Profibu

s DP

I >

-DMA

/RMA

24V

51/N AC

50Hz

230V

11

21

3 ACM

9

1

PE

-X19

25

3BU

13

/.7

SYS2

16

3

20-T1

0

21

1

Test/re

set

3

X9

3

B

-A12

1

1N

3

-Q3

2

-Q3

27

24

-X19

-X1

17

6 U

18

2

C 1,6A

9

2L1

6

B

SYS1

-F12

2N

/.4

13

10

-Q2

PE

L1

19OU

T1

IN1IN4

IN3

N/MOU

T2

IN2

A

4

22

A1

1T2

A2

A

PE

BUS

W

1/N AC

50Hz

230V

2

-X1

4

22

BUS

GEN.F

AULT

21

6

8

I >

B

T1

1

/.4

14

-A11

A

20

2

3

/.2

SYS

-F11

230V

AC

14

PE

2

13

A2

/.2

2

14

7

25

12

6

26

IN2IN3

OUT1

OUT2

IN4PT

CIN1

OUT3

PE

SPE/PE

2

3

1

4

T3

A1

6

A1

3/N/PE

AC50

Hz 40

0V

22

T1

7

4

5

1

-X19

2

-S11

C 1,6A

8

Gen.f

ault

N

SYS

14

13

22

L3

4

23

CT

1

-Q2

V

-DMZ

/ RMZ

PROF

IBUS

1

/.4

-M1

15

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

-A10

6

14

1

5

A2

L2

230V

AC

SIMOC

ODEp

ro V

Ready

Mains

Con

tactor

Open

Mains

Con

tactor

Clos

ed

Loca

l St

op

Loca

l Cl

osed

Loca

l Op

en

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch/

Limit s

witch

Clos

ed

Feed

back

Torq

ue sw

itch/

Limit s

witch

Open

Devic

e

OPEN

Digital

Mod

uleOpera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

Current measurement

CLOS

EST

OPTE

ST/

RESE

T

Example circuits




Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.14 "Soft starter" example circuit

E.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Fig. E-37: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Rese

t

Soft

starte

r

Soft

starte

r

Loca

l

Main

s con

tacto

r

Fault

Soft

starte

r

Star

t

On Loca

lOf

fON

>OF

F

Devic

e

Basic

Unit

Bus connector at Sub-D

Current measurement

Opera

tor Pa

nel

>I

>I

>I

-Q1

4

65

2

3

1

-

3RW

40230V

AC24

vdc

+

BYPAS

OVERL

OAD

IN

+

on

-A1

96

A1

95

3

1

4T2

14/24

5L3

23

2T1

13

98

6T3

1L1

3L2

2

A2

IN4

IN2

OUT

1IN

1PT

CO

UT3

OUT

2IN

3

-A10

SIM

OCO

DEp

ro V

230V

AC

24V

BUS

Prof

ibus

DP

Gen

.faul

t

Test

/res

et

2

X9

A

10

A1

1

B

7

CT

SYS

T1

8

6

9

A2

3

5

SPE/PE

T2

4

-T10

T2

L3 BU

L2

L1 T1

T3

GEN

.FAUL

T

TEST

/

DEV

ICE

RESE

T

BUS

-A11 SYS

3/.2/.2

PE/.2/.2

2/.2/.2

PE/.2/.2

3/.6/.6

2/.5/.5

2

7

-X10

8

9

5

4

-X10

1

6

3

M3

AC

-M1

W

PE

V

U

I>

-F13

C 3A

21

I>

-F11

C 1A

1 2

I>

-F12

C 1,

6A

21

-Q11 /.4

11 12

-S12

21 22

-X9

off

B 'B

A 'A

-Q11

A1 A2

-Q1

A1 A2

1/N

AC

50H

z 230

V1L

1

1N2N1/

N A

C 50

Hz 2

30V

2L1

-Q1

/.4

21

-S11

1413

43

65

3/N

/PE

AC50

Hz 4

00V

PEL1 NL2 L3

3RW

402/

B

PRO

FIBU

S

3RW

403/

Cont

rol V

olta

ge:2

4V D

C or

110

-240

V AC

/DC

A

A

3RW

404

B

Example circuits


E.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404)

Fig. E-38: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.14.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Fig. E-39: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

ON>

OFF

Basic

Unit


Current measurement

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Devic

e

>I

>I

>I

-Q1

1

5

43

2

6

-

3RW

40230V

AC24

vdc

+

BYPAS

OVERL

OAD

IN

+

on

-A1

96

3L2

95

3

6T3

2

A1

A2

4T2

1

14/24

2T1

13

1L1

5L3

23

98

IN4

IN2

OUT

1IN

1PT

CO

UT3

OUT

2IN

3

-A10

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

Test

/rese

t

Gen.

faul

t

Prof

ibus

DP

24V

BUS

1

SYS

A

T1

3

10

CT

A1

7

5

A2

X9

2

T2

4

SPE/PE

8

9

6

B

-T10

T1

T2L2

L1

L3 T3BUGE

N.FA

ULT

TEST

/

DEVI

CE

RESE

T

BUS

-A11 SYS2

/.2/.23/.2/.2

PE/.2/.2

3/.6/.6

PE/.2/.2

2/.5/.5

2

4

7

6-X10

1

-X10

8

3

5

9

M3

AC

-M1

V

PE

W

UI

>

-F12

C 1,

6A

1 2

I>

-F11

C 1A

21

I>

-F13

C 3A

1 2

-S12

2221

-X9

off

B

A

'B

'A

-A1R

E2E1

-Q1

A1 A2

2N1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

2L1

1N1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

1L1

-Q1

/.4

1 2

-S11

1413

3 4

5 6

3/N/

PE A

C50H

z 400

V

NL3L1 PEL2

3RW

405/

Cont

rol V

olta

ge:2

4V D

C or

110

-240

V AC

/DC

A

3RW

407

B

PRO

FIBU

S

A

B

Rese

tFe

rn

Example circuits


E.14.4 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Fig. E-40: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.15 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit

E.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404)

Fig. E-41: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Devic

e

Basic

Unit


Digital

Mod

ule

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Current measurement

>I

>I

>I

-Q1

2

65

3

1

4

-

3RW

40230V

AC24

vdc

+

BYPAS

OVERL

OAD

IN

+

on

-A1

3L2

2 96

95

A2

A1

2T1

3 98

23

14/24

13

5L3

4T2

6T3

1

1L1

IN4

IN2

OUT

1IN

1PT

CO

UT3

OUT

2IN

3

-A10

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

Gen.

faul

t

24V

Prof

ibus

DP

Test

/rese

t

BUS

4

SPE/PE

2

X9

A

7

CT

9

A1

B

A2

31

8

T2

6

T1

5

10

SYS

-T10

T2

T1

T3L3 BU

L1

L2

GEN.

FAUL

T

TEST

/

DEVI

CE

RESE

T

BUS

-A12 SYS

IN4O

UT2

IN3

OUT

1N/

M

IN1

IN2

-A11

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

Ready

25

PE

23

SYS1

20

SYS2

22 27

26

24

21

PE./.2/.2

3/.2/.2

2/.2/.2

PE./.2/.2

2/.6/.6 3/.6/.6

7

6

9

3

-X10

1

2

-X10

8

4

5

M3

AC

-M1

W

V

U

PE

I>

-F12

C 1,

6A

1 2

I>

-F11

C 1A

1 2

I>

-F13

C 3A

1 2

-Q11 /.6

11 12-S

12

2221

-X9

off

'A

B

A

'B

-Q11

A2A1

-Q1

A2A1

-Q2

A2A1

1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

2L1

1N1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

1L1

2N

-Q2

/.5

1 2

-Q1

/.4

21

-S13

1413

-S11

13 14

3 4

65

3 4

65L3 N PEL1 L2

A

B

A

B

3RW

403/

3RW

402/

PRO

FIBU

S

3RW

404

Cont

rol V

olta

ge:2

4V D

C or

110

-240

V AC

/DC

Example circuits


E.15.2 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404)

Fig. E-42: "Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.15.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

Fig. E-43: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Digital

Mod

ule

Bus connector at Sub-D Basic

Unit

Devic

e

Current measurement

>I

>I

>I

-Q1

43

6

1 2

5

-

3RW

40230V

AC24

vdc

+

BYPAS

OVERL

OAD

IN

+

on

-A1

1L1

95

A1

3

1

2 96

2T1

5L3

23

98

4T2

6T3

3L2

14/24

13

A2

IN4

IN2

OUT

1IN

1PT

CO

UT3

OUT

2IN

3

-A10

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

24V

Test

/rese

t

BUS

Prof

ibus

DP

Gen.

faul

t

4

A2

SPE/PE

1

8

A1

9

7

5

6

B

SYS

X9

2

T2

CT

10

A

T1

3

-T10

T2

L1

BU T3

T1

L2

L3

GEN.

FAUL

T

TEST

/

DEVI

CE

RESE

T

BUS

-A12 SYSIN

4OUT

2

IN3

OUT

1N/

M

IN1

IN2

-A11

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

Ready

24

SYS2

27

21

26

25

PE

22

SYS1

20

23

3/.2/.2

PE./.2/.2

2/.2/.2

3/.5/.5

2/.5/.5 PE.

/.2/.2

2

5

7

6

4

-X10

1

9

-X10

8

3

M3

AC

-M1

W

V

PE

U

I>

-F13

C 3A

1 2

I>

-F11

C 1A

21

I>

-F12

C 1,

6A

1 2

-S12

2221

-X9

off

'AA

'BB

-A1R

Rese

tFe

rn

E2E1

-Q2

A1 A2

-Q1

A2A1

1N2N

1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

1L1

1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

2L1

-Q1

/.4

21

-Q2

/.5

1 2

-S11

13 14

-S13

13 14

65

43

3 4

5 6

PENL1 L3L2

B

3RW

405/

A

B

A

3RW

407

PRO

FIBU

S

Cont

rol V

olta

ge:2

4V D

C or

110

-240

V AC

/DC

Example circuits


E.15.4 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

Fig. E-44: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

E.16 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example

E.16.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example

Fig. E-45: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example

OFF

ON

Opera

tor Pa

nel

Basic

Unit

Off

On Loca

l

Loca

l

Main

cont

acto

r

Dev

ice

measurement unitCurrent-/voltage-

decoupling modulSIMOCODEpro V

>I

I>

I>

-Q1

1

3

2

6

4

5

IN4

IN2

OUT

1IN

1PT

CO

UT3

OUT

2IN

3

-A10

SIM

OCO

DEpr

o V

230V

AC

Prof

ibus

DP

Gen.

faul

t

BUS

24V

Test

/rese

t

T1

A

1

2

T2

A1

5

8

3

B

6

CT

SYS

X9

A2

7

10

4

9

SPE/PE

-T4

T2

L3

L2

UL2

BU

T1

UL1

T3

UL3

L1

-A13

ReadySYS2PE

SYS1

GEN.

FAUL

T

TEST

/

DEVI

CE

RESE

T

BUS

-A12 SYS

PE/.2/.2

PE/.2/.2

#2,5m

m

#2,5m

m

3

-X2

1

2

N

M 1~

-M1

L

NPE

I>

-F11

C 1A

1 2

I>

-F12

C 1,

6A

21

-S12

2221

2

19

1

20

-X19

18

1

-X1

3

2

4

3

7

5

-X1

6

10

6

5

8

12

8

9

7

4

-X19

11

-Q1

A1 A2

1N2N

1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

1L1

1/N

AC 5

0Hz 2

30V

2L1

-Q1

/.4

1 2

-S11

1413

43

65

PEL2L1 NL3

PRO

FIBU

S

2

A

2

AB

Cont

rol V

olta

ge:2

4V D

C or

110

-240

V AC

/DC

B

Example circuits


E.16.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example

Fig. E-46: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

SIMOCODE pro

E-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-1

Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas FIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for hazardous areas. It is imperative that you observe this information for the protection of any motors in hazardous areas.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• Planners and configurators• Commissioners• Maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You will require the following knowledge:• Explosion protection• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for

explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Selection and installation

• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines• Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial

Safety and Health).

Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas

SIMOCODE pro

F-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

F.1 General

Information and standards

Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:

The overload protection and thermistor motor protection of the SIMOCODE pro system meets the requirements for overload protection of explosion proof motors for the following types of protection:• EExd "explosion proof enclosure", e.g. according to DIN EN 50018 or

DIN EN 60079• EExe "increased safety", e.g. according to DIN EN 50019 or

DIN EN 60079-7.

Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully observe the following notes and standards:• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for

explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Selection and installation

• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)

• VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines• Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial

Safety and Health).All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining) and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog, air mixtures and inflammable dust are present):

*) Note:

This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with the certificate number BVS 04 ATEX F 003.

These devices are suitable for the protection of motors in hazardous areas and comply with the standards listed above.Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial

Safety and Health) are not required.

Warning

All installation, commissioning and maintenance work is to be carried out by responsible, qualified personnel only. Unprofessional behavior can cause serious damage to persons and goods.

BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *)

BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)



F.2 Set-up and commissioning

Notice

Please observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the devices):


Device Order No.









SIMOCODE pro

F-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

F.2.1 Setting the rated motor current

Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or design test certificate of the motor).

Notice

Note the trip class/tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.Select the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected, even when the rotor is stalled.Motors, cables and contactors must be suitable for the selected trip class.

Notice

Set the response of the overload protection to "Tripping"!

Example

Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE= 11 s, IA/Is = 5.5:

Fig. F-1: Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10

IA/Is = 5.5

TE = 11 s



F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input

For the 3UF70, you can use type A temperature sensors with a characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.Depending on the number of sensors, this will result in the following tripping and restart temperatures:

Fig. F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)

Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures will result based on the TNF (rated response temperature of the sensor):

Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures

The temperatures listed are limit values.

Notice

Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Tripping"!

Tripping temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors TNF + 4 K TNF - 7 K

6 sensors TNF - 5 K TNF - 20 K


SIMOCODE pro

F-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

F.2.3 Sensor circuit wiring

Caution

Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. The use of motor feeder wires or other main current cables is not permitted.Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interferences are to be expected because of parallel high-voltage cables.

Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:

Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables

We recommend evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable.If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried out (mounting, demounting the system).

F.2.4 Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to

IEC 60947-4-1

Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged overcurrent protection devices.

Caution

When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of assignment 2.

F.2.5 Cable protection

Caution

Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning the cross sections!Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20 to CLASS 40 (see Chapter D.7 "Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V").

Cable

cross section

Cable lengths at the thermistor input

Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection 1)

2.5 mm2 2 x 2800 m 2 x 250 m

1.5 mm2 2 x 1500 m 2 x 150 m

0.5 mm2 2 x 500 m 2 x 50 m

1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum cable length.



F.2.6 Test

SIMOCODE pro offers users the convenient option of checking the complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as contactors, thermistors). This can, for example, be used to carry out tests according to IEC 60079-17.This test includes a complete function test. For this purpose, all three test phases are to be carried out (hardware test, current feedback, motor protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the "TEST/RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Due to existing self-test routines, tripping currents do not need to be started in order to carry out testing.

Test phases

• Phase 1: Hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated, including lamp controls. Contactor controls remain unchanged.

• Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 to 5 s):If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.If there is no fault:

– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three

phases (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).• Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):

If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.

The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:

Test phase Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2 s

"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL*

Results of the hardware test/lamp test

2 s - 5 s

"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5 s

"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

"GEN.FAULT" LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off

*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Table F-3: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing


SIMOCODE pro

F-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

F.2.7 Further safety guidelines

Caution

Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable digital module may be used for the protection function!

Warning

The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet with at least degree of protection IP 4x.When setting up the equipment in hazardous areas, ensure the 3UF7 does not present a fire hazard. Appropriate measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).

Warning:For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC supply, galvanic isolation must be ensured with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to DIN EN 61558-2-6.

Notice

The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.

F.2.8 Ambient conditions

Permissible ambient temperature range:• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; OPD: 0 °C to +60 °C

F.2.9 Safety data

• SIL (IEC 61508): SIL 1• PFDavg (IEC 61508) < 3.0 * 10-2

• Repeat test: DIN EN 60079-17, Section 4.4.



F.3 Maintenance and repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.

Warning

Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

F.4 Warranty

Notice

For this warranty to be considered valid, the safety and commissioning information of the following operating instructions must be observed:


Device Order No.















SIMOCODE pro

F-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

F.5 Further information

You will find further information on the Internet:• Internet:

www.siemens.com/simocode• Information and Download Center:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial• Product Information System (ProdIS):

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support• Service and support:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.• ATEX:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.• Certificates:

www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals.


http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex


SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-1

Index

Symbols

IL1, IL2, IL3 1-54Imax 1-54

Numerics

0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring 5-1, 5-151NC contact + 1NO contact evaluation/

2NC contact evaluation 10-202x 1-channel/1x 2-channel 10-203UF50 basic type 1-743UF50 compatibility mode 1-20, 9-1, 9-23UF50 operating mode 1-743UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator

panels C-139-pole SUB-D connection 13-46

A

I_max 1-54IL1, IL2, IL3 1-54A/B terminals 13-46Abbreviations A-3, B-4Abbreviations and specifications A-3About SIMOCODE 1-53Access to data records in STEP7 12-24Accessories 1-27, 1-107, C-16Acknowledgement of faults 10-7Active control stations 4-65, A-2Active control stations, contactor controls,

lamp controls and status information for the control functions 4-65

Active power 1-22Active power monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-13Actual analog signal values 1-22Acyclic Receive 7-3, 7-17Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-115Acyclic Send 6-18Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1) 1-115Acyclic Send Data 6-18, 12-1Acyclic services 1-20, 6-18, 7-17Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data

records 12-17Adapt display settings 1-75, 1-81Addressing plug 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36,

13-42, Glossary-1Adopt address 1-85

Alarms 12-7Alarms - diagnostic alarm 12-15Alarms - process alarm 12-16Alarms according to DPV1 1-20Alarms, faults and system events 15-1AM Inputs 1-114AM inputs function block 7-14AM Output 1-114, 6-11Ambient conditions F-8Analog input 1, 2 1-61Analog module 1-7, 1-17, 1-26, 1-79, 1-99,

5-16Analog module (AM) 1-104, Glossary-1Analog module connection example 13-

13-23Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-14Analog module open circuit 15-2Analog module output 6-1, 6-11Analog module pin assignment 13-22Analog signals 1-22Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,

PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types 1-14

Analog terminal block 1-112Analog value recording 1-114, 8-1, 8-2,

8-3Antivalence 15-2Apparent power 1-22Areas of application 1-6Assignment of cyclic receive and send data

for predefined control functions B-45ATEX Glossary-1Automatic acknowledgement of faults

reset 10-7Automatic baud rate recognition 1-20Automatic starting after power failure

10-21Auto-Reset 10-11Acyclic Receive function blocks 7-17

B

Basic unit 1-15, 1-75, 1-90, 13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9, Glossary-1

Basic unit 1 1-29Basic unit 2 1-30

SIMOCODE proIndex-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Index

Basic unit connection example 13-15Basic unit inputs 7-3, 7-4Basic unit outputs 6-4Basic unit pin assignment 13-14Basic units 1-29, C-2Baud rate 1-72, Glossary-2Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s 1-20Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC 1-14Binary inputs on the basic units and digital

modules 7-1Binary terminal block 1-112Bistable outputs 1, 2 1-77Bistable relay outputs 1-14BU input settings 7-5BU inputs 1-121BU outputs 1-121, 6-5Bus Glossary-2Bus connection D-8Bus connection system 1-24, 13-30,

13-31Bus connection system from 20 A to

630 A 13-30, 13-31Bus fault/PLC/PCS fault response 10-25Bus monitoring 1-72, 10-24, 10-25Bus o.k. 1-72Bus ok, PLC/PCS in run 1-63Bus parameters 12-1Bus segment Glossary-2Bus termination module 13-47Bus/PLC fault - reset 1-73, 10-25Buttons, operator panel D-22Buttons, operator panel with display D-23

C

Cable cross sections 13-12Cable length of the sensor circuit

cables F-6Cable protection F-6Calculation modules 1-21, 11-2Calculator 1-21Calculator 1 1-59, 1-70, 1-117Calculator 2 1-59, 1-71, 1-117, 11-28Calculator examples 11-30Calculator formulae 11-29Calculator settings 11-29Calculators 1-70Cascade input Glossary-2Cascade input automatic start/monitored

start 10-21Catalogs and information material xiii,

F-10Change-over pause 4-16, 4-18, 4-31, 4-

4-32, 4-34, 4-36, 4-37, 4-39, 4-41, 4-43,4-44, 4-46, 4-48, 4-50

Change-over pause active 1-64Channel-related diagnostics 12-7, 12-14

Characteristic curve of a type A sensorF-5

Check list for selecting a device series1-13

Circuit breaker 1-19, 4-14, 4-29Circuit breaker control (MCCB) 1-30Class 3-8, Glossary-2Class 1 master 12-2, 12-17, Glossary-2Class 2 master 12-2, Glossary-2Class time 3-14Clear 1-85Clockwise rotation 4-33Cold starting 10-9Color coding for the connecting cable

13-41, 13-43Commands 1-52Commands (OPD) 1-48Comment 1-89Commissioning 2-9, 14-1, 14-3, 14-4, F-3Communication 1-5, 1-20, 1-51, 12-1Communication principle 12-4Compatibility mode 1-73Compatibility mode 1 1-74Conductor cross section 13-30, 13-31Configuration fault 15-2Configuration information for using an ope-

rator panel with display and/or a decou-pling module 1-106

Configure diagnostic response 12-7Configuring a reversing starter 2-1Configuring the DM-F DIP switch 1-101Connecting cable 1-27, 1-108, 13-36,

Glossary-3Connecting cables to the system interface

of the operator panel 13-44, 13-45Connecting plugs with sockets 1-113Connecting system components to the

system interface 13-39, 13-43Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the

9-pole SUB-D socket 13-46Connection cross sections, decoupling

module D-9Connection for voltage measurement

D-8Connection, analog module D-20Connection, basic units D-6Connection, digital modules D-11Connection, DM-F D-13Connection, earth-fault module D-20Connection, temperature module D-21Contactor Glossary-3Contactor control 4-33Contactor controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2Contrast 1-81Control circuit, analog module D-19Control circuit, digital modules D-10


Index

Control circuit, earth-fault module D-20Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-24, 4-27,

4-30, 4-33, 4-37, 4-40, 4-44, 4-47, 4-54, 4-59, 4-62

Control function 4-1, 4-2Control functions 4-10, 4-65, Glossary-3Control of the main contactor in the motor

feeder 6-4Control station - local control 4-3Control station - operator panel 4-4Control station - PC 4-4Control station - PLC/PCS 4-3Control station Local Control 2-2Control station operator panel 4-2Control station PC 4-2Control station PLC/PCS 4-2Control station settings 4-9Control stations 1-124, 4-1, Glossary-3Cooling down period 1-62, 3-10,

Glossary-4Cooling down period active 1-65Cooling down period of the motor 1-22Cos phi 1-94, Glossary-4Cos phi monitoring 1-16, 1-126, 5-1, 5-11,

11-25, Glossary-4Cos phi, P, S 1-61Cold starting function test 10-9Counter 11-2, 11-8, 11-9Counter - actual value 1-70Counter - output 1-70Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-131Counter-clockwise rotation 4-33Counter logic modules 11-8Counters 1-21, 1-70Cover 1-32Cross-circuit detection 10-20Current flowing, device ok 1-63Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22Current limit 1-15, 3-14Current limit monitoring 1-13, 1-15, 5-1,

5-5, 5-6, Glossary-4Current limits 1-124, 5-5Current measuring 1-13, 1-76Current measuring module 1-24, 1-93,

4-32, 13-2, 13-30, 14-2, 5-5, C-3, C-4,C-5, C-6, C-7, F-3, F-9, Glossary-4

Current measuring module installed 4-36Current measuring module installed in

delta circuit/supply line 4-18Current measuring with the current mea-

suring modules and current/voltage me-asuring modules 13-30

Current/voltage measuring module 1-7,5-13, 13-2, 14-2, C-9, C-10, C-11, C-12, F-3, F-9, Glossary-4


1-24, 1-25, 1-94, 5-5, 5-8, 13-31, C-8Cyclic data 12-6Cyclic data exchange 12-17Cyclic Receive 7-3, 7-16, 12-6Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132Cyclic Receive function blocks 7-16Cyclic Send 6-16, 12-6Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132Cyclic Send data 2-12, 6-17, 12-1Cyclic services 1-20, 6-17, 7-16

D

Dahlander 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-39, B-51, E-18, E-19

Dahlander reversing starter 4-14, 4-43, B-52, E-20, E-21, E-22

Dahlander reversing starter control function 4-40

Data access 12-6Data formats B-1Data record 130 - Basic device parame-

ters 1 B-21Data record 131 - Basic device parame-

ters 2 B-26Data record 132 - Extended device parame-

ters 1 B-30Data record 133 - Extended device parame-

ters 2 B-37Data record 139 - Marking B-40Data record 160 - Communication

parameters B-41Data record 165 - Identification B-41Data record 202 - Acyclic receive B-42Data record 203 - Acyclic send B-43Data record 224 - Password protection

B-44Data record 67 - Process image of the

outputs B-8Data record 69 - Process image of the

inputs B-9Data record 72 - Error buffer B-10Data record 73 - Event memory B-11Data record 92 - Device diagnostics B-12Data record 94 - Measured values B-19Data record 95 - Service data/statistical

data B-20Data records 12-24, B-1, B-2, B-3Data transfer 12-4Date 1-89Decoupling module 1-25, 1-96, 13-2,

14-2, F-9, Glossary-4Decoupling module connection

example 13-24Decoupling module in different

networks 1-95, 1-96


Index

Decoupling module pin assignment13-24

Degree of protection (according toIEC 60529) D-2

Delay xii, 3-12Delay time 1-100, 7-11Delay time for sensor inputs

50ms/10ms 10-20Delta networks 1-98Device class 1-91Device data 12-2Device data (GSD file) Glossary-5Device family 1-90Device I/Os 1-52Device I/Os (OPD) 1-46Device parameters 12-1Device replacement 1-107Device series 1-7Device subfamily 1-90Device test active 1-65Diagnostic alarms 12-7Diagnostic data 1-5, 1-23Diagnostic device fault 1-74Diagnostic message "Local" and

"PROFIsafe" 1-23Diagnostic warning 1-74Diagnostics data 12-7Diagnostics for device faults 12-7Diagnostics for process events 12-7Diagnostics for process warnings 12-7Digital module 1-77, 1-100, 13-2, 14-2, F-3,

F-9, Glossary-5Digital module 1 as DM-F Local 1-78Digital module 1 inputs 7-3Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78Digital module 2 inputs 7-3Digital module connection example 13-17Digital module DM-F Local 1-102, 13-2,

14-2, F-3, F-9Digital module DM-F Local connection

example 13-28Digital module DM-F Local pin

assignment 13-26Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 1-102,

13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connec-

tion examples 13-29Digital module inputs 7-9Digital module outputs 6-9Digital module pin assignment 13-16Digital modules 1-25, 1-99Digital modules DM-F Local and

DM-F PROFIsafe 13-5, 13-25, C-15, Glossary-5

Dimension drawings C-1DIP positions, enabling circuit 0>1, digital

module DM-F Local 1-88DIP switch Glossary-5DIP switch, DM-F Local D-16DIP switch, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17DIP switches, DM-F PROFIsafe 10-22DIP switches, DM-F Local 1-66, 10-19,

10-20Direct starter 1-9, 1-10, 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,

4-14, 4-23, B-46, E-6, E-7Direct starter for 1-phase loads E-50,

E-51Direct starter control function 4-22Direction of rotation 4-24Display 1-92Display of all pending faults 1-86Display of all pending status

information 1-86Display of all pending warnings 1-86Display of measured values in the measu-

red values display 1-60Display of statistical and maintenance-rele-

vant information on the statistics/main-tenance display 1-67

Display settings 1-52Display settings (OPD) 1-47Display, operator panel with display D-23Displays (lamp control) 4-12Displays of the operator panel with

display 1-38, 1-51Displays the current status of all

device I/Os 1-75DM Inputs 7-11DM Outputs 6-9DM1(2) Inputs 1-118DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-

F PROFIsafe 1-118DM1(2) Outputs 1-118DM-F Abbreviations-1DM-F - Test requirement 15-2DM-F DIP switch

1-101DM-F feedback circuit 15-2DM-F Local 1-18DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18DM-F PROFIsafe, inputs 1,2,3, feedback

circuit 1-78DM-F safety-oriented tripping 15-2DM-F system interfaces 1-101DM-F wiring 15-2DM-FL - Configuration deviation 15-2DM-FL - Configuration mode 15-3DM-FL - Cross circuit 15-3DM-FL - Simultaneity 15-3DM-FL waiting for start-up test 15-3DM-FP F PRM error 15-3DM Inputs function blocks 7-9


Index

Documentation for safety-oriented func-tions and failsafe digital modules 1-102

Door adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2, 14-2, C-16, F-9, Glossary-5

Double 0 15-3Double 1 15-3DP master 12-2, Glossary-5DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1

alarm mode) 12-21DP master without DPV1 alarm support

(DPV0 alarm mode) 12-21DP masters which are operated in "DPV1"

DP mode 12-22DP masters which are operated in "S7

compatible" DP mode 12-23DP slave/DP standard slave Glossary-6DPV0 1-74DPV1 1-74PC 4-9DPV1 slave 12-2DPV1 slave via GSD 12-17

E

Early warning and fault messages 1-23Earth fault 5-2Earth-fault detection 1-7Earth-fault module 1-26, 1-99, 1-105,

Glossary-6Earth-fault module connection

example 13-19Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-18Earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 1-26, 1-127,

5-1, 5-2, Glossary-6Earth-fault monitoring via the current mea-

suring module (internal) 1-13Earth-fault monitoring with external

summation current transformer via the earth-fault module 1-14

EEx e applications 3-10, 3-15, 5-23Electrical service life of relay outputs,

DM-F D-12EMC stability according to

IEC 60947-1 D-2EMERGENCY OFF Glossary-7Emergency start 1-20, 1-121, 10-2, 10-17,

Glossary-6Emergency start executed 1-65EMERGENCY STOP Glossary-7EMERGENCY STOP command

device Glossary-7EMERGENCY STOP device Glossary-7Enabled control command 4-7Enabled control command - OFF 4-35,

4-53, 4-57, 4-64Enabled control command - ON < 4-57

Enabled control command - ON > 4-53, 4-57

Enabling circuit Glossary-7Enabling circuit 1>0, digital module

DM-F Local 1-88Enclosure width, DM-F D-12End position 4-53, 15-3Energy consumed 1-59, 1-68Error buffer 1-53Error buffer (OPD) 1-49Error buffer/reading out error protocol

14-15Error protocolling with time stamp 1-23Error types 12-14European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)

Glossary-7Evaluating diagnostics data 12-21Event memory 1-53, 1-88, 14-16Event memory, OPD 1-49Example circuits E-1Execution ON command 15-3Execution STOP command 15-4Execution time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,

4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64

Expansion modules 13-2, 14-2, F-9, Glossary-7

Expansion modules for theSIMOCODE pro V device series 1-99

Expansion modules/decoupling module C-14

Explosion protection F-1Extended control 1-120Extended protection 1-119External current transformer 13-33External earth fault 15-4External earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2External earth-fault monitoring (with

summation current transformer) 5-4External fault 1-20, 10-2, 10-10, 10-11,

15-4External fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 1-120External fault function blocks 10-10External fault response 10-11

F

Factory settings 1-85, 2-2, 14-3, E-2, Glossary-7

Factory settings display 1-84Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/

PROFIsafe 12-5Failsafe digital module DM-F 1-101Failsafe digital module DM-F Local 1-25, 13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9


Index

Fault current 5-2Fault feedback 4-17Fault message xiiFaults 1-53, 1-83Faults (OPD) 1-49FB ON 4-16, 4-17, 4-50FC, FO, TC, TO 1-64Features 1-4Feedback (FB) OFF 15-4Feedback (FB) ON 15-4Feedback circuit Glossary-8Feedback faults 1-23Feedback ON 4-16, 4-44, 4-47Feedback time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,

4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64

Feeder power consumption 1-22Field/field level Glossary-8Fieldbus Glossary-8Flashing 1-21, 11-2, 11-21Flashing 1 (2, 3) 1-116Flashing logic modules 11-21Flashing settings 11-21Flickering 1-21, 11-2, 11-22Flickering 1 (2, 3) 1-120Flickering logic modules 11-22Flickering settings 11-22Frequencies D-2Full motor protection 1-4Function block Glossary-8Function blocks 1-111, 10-2Function blocks (alphabetical) 1-114FW version 1-91, 1-92

G

General fault, general warning 1-63General representation of the input

types 7-2GSD 12-2GSD file 1-110, 12-18

H

Hardware fault 15-4Hardware test 10-6, F-7HW version 1-91, 1-92Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA 5-17Hysteresis for monitoring functions 5-25Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

5-6, 5-7, 5-10

I

I L1, I L2, I L3 1-76I_max 1-60I_max, Cos 1-55I_max, UL1-L2, °C 1-58I_max, UL1-L2, °F 1-58I_max, UL1-L2, Cos 1-58

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos_Phi, S 1-55, 1-57, 1-58

I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P 1-55I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S 1-55I_max, UL1-N, °C 1-58I_max, UL1-N, °F 1-58I_max, UL1-N, Cos 1-57I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P 1-55I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S 1-55I/O devices Glossary-8Identification 1-53, 1-89Identification (OPD) 1-50Identification number 1-91Identification of the motor feeder and the

SIMOCODE pro components 1-89Identification-related diagnostics 12-11IL1, IL2, IL3 1-60Illumination 1-81Imax_A 1-54Imax, cos phi 1-55Independent operation 1-8, Glossary-8Information about mounting and

wiring 13-2Information and Download Center xiii,

F-10Information and standards F-2Input 1, analog module 1-79Input 2, analog module 1-79Input characterictic, DM-F PROFIsafe

D-18Input characteristic, DM-F Local D-16Input with safety relay function,

DM-FPROFIsafe D-18Inputs 1-75, 1-77, 7-1, 7-3Inputs (binary), basic units D-5Inputs (binary), digital modules D-10Inputs (binary), DM-F PROFIsafe D-17Inputs DM-F Local 1-78Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78Inputs with safety relay function D-16Inputs, analog module D-19Installation guidelines for the

PROFIBUS DP 13-47Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1

slave via GSD in the configuration software 12-18

Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-20

Integration of SIMOCODE pro asSIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config 12-19

Integration of SIMOCODE pro inSIMATIC S7 withOM SIMOCODE ES 12-22

Interfaces 13-1Interlocking time 4-16, 4-18, 4-24, 4-26,


Index

4-36, 4-43, 4-50, 4-58, 4-64, 5-21Interlocking time active 1-64Internal comments 1-22Internal earth fault 15-4Internal earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2,

5-3IT Abbreviations-1IT system Glossary-8

J

Just one start possible 15-4

K

Key-operated switch operation 4-5KTY83 1-80KTY85 1-80

L

Labeling strips 1-32, 1-33, 1-36Lamp control for displaying operating

states 6-4Lamp controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2Lamp test 10-6, F-7Languages 1-81Last event "Enabling circuit closed",

DM-F Local 1-88Last event "Enabling circuit closed",

DM-F PROFIsafe 1-88Last event "Enabling circuit opened" 1-88Last trip current 1-62LC 4-9LED display D-4LED display, analog module D-19LED display, decoupling module D-9LED display, digital modules D-10LED display, DM-F Local D-14LED display, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17LED display, earth-fault module D-20LED display, operator panel D-22LED display, operator panel with

display D-23LED display, temperature module D-21LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics 1-101LEDs of the operator panel with

display 6-7Limit Monitor 1-21, 11-2, 11-23, 11-24,

11-25Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-121Limit Monitor logic modules 11-23Limit overshooting 11-23Limit undershooting 11-23List of abbreviations Abbreviations-1Load feeder 1-10Load type 4-17, 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29,

4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-57, 4-61, 4-64

Local 4-5, 4-6

Local control 4-5Local control station 1-11, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2,

7-9Location designation 1-89Locking the contactor 4-16Logic module Glossary-8Logic modules 1-21, 11-1, 11-2Low voltage Glossary-9

M

Main circuit, current measuring modules, current/voltage measuring modulesD-7

Main display 1-51Main display (OPD) 1-41Main menu (OPD) 1-40Mains buffering time, basic units D-5Maintenance F-9Manual operation 4-5Manufacturer 1-90Manufacturer's identification 12-10Master Glossary-9Master PROFIBUS address 12-10Max. star time 4-32, 4-36Max. temp. °C 1-56Max. temp. °F 1-57Max. temperature 1-61, 1-80Maximum expansion with expansion

modules 1-106Measured curves 1-4Measured values display 1-51Measured values display (OPD) 1-42Measuring current and voltage with cur-

rent/voltage measuring modules 13-31Measuring current with an external current

transformer (interposing transformer)13-33

Measuring current with current measuring modules 13-30, 13-31

Measuring, processing and outputting analog values 1-13

Memory module 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36, 13-42, Glossary-9

Memory module "park position" 1-34, 1-37

Menu of the operator panel with display1-40

Messages (OPD) 1-48MFLB 1-90, 1-92Mode selector 4-5, 4-6, 4-9Module fault 15-4Module supply voltage is not present

15-5

Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)B-48, E-11


Index

Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3LVE-10

Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA 1-126, Glossary-9Monitoring for further availability 1-16Monitoring for undervoltage 1-16Monitoring functions 1-15, 5-1,

Glossary-9Monitoring interval for mandatory

testing 5-1, 5-24Monitoring interval for testing 1-127Monitoring of current limits I< 5-7Monitoring of current limits I> 5-6Monitoring the number of starts 5-20,

Glossary-9Monitoring voltage Glossary-9Motor control 1-4, 4-1Motor control functions 1-29Motor current monitoring 5-5Motor feeder 1-9, 2-3Motor model 10-17Motor operating hours 1-22, 1-67Motor operating hours > 15-5Motor protection 3-1, Glossary-10Motor protection and motor control

status 1-63Motor protection functions 3-2Motor stop time 1-16, 1-68Motor stop time > 1-68, 15-5Motor stop time monitoring 5-19,

Glossary-10Motor stop times 1-22, 5-18, 5-19Motor switching state 1-22Motor temperature 1-15Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

control function 4-27Mounting 13-1Mounting basic units D-4Mounting lugs 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7Mounting lugs for screw attachment 13-3Mounting position D-2Mounting the basic units, expansion mo-

dules and the decoupling module 13-4Mounting, analog module D-19Mounting, current measuring modules,

current/voltage measuring modules13-6, 13-7, D-7

Mounting, decoupling module D-9Mounting, digital modules D-10Mounting, DM-F module D-12Mounting, earth-fault module D-20Mounting, operator panel D-22Mounting, operator panel with display

D-23Mounting, temperature module D-21

N

Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display 1-40

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1Network contactor 4-33No start 1-68No start possible 15-5Non-maintained command mode 1-64,

4-16, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57, 4-60, 4-64

Non-safety functions (failsafe digital modules) 7-11

Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-122Non-volatile element logic modules 11-18Non-volatile element settings 11-20Non-volatile elements 1-21, 11-2, 11-18,

11-19, 11-20NOR function 11-17, 11-20Notes on parameterizing 14-3NTC 1-80Number of motor starts 1-22Number of overload trips 1-22, 1-67Number of parameterizations 1-69Number of permissible starts

remaining 1-22Number of starts 1-16, 5-20Number of starts - actual value 1-67Number of starts - overshoot 5-19Number of starts - pre-warning 5-19

O

Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro1-110

OFF command-reset 10-11OM SIMOCODE pro 12-2ON control command 4-53ON, ON>>, Start active 1-63Operator Panel 4-9OP Buttons 1-116, 7-8OP LED 1-115Open circuit, analog module 1-79Operating data 1-5, 1-22Operating hours 1-16, 5-18Operating hours BU 1-69Operating hours monitoring 5-19,

Glossary-10Operating manual failsafe digital module

DM-F Local 1-18, 1-102Operating manual failsafe digital module

DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18, 1-102Operating modes 4-1, 4-5, 4-6Operating modes for calculator 2 11-28Operating range, basic units D-4Operating range, DM-F D-12Operating, service and diagnostic data

1-22


Index

Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y link 1-20

Operation monitoring 1-116, 5-1, 5-18, Glossary-10

Operational Protection OFF 1-20, 10-2, 10-12, 10-13, 15-5, Glossary-10

Operational Protection OFF (OPO) function block 10-12

Operator controls of the operator panel with display 1-39

Operator panel 1-24, 1-32, 13-2, 14-2, F-9, 7-7, Glossary-10

Operator panel adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2, 14-2, C-16, F-9

Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6Operator panel LEDs 6-1, 6-6Operator panel with display 1-7, 1-24, 1-

1-34, 13-2, 14-2, F-9Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button 7-6Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4 7-6OPO 1-117, 10-12OPO, Remote, TPF 1-64Organization blocks Glossary-11Output of an analog value 6-15Output of the effective motor current

6-13, 6-14Output response of the timer 11-12, 11-13Output, analog module 1-79, D-19Outputs 1-75, 6-1, 6-3Outputs 1,2 "monostable" 1-77Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit DM-F

Local 1-78Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit

DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78Outputs DM-F Local 1-78Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78Overload 3-10, 15-5Overload operation 15-5Overload protection 1-13, 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,

3-5, 3-14, Glossary-11Overload relay 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-

4-20, B-45, E-4, E-5Overload relay control function 4-20Overtemperature 5-23, 5-24

P

Panel reset 10-11Parameter 4-16, 15-6Parameter changes not allowed in the cur-

rent operating state 15-6Parameter incorrect 15-6Parameterization 2-6Parameterization during startup 12-17Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-25Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

2-8

Password 15-10Pause time 3-10, Glossary-11Pause time active 1-65PC cable 1-27, 1-107, 13-36, 13-42,

Glossary-11PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block

library 1-28Performance Level (PL) 1-18, 1-101,

Glossary-11Permissible ambient temperature D-2Permissible number of starts

exceeded 15-6Permissible starts 5-20Permissible starts - actual value 1-68PFD Abbreviations-2PFDavg (IEC 61508) F-8PFHD Abbreviations-2Phase failure monitoring 1-13Phase sequence 1-22, 1-94Phase sequence 1-2-3 1-65Phase sequence 3-2-1 1-65Phase sequence identification 1-17Phase unbalance 1-22, 1-60, 3-13, 15-6Pin assignment of the removable

terminals 13-18, 13-20, 13-22, 13-24, 13-27, 13-32

Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the basic unit 13-14

Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module 13-16

Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local 13-26

Pin assignments for digital moduleDM-F PROFIsafe, 24 V DC version13-27

Plant downtimes 5-18Plant identifier 1-89PLC/PCS 4-5, 4-9PLC/PCS in Run 1-73PLC/PCS monitoring 1-20, 1-73, 10-2,

10-24, 10-25Plugs (analog) 1-111Plugs (binary) 1-111Pole-changing reversing starter 4-14,

4-50, B-54, E-26, E-27, E-28Pole-changing reversing starter control

function 4-47Pole-changing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,

4-14, 4-46, B-53, E-24, E-25Pole changing starter control function

4-44Positioner 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-57, 10-12,

10-13, B-56, E-32, E-33, E-34, E-35, E-36, E-37, E-38, E-39, E-40, E-41

Positioner closes 1-64Positioner control 1-30, 4-56


Index

Positioner control function 4-54, 10-12Positioner opens 1-64Power considerations 1-13Power consumption, basic units D-4Power consumption, DM-F D-12Power factor 1-22Power failure (UVO) 15-6Power failure monitoring 1-20, 10-2,

10-15, 10-16Power failure monitoring settings 10-16Power failure time 10-16Power loss ride-through time, DM-F D-12Power management 1-13Power monitoring 1-13, 1-127Power-up behavior 3-5Pre-alarm delay 3-12Preparing the data transfer 12-17Prerequisites for commissioning and

servicing 14-2Preventive maintenance 14-8Pre-warning level 3-12Pre-warning overload (I >115%) 15-6Process alarms 12-7Process and diagnostic alarm 12-17Process automation Glossary-11Process monitoring 1-15Product Information System (ProdIS) ii-

xiii, F-10, Abbreviations-2PROFIBUS Glossary-12PROFIBUS address 1-72PROFIBUS communication (OPD) 1-45PROFIBUS DP 1-20, 1-28, 2-2, 4-4, 4-59,

4-62, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-18, 7-17, 10-7, 12-2, Glossary-12

PROFIBUS DP interface 1-20,Glossary-12

PROFIBUS DP interface, basic units D-4PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket

13-46PROFIBUS DPV1 6-18, 7-17, 12-2,

Glossary-12PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) in-

stallation guidelines 13-47, Glossary-12PROFINET Glossary-12PROFIsafe 12-3, Glossary-12PROFIsafe address 1-72Programmable logic controller (PLC)

Glossary-13Programming device Glossary-13Protection functions 1-15Protection/Control 1-122Protective extra low voltage (PELV)

Glossary-13Pt100 1-80Pt1000 1-80PTC 3-15

PTC high resistance/not present 1-75PTC ok 1-75PTC short circuit 1-75Pump 1-11, 1-15

R

Rated control supply voltage Us D-4Rated control supply voltage Us,

DM-F D-12Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,

basic units D-4Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,

DM-F D-12Rated insulation voltage Ui, basic units

D-4Rated insulation voltage Ui, DM-F D-12Rated motor current F-4Reaction times, typical D-27Read and adapt main display 1-54Reading data 12-3Reading out statistical data 14-8Reading out the device-internal error

buffer 1-87Reading out the device-internal event

memory 1-88Receive data from PROFIBUS DP 1-111,

7-1Relay enabling circuits, DM-F D-12Relay outputs 6-1Relay outputs, basic units D-5Relay outputs, digital modules D-10Relay outputs, DM-F D-12Relay test 10-6, F-7Releases 4-1, 4-7Remote operation 4-5Remote reset 10-11Remote/Automatic 4-5, 4-6Removable terminals 13-3, 14-13Repairs F-9Replacing a basic unit 14-11Replacing a DM-F 14-12Replacing an expansion module or a

decoupling module 14-12Required function is not supported 15-7Reset 1-20, 3-12, 10-2Reset 1 (2, 3) 1-125Reset display settings 1-84Reset function 10-4, 10-5Reset settings 10-7Resetting, testing and parameterizing via

commands 1-85Resistive load 4-17Response xii, 3-4, 3-14Restart 1-85Restart temperature F-5Restart time delay 10-15


Index

Restart time delay (staggered) 10-16Return to main display 1-84Reversing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 2-1,

2-2, 2-7, 2-9, 4-14, 4-26, B-47, E-8, E-9Reversing starter control function 4-24Routing function 12-20, 12-25

S

S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-17Safe isolation according to

IEC 60947-1 D-3Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1,

DM-F D-12Safe Tripping 10-3Safe Tripping reset 10-23Safe Tripping response 10-23Safe Tripping, DM-F Local 1-123Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe 1-123Safety and commissioning information for

EEx areas F-1Safety data F-8Safety DM-F Local 1-66Safety DM-F PROFIsafe 1-66Safety extra low voltage Glossary-13Safety guidelines F-8Safety Integrity Level 1-18, 1-101,

Glossary-14Safety/PROFIsafe - separate function from

control function 4-17Safety-oriented tripping 1-14, 1-18, 10-18Safety-oriented tripping "Local" 1-20Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe" 1-20Safety-oriented tripping monitoring 1-22Saving change-over command 4-16, 4-26,

4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-64Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES

file into the basic unit 14-10Saving parameters from the basic unit into

a SIMOCODE ES file 14-9Saving parameters from the basic unit into

the memory module 14-9Saving parameters from the memory mo-

dule into the basic unit 14-10Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function

block 7-8Screw attachment 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7Screw terminals 1-111, 1-112SELV Glossary-13Send data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1Sensor channels 1,2, DM-F Local 1-78Sensor channels DM-F Local 1-78Sensor circuit fault 3-16Sensor circuit wiring F-6Sensor circuit, temperature module D-21Sensor fault 1-80, 3-16

Sensor input automatic start/monitored start 10-21Sensor measuring circuit 1-16, 1-22Sensor out of range 1-80Sensor type 1-80Sensor types 1-105Sensors 1-26Separate failsafe function from control

function 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57, 4-60, 4-64

Sequence for connecting cables to the sys-tem interface 13-40

Sequence for connecting cables to the sys-tem interface of the operator panel13-43

Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit 13-46

Service 14-1Service and support xiii, F-10Service data 1-5, 1-22Set current 3-5Set current Is2 3-6SET/RESET button, DM-F Local 10-19, D-

D-16SET-RESET button, DM-F PROFIsafe

D-17Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via

SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-5Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the

addressing plug 2-11, 14-5Setting the PROFIsafe address on

DM-F PROFIsafe 14-5Setting the rated motor current F-4Setting up in hazardous areas F-8Settings of the DIP switches

(DM-F Local) 10-19, 10-20Settings of the DIP switches

(DM-F PROFIsafe) 10-22Set-up F-3SFB Glossary-13SFC Glossary-13Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2Short code 1-90Short-circuit protection for type of as-

signment 2 according toIEC 60947-4-1 F-6

Short-circuit protection with fuses for mo-tor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V D-24

Signal conditioner 11-15, 11-16, 11-17Signal conditioner logic modules 11-15Signal conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4) 1-123Signal conditioner settings 11-17Signal conditioners 1-21, 11-2


Index

Signal types/output responses of non-vola-tile elements 11-19

SIL (IEC 61508) F-8SIL (Safety Integrity Level) Glossary-14SIMATIC Glossary-14SIMATIC PCS 7 1-28SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system

1-28SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-3, Glossary-14SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2SIMATIC S7 1-110, 12-18SIMOCODE ES 1-109, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1, 4-4,

6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-11, 11-1, 12-1, 12-2, 14-3, 14-9, B-40, Glossary-14

SIMOCODE ES 2007 + SP2 1-28SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-110SIMOCODE ES Premium 12-25SIMOCODE pro basic unit 1-113SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD

12-21SIMOCODE pro object manager

(OM) Glossary-14SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library 1-110,

Glossary-14SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3,

Glossary-15SIMOCODE pro V installation

(example) 13-38Single-phase networks 1-98Slave Glossary-15Slave diagnostics 12-10Slave operating modes 12-17Smooth running down time 4-64Snap-on mounting 13-4Socket assignment table - analog A-12Socket assignment table - digital A-5Sockets (analog) 1-112Sockets (binary) 1-111Soft starter 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-60, 4-62,

B-57, E-42, E-43, E-45Soft starter control 1-30Soft starter control function 4-59Soft starter with reversing contactor

4-14, 4-64, B-58, E-46, E-47, E-48, E-49Soft starter with reversing contactor

control function 4-62Software 1-28, 1-109Solenoid valve 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-53,

B-55, E-30, E-31Solenoid valve control 1-30Solenoid valve control function 4-51Specifications A-4, B-5, D-2Stalled positioner 15-7Stalled rotor 15-7Stalled rotor level 3-14

Stalled rotor monitoring 1-13Stalled rotor protection 1-15, 3-2, 3-14,

Glossary-15Standard diagnostics 12-7, 12-17Standard function Glossary-15Standard functions 1-20, 10-1, 10-2Standard motor feeders 1-13Standard rail mounting 13-6, 13-7Standards F-2Star contactor 4-33Star networks 1-97Star time 4-32, 4-36Star-delta connection 4-34, 5-2Star-delta reversing starter 1-19, 4-14,

4-35, B-50, E-16, E-17Star-delta starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-

4-32, B-49, E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15Star-delta starter control function 4-30Star delta reversing starter control

function 4-33Start-up override 4-17, 5-16Start-up parameter block 1-73Start-up parameter block active 15-7Start-up testing 10-21States of the status LEDs/contactor cont-

rols during testing 10-6, F-7Station Glossary-15Station status 1 12-9Station status 1 to 3 12-9Station status 2 12-10Station status 3 12-10Statistical data 14-8, Glossary-15Statistics/maintenance 1-51Statistics/maintenance (OPD) 1-44Status - cooling down period active 15-7Status - DM-F enabling circuit 15-8Status - emergency start executed 15-8Status display 1-51Status display for PROFIBUS

communication 1-72Status display motor protection/motor

control (OPD) 1-43Status information 1-52, 4-12, 4-65, 12-7,

12-11, 12-17, A-2STEP7 12-18, 12-19, 12-20, Glossary-15Stop category 0 Glossary-15Strip lengths 13-12, 13-32Summation current evaluation 5-2Summation current transformer 1-7, 1-26Supplying the inputs 7-5, 7-11Supplying the inputs of the basic unit13-13Supplying the inputs of the digital module 13-15Supplying the inputs of the digital module

DM-F PROFIsafe 13-27


Index

Switch voltage display 1-83Switching from star to delta 4-30, 4-33,

4-36Switching the direction of rotation 4-24,

4-33, 4-40, 4-47, 4-62Switching the direction of travel 4-54Switching the speed 4-37, 4-40, 4-44,

4-47System components 1-24, 1-29System interface 1-24, 13-40System interface cover 1-27, 1-108, 13-39,

13-42System interface cover IP54 Glossary-16System interface, current measuring mo-

dules, current/voltage measuring modules D-7

System interface, digital modules D-10System interfaces 13-36, 13-42System interfaces on basic units, expan-

sion modules, decoupling module, cur-rent measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules 13-39

System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe 13-41

System interfaces on the operator panel 13-42

System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display13-42

System interfaces, analog module D-19System interfaces, basic units D-4System interfaces, decoupling module D-

D-9System interfaces, DM-F D-12System interfaces, earth-fault module D-

D-20System interfaces, operator panel D-22System interfaces, operator panel with

display D-23System interfaces, temperature module

D-21

T

T1, T2, T3 1-61, 1-80Table of contents iTables A-1Target groups 4-1Technical data D-1Technical data of the DM-F Local digital

module D-14Technical data of the DM-F Local and

DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules D-12

Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module D-17

Technical data of the earth-fault module

D-20Technical data of the expansion modules

D-10Technical data of the operator panel with

display D-23Technical data of the temperature

module D-21Technical data, analog module D-19Technical data, decoupling module D-9Technical data, digital modules D-10Technical data, operator panel D-22Telegram description 12-6Temperature in the sensor measuring

circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-22Temperature limit 3-15Temperature module 1-7, 1-16, 1-26, 1-80,

1-99, 1-105, 15-8, Glossary-16Temperature module - warning level

exceeded 15-8Temperature module connection

example 13-21Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-12,

7-13Temperature module inputs

(TM inputs) 7-3Temperature module out of range 15-8Temperature module pin assignment

13-20Temperature monitoring 1-16, 1-26,

1-105, 1-128, 3-15, 5-1, Glossary-16Temperature monitoring (analog) 5-22Temperature sensor 1-7, 5-22Temperatures °C 1-56Temperatures °F 1-57Terminal block Glossary-16Test 1-20, 10-2, F-7Test 1 (2) 1-125Test function 10-4, 10-5Test interval for mandatory testing 5-24Test phases 10-6, F-7Test position 10-8Test position feedback (TPF) 1-20, 10-2,

10-8, 10-9, 15-8, Glossary-16Test Position Feedback function block

10-8Test settings 10-6Test trip 15-8Test verification documents D-2Test/Reset 1-85, 10-4Test/Reset button DM-F 1-101TEST/RESET button, basic units D-4Test/Reset buttons 10-11Thermal motor model 1-22, 1-61, 3-10, 10-5Thermistor 1-125Thermistor motor protection (PTC


Index

binary) D-5Thermistor motor protection with PTC

(binary) 1-13, D-5Thermistor open circuit 15-8Thermistor protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,

Glossary-16Thermistor sensor 1-15Thermistor short circuit 15-8Thermistor trip level 15-8Thermistors 3-15Through-hole opening, current measuring

modules, current/voltage measuring modules D-8

Through-hole openings 13-30, 13-31Through-hole technology 1-24, 13-30,

13-31Through-hole technology up to 200 A

13-30, 13-31Tightening torques 13-12, 13-32Time range for permissible starts 5-20Time range for starts 5-20Time stamp 1-92, 1-131Time synchronization 10-26Time synchronization via

PROFIBUS DP 1-20Time to trip 1-22, 1-62Timer 1-21, 1-69, 11-2, 11-10, 11-14Timer - output 1-69Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-125Timer actual value 1-69Timer logic modules 11-10Timestamping 1-20, 10-3, 10-26Timestamping active 1-73TM inputs 1-125TN-C system Glossary-16TN-S system Glossary-16Torque 4-56TPF 1-122Transferring parameters to the basic

unit 2-9Transformation ratio 13-33Transformation ratio - active 3-5, 3-6Transformation ratio - primary 3-6Transformation ratio - secondary 3-6, 3-7Trip - Bus 15-9Trip - PLC/PCS 10-24, 15-9Trip - Power failure (UVO) 10-16Trip - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-9Trip antivalence 15-8Trip class 3-5, 3-8, F-4Trip current 1-23Trip end position 15-9Trip temporary components 15-9Tripping characteristic F-4Tripping temperature F-5Tripping time 3-5, 3-8

Truth table 2I/1O 1-129, 11-6Truth table 3I/1O 1-129, 11-3, 11-5Truth table 5I/2O 1-130, 11-7Truth tables 1-21, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5Type of load 3-11Type of protection EEx e and EEx d F-2Types of positioner control 4-56Types of signals 11-16, 11-19Types of signals/output responses of the

signal conditioners 11-16

U

U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 1-57,1-60, 1-76UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 1-57, 1-60, 1-76Unbalance 15-5Unbalance level 3-13Unbalance monitoring 1-13Unbalance protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2, 3-13,

Glossary-17Universal Current (UC) Glossary-17USB to serial adapter 1-27, 1-107UVO 1-128UVO fault 10-15

V

Voltage display 1-83Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22Voltage measurement 1-13, 1-76Voltage monitoring 1-128Voltage monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-8,

Glossary-17Voltage monitoring for undervoltage 1-13

W

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot15-9

Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< undershot15-9

Warning level cos phi < 15-9Warning level I< undershot 15-9Warning level I> overshot 15-9Warning level P< undershot 15-9Warning level P> overshot 15-9Warning level U< undershot 15-9Warnings 1-52, 1-83Warnings (OPD) 1-48Warranty F-9Watchdog 1-20, 1-131, 10-2, 10-24, 10-25Watchdog function block 10-24Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-110Win SIMOCODE DP converter

Glossary-17Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files

1-110Wiring 13-1, 13-12Wiring the basic units, expansion modules

and the decoupling module 13-12


Index

Wiring the removable terminals 13-24Wiring the removable terminals for basic

units 13-14Wiring the removable terminals of the

digital module 13-46Writing data 12-3

SIMOCODE pro

Index-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Index

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Abbreviations-1

List of abbreviations


Acycl. AcyclicAM Analog moduleAS Alarm switchAS Auxiliary switchATEX "Atmosphère explosible" (explosive atmospheres) according to the ATEX

equipment directive 94/9/ECAWG American wire gaugeBU Basic unitCPU Central processing unitCycl. CyclicDCM Decoupling moduleDIP Dual in-line packageDM Digital moduleDM-F Failsafe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)DM-FL Digital module Failsafe LocalDM-FP Digital module Failsafe PROFIsafeDP Distributed peripheralsEEx European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection classes for

categorizing motors for use in potentially explosive areas.EM Earth-fault moduleEMC Electromagnetic compatibilityEMF Electromotive forceex Explosion proofFB FeedbackFC Feedback CLOSEF-CPU Failsafe CPU (controller)FMS Fieldbus message specificationFO Feedback OFFGF, CF General fault, control functionGSD Device dataIM Current measuring moduleIT Isolation TerreLC Local controlMM Memory moduleNTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)OB Organization blocksOM Object manager for integrating PROFIBUS DP slaves in STEP 7OP Operator panelOPD Operator panel with displayOPO Operational protection OFF

List of Abbreviations

SIMOCODE pro

Abbreviations-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

OSSD Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (EPSE) that is connected to the controller and switches to the OFF state when the sensor component responds during the specified operation.

PCS Process control systemPD Programming devicePDM Process device managerPELV Protective extra low voltagePFD Probability of failure on demand: Probability of a dangerous failure of a safety

function when neededPFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Mean probability of a dangerous

failure per hour PL Performance LevelPLC Programmable logic controller

ProdIS Product information system

PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)PZ PozidrivSELV Safety extra low voltageSFB System function blockSFC System functionSIL Safety Integrity LevelTC Torque closedTh ThermistorTM Temperature moduleTO Torque openTPF Test position feedbackUC Universal currentUM Current/voltage measuring module

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Glossary-1

Glossary

Addressing plug

The addressing plug is necessary to enable the hardware-based allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC/PD.

Analog module (AM)

The analog module offers the option of extending BU2 by adding optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary process variables which can be mapped onto a 0/4 mA to 20 mA signal. The automation system has free access to the measured process variables.

ATEX

This is abbreviated from the French "Atmosphère explosible" (explosive atmospheres).ATEX is used as a synonym for both EC directives on explosion protection, specifically the ATEX equipment directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX workplace directive 1999/92/EC.

Basic unit (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important motor control functions and motor protection functions.Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and fulfills all requirements for motor protection, motor control, diagnostics and monitoring.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro

Glossary-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Baud rate

The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud rate = bit rate).With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud are possible.

Bus

A common transmission path with which all stations are connected. It has two defined ends.With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire cable (copper cable) or a fiber optic cable.

Bus segment

PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus segment has at least two stations, one of which must be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to a bus segment.

Cascade input

Safe single-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe. This input is evaluated internally as a sensor signal. If no voltage is applied the safety relay trips the enabling circuits (outputs) safely.

Class

Unit for the tripping class. Indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip at a current that is 7.2 times the value of the set current Is in a cold state (motor protection according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for SIMOCODE pro (for example), it is ensured that if a current that is 7.2 times the set current occurs the (cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.

Class 1 master

Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

Class 2 master

Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.Typical class 2 masters are, for example,• PC/PD devices with the "SIMOCODE ES" software• PDM (PCS7)• PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power

management).

Glossary


Connecting cable

Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the individual basic units with their current measuring modules and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator panels. They are available in various versions and lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system!

Contactor

Electromagnetically actuated low voltage switch with only one rest position, which is not manually operated and can make, carry or break currents under normal circuit conditions including operating overload conditions.A contact system comprises main and auxiliary contacts (NC contacts and NO contacts). Main contacts can switch currents of several hundred amps (depending on the size of the contactor), while auxiliary contacts are only suitable for low currents.

Control functions

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders. They are characterized by the following important features:• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current

flows in the main circuit without the ON command)• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main

circuit without the ON command)• Monitoring the ON status• Tripping if a fault occurs.

Control stations

Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different control stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control

commands via pushbuttons.• PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the

automation system (remote).• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control

station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.

• Operator panel/operator panel with display, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel/operator panel with display in the switchgear cabinet door.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can be reset. This is usually 5 minutes.Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time extend the specified time correspondingly.

Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate significantly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement between voltage and current in one phase.

Current limit monitoring

Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring. Thus, impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: If a current limit is exceeded but still below the overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor belt.

Current measuring module (IM)

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with intermediate transformers up to 820 A.

Current/voltage measuring module

The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows a current/voltage measuring module to be used instead of a current measuring module.In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also enable:• Monitoring voltages up to 690 V• Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi• Monitoring of the phase sequence.

Decoupling module

A module for connection in series upstream from a current/voltage measuring module to the system interface when voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-earthed networks.

Glossary


Device data (GSD file)

Information on the input and output range, as well as the consistency of the cyclically transmitted data is defined in the device data file (GSD file), tested with the configuration telegram from the device and, if appropriate, declared to be valid. It is used for integrating the device into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP master system (automation system).

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit 2 as applicable.A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs.

Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

The failsafe digital modules DM-F Local andDM-F PROFIsafe are used as safety relays in EMERGENCY STOP mechanisms according to EN 418 and in safety circuits according to EN 60204 (11.98):Digital module DM-F Local:For applications that require local safety-oriented tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:For applications that require decentralized, safety-oriented tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons. A failsafe SIMATIC controller adopts the logical connection between the EMERGENCY OFF button and the failsafe digital module PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe).

DIP switch

Small switch that allows basic settings to be carried out. DIP stands for dual in-line package i.e. a design with two parallel terminal rows.

Door adapter

The door adaptor is necessary for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast parameterization.

DP master

A master which works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


DP slave/DP standard slave

A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Earth-fault module (EM)

The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can be extended by an additional and more precise external earth-fault monitoring system.


SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or earth fault.There is a difference between internal and external earth-fault monitoring:Internal earth-fault monitoring:Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low impedance.The basic unit uses the total current to detect a possible fault current/earth-fault current.External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and an earth-fault module is normally used for networks that are grounded with high impedance.The earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents using an externally connected summation current transformer (e.g 3UL22).

Emergency start

Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be used to:• Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip• Control the operation of the thermal memory (motor

model) during operation, if required.Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the thermal motor model.

Glossary


EMERGENCY STOP

Stop in an emergency according EN 418 (ISO 13850).Operation intended to stop a dangerous process or movement as quickly as possible in an emergency.

EMERGENCY-STOP command device

Contact block (EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton according to EN 418 (ISO 13850), cable-operated switch with positive opening contacts according to EN 60204-1) that causes the process, machine or plant to be stopped when actuated in hazardous situations. This must have positively-opening contacts, be easy to reach and be tamper-proof.

EMERGENCY-STOP device

A protective device for initiating the appropriate procedure in an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850) and EN 60204-1

Enabling circuit

An enabling circuit generates a safety-oriented output signal. To the outside enabling circuits function as NO contacts (from the functional perspective safety-oriented opening is always considered). A single enabling circuit that is designed to be internally redundant in the safety relay (two-channel) can be implemented for Category 3/4 according to EN_954-1 (EN ISO 13849-1:2006).

European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)

European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for use in hazardous areas.

Expansion modules

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available:• Digital module (DM)• Analog module (AM)• Earth-fault module (EM)• Temperature module (TM).All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals.

Factory settings

The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a device to the default settings to which they were set at the factory.The factory settings can be restored using the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or via the SIMOCODE ES software.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


Feedback circuit

Monitors activated actuators (e.g. relays or contactors with positively-driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be activated if the feedback circuit is closed. Note: NC contacts of the monitored relays that are connected in series are integrated in the feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a contact welds in the enabling current path, it is no longer possible to re-activate the safety relay because the feedback circuit remains open.

Fieldbus

Industrial communication system that connects a multitude of field devices such as probes (sensors), actuators and drives with a control device.

Field/field level

The field level or field is separate to the higher-level control level in automation and the individual sensors and actuators can be found here.

Function block

Defined group of functions that can be freely-parameterized by the user and connected to other function blocks in order to create a complete branched logic system. This means conventional wired control circuits containing auxiliary relays and time relays can be completely replaced.

Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if required.

I/O devices

The term I/O devices is used in automation to refer to peripheral devices, for example, devices that are connected to centralized controls.

IT system

The IT system (FR Isolé Terre) is a specific type of ground connection for increased failsafe protection in case of isolation faults.

Logic module

Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions are implemented using logic modules.

Glossary


Low voltage

All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity which are located in a range whose upper limit in AC networks is generally 1000 V.

Master

PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture. Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station (slave) and are answered by it in return.

Memory module

The memory module is plugged into the system interface and is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.

Monitoring 0/4-20 mA

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA" function block via the analog module.


The following monitoring functions• Earth-fault monitoring• Current limit monitoring• Voltage monitoring• Cos phi monitoring• Active power monitoring• Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA• Operation monitoring• Temperature monitoring (analog)Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor protection and motor control. They can be active or not, according to the control function selected.

Monitoring the number of starts

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.

Monitoring voltage

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for AC) or readiness to start.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules.

Motor protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:• Overload protection• Unbalance protection• Stalled rotor protection• Thermistor protection.

Motor stop time monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for too long.

Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as applicable.

Operation monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

Operational Protection OFF (OPO)

The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe position and switches the motor off.

Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and the external system interface.It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series and the SIMOCODE pro V device series.

Operator panel (OPD)

The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative to the standard operator panel (OP).It displays the current measured values, operating and

Glossary


diagnostic data, status information for the motor feeder at the switchgear cabinet and the device-internal error protocol. It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the switchgear cabinet. Its keys can be used to control the motor and to navigate the display menu.The operator panel with display can only be used in combination with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03* onwards.

Organization blocks

Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user program. The order that the user program is processed in is specified in the organization blocks.

Overload protection

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors according to IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.

Pause time

The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups possible within a short period of time.

Performance Level (PL)

According to the standard EN ISO 13849-1 "a distinct level specifying the capability of safety-relevant parts of a control to execute a safety function under predictable conditions". Five Performance Levels are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of the probability of a dangerous failure per hour.PL "e" corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.

PC cable

The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC to the system interface of a basic unit for device parameterization.

Pozidriv (PZ)

Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.

Process automation

Automation of continuous production processes.Controls manufacturing processes e.g. in the chemical processing or water industry.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


PROFIBUS

Process field bus, European process and fieldbus standard as defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS). It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-compatible automation systems and field devices at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP (decentralized peripherals), FMS (fieldbus message specification), PA (process automation) or TF (technological functions) protocol.

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals).The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central DP devices and the I/O devices.


SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).

PROFIBUS DPV1

Expansion of the DP protocol.This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.

PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS User Organization must be adhered to. They contain important information about the cable routing and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.

PROFINET

Automation standard for Industrial Ethernet.

PROFIsafe

The PROFIBUS safety profile (PROFIsafe) specifies the communication between failsafe I/O devices and failsafe controllers. It is based on the standard for safety-oriented applications and the experiences of PLC users and manufacturers in the PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO). The PROFIsafe profile is certified by the TÜV and the IFA (Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the German Social Accident Insurance). The newest version of the PROFIsafe specification is the Profile for Safe Technology V1.11 from July 2001.

Glossary


Programmable logic controller (PLC)

A controller whose functions are stored as a program on the control device. The PLC consists of a CPU, memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The I/O devices and the programming language are based on the needs of the control engineering.

Programming device

A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial purposes. It is characterized by a special hardware and software configuration for SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.

Protective extra low voltage (PELV)

Protective measure against electric shock (previously "protective extra low voltage with safe isolation").Active components and exposed conductive parts may be grounded and connected to the protective conductor in contrast to SELV. Safe isolation means that the primary circuit of the transformer must be isolated from the secondary circuit by means of double or reinforced insulation. PELV is used where active low voltage conductors or exposed conductive parts must be grounded. This is the case, for example, if equipotential bonding is required to prevent sparks in containers and hazardous areas. However dangerous leakage currents can flow over the exposed conductive parts through the enclosure ground (independent of the low voltage), if faults occur in the higher-level network.

SELV

Safety extra low voltageLow electric voltage (up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC), that offers significant protection against electric shock due to its low value and insulation.Devices that are operated with SELV and do not generate high voltages are categorized as Class III according to DIN EN 61140 (VDE 0140-1).

SFB

System function blockA block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like a function block (FB) in the user program if required.

SFC

System function:A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like a function (FC) in the user program if required.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

A measure of the safety-related performance of electric and electronic control equipment defined in IEC 61508.The IEC standard details four SIL levels (SIL1 to SIL4) that define safety requirements for electric and electronic devices. The specified safety-related function in the event of a fault is expressed by the SIL value.

SIMATIC

Term for industrial automation products and systems from Siemens AG.

SIMATIC PDM

You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software.The following options are available:• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program• PDM integrated into STEP 7.

SIMOCODE ES

SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or Windows 7 Ultimate and Professional.

SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)

Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE pro object manager are installed on a PC/PD, SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7 configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. It contains:• The corresponding diagnostics and driver modules

containing the respective diagnostics and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7

• The elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for operating and monitoring.

Note

The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and improvement.Current service packs and hotfixes can be downloaded at http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.


Glossary


SIMOCODE pro S7 Slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave that has the following characteristics:• It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process

alarms)• It can be parameterized.

Slave

PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture. Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station (slave) and are answered by it in return.

Stalled rotor protection

After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload protection. The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as premature aging of the motor.

Standard function

Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be activated according to need and, as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder.They are already available, work independently of the selected control function and can be used/activated as optional additions.

Station

A device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master, slave.

Statistical data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which can be read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target System >

Service Data/Statistical Data (for example).

STEP7

Engineering system Contains programming languages for creating user programs for SIMATIC S7 controls.

Stop category 0

Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the power to the machine's drive elements.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or on the operator panel/operator panel with display from soiling or to seal it.

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series using an analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor windings, bearings, coolant or gear box oil. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or gaseous media.

Temperature monitoring

See temperature module (TM).

Terminal block

Insulating component with one or more insulated terminals for fixing to a support.

Test position feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state. This means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.

Thermistor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.

TN-C system

In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combiné) 1 wire is used simultaneously as a protective earth (PE) and neutral wire (N).

TN-S system

In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Séparé) the neutral wire and the protective earth are led separately from the transformer up to the appliance.

Glossary


Unbalance protection

The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve takes place automatically, since the heat development in motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.

Universal current (UC)

Universal current Feature of devices that can be operated with both AC and DC current.

Voltage monitoring

See monitoring voltage


Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.

Glossary

SIMOCODE pro


SIMOCODE pro

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

ToSIEMENS AGI IA CE MK&ST 3

92220 Amberg, Germany

Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337

SIMOCODE pro Manual

Did you notice any mistakes while reading this manual? Please use this reply sheet to inform us about them.We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.

From (please complete)

Name

Company/Department

Address

Telephone

Fax

www.siemens.com/automation

Subject to change without prior noticeOrder No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 © Siemens AG 2011

Siemens AGIndustry SectorPostfach 23 5590713 FÜRTHGERMANY

Service & Support

Internet:www.siemens.com/simocode

Information and Download Center:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial

Newsletter – always up to date:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/newsletter

E-Business in the Industry Mall:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall

Product Information System (ProdIS):www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support

ATEX:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex

Certificates:www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals

Contact for all technical information: Technical Assistance Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900 E-Mail: [email protected] www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance

System Manual SIMOCODE Pro En

Documents

Transcript of System Manual SIMOCODE Pro En